AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 6(d) Group-18 Elements Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 6(d) Group-18 Elements

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What inspired Bartlett for carrying out reaction between Xe and PtF6 ?
Answer:

  1. At first Bartlett prepared a red compound [latex]\mathrm{O}_2^{+}+\mathrm{PtF}_6^{-}[/latex]
  2. As the first Ionisation Enthalpy of molecular oxygen is identical with that the Xe.
  3. He made efforts to prepare same type of compound with Xe and was successful in preparing another red colour compound Xe+ [latex]\mathrm{PtF}_6^{-}[/latex] by mixing PtF6 and Xe.

Question 2.
Which of the following does not exist ?
a) XeOF4
b) NeF2
c) XeF2
d) XeF6
Answer:
Given compounds are XeOF4, NeF2, XeF2, XeF6.
NeF2 does not exist among the above compounds.

Reason : Due to small size and high I.E. of ‘Ne’. It does not form chemical compounds.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements

Question 3.
Why do noble gases have comparatively large atomic sizes ?
Answer:
Noble gases have comparatively large atomic sizes as they have vander waals radii which is larger than both the ionic and covalent radii.

Question 4.
List out the uses of Neon. [A.P. Mar. 18]
Answer:
Uses of Ne:

  1. Ne is used in discharge tubes and fluor escent bulbs for advertisement display purpose.
  2. ‘Ne’ – bulbs are used in botanical gardens and in green houses.

Question 5.
Write any two uses of argon.
Answer:
Uses of Ar :

  1. ‘Ar’ is used to create inert atmosphere in high temperature net allurgical process.
  2. ‘Ar’ is ued in filling electric bulbs.

Question 6.
In modern diving apparatus, a mixture of He and O2 is used – Why ? [A.P. Mar. 16]
Answer:
In modem diving apparatus, a mixture of He and O2 is used because He is very low soluble in blood.

Question 7.
Helium is heavier than hydrogen. Yet helium is used (instead of H2) in filling baloons for meteorological observations – Why ?
Answer:
‘He’ is a non-inflammable and light gas. Hence it is used in filling baloons for meterological observations.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements

Question 8.
How is XeO3 prepared ?
Answer:
XeF6 on hydrolysis produce XeO3
XeF6 + 3H2O → XeO3 + 6HF

Question 9.
Give the preparation of
a) XeOF4 and
b) XeOaF2
Answer:
Partial hydrolysis of XeF6 gives oxy fluorides XeOF4 and XeO2F2
XeF6 + H2O → XeOF4 + 2HF
XeF6 + 2H2O → XeO2F2 + 4HF

Question 10.
Explain the structure of XeO3. [T.S. Mar. 16]
Answer:
Structure of XeO3

  1. Central atom is ‘Xe’
  2. ‘Xe’ under goes sp3 hybridisation in 3rd excited state.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 1
  3. ‘Xe’ forms 3σ-bonds and 3π-bonds with three oxygens.
  4. Shape of molecule is pyramidal with bond angle 103°.

Question 11.
Noble gases are inert – explain.
Answer:
Noble gases are chemically inert:

  1. Noble gases have stable electronic configuration coctet configuration except He)
  2. Noble gas have high Ionisation energy values and have large positive values of electron gain Enthalpy.

Question 12.
Write the name and formula of the first noble gas compound prepared by Bertlett.
Answer:
The first noble gas compound prepared by Bertlett is XePtF6. Name of the compound is xenon hexa fluoro platinate.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements

Question 13.
ExplaIn the shape of XeF4 on the basis of VSEPR theory
Answer:
Shape of XeF4:

  1. Central atom in XeF4 is ‘Xe’.
  2. Xe undergoes sp3d2 hybridisation in it’s 2nd excited. state.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 2
  3. Shape of the molecule is square planar with bond angle 90° and bond length 1 .95Å.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 3
  4. Xe – forms four o-bonds by the overlap of sp3d2 – 2pz(F) orbitals.

Question 14.
Give the outer electronic configuration of noble gases.
Answer:
The outer electronic configuration of noble gases is ns2np6 (except He (1s2)

Question 15.
Why do noble gases form compounds with fluorine and oxygen only ?
Answer:
Noble gases form compounds with flourine and oxygen only.
Reason : Oxygen and Fluorine are most electronegative elements.

Question 16.
How is XeOF4 prepared ? Describe its molecular shape.
Answer:
Partial hydrolysis of XeF6 gives XeOF4
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 4
XeF6 + H2O → XeOF4 + 2HF
XeOF4 is a colourless volatile liquid it has a square pyramidal shape.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements

Question 17.
What is the major source of helium ?
Answer:
The major source of helium is natural gas.

Question 18.
Which noble gas is radioactive ? How is it formed ?
Answer:
Radon (Rn) is radio active noble gas. Radon is obtained as decay product of 86Ra226
86Ra22686Rn222 + 2He4

Question 19.
Name the following :
a) most abundant noble gas in atmosphere
b) radioactive noble gas
c) noble gas with least boiling point
d) noble gas forming large number of compounds
e) noble gas not present in atmosphere
Answer:
a) Argon is the most abundant noble gas in atmosphere.
b) Radon is the radio active noble gas.
c) Helium has lowest boiling point (4.2K)
d) Xenon forms large number of compounds.
e) Radon is not present in atmosphere.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
How are Xenon fluorides XeF2, XeF4 and XeF6 obtained?
Answer:
Xenon forms the binary fluorides XeF2, XeF4, XeF6 as follows. These are formed by direct combination of Xe and F2.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 5

Question 2.
How are XeO3 and XeOF4 prepared? [Mar. 14]
Answer:
XeF6 on hydrolysis produce XeO3
XeF6 + 3H2O → XeO3 + 6HF
Partial hydrolysis of XeF6 gives XeOF4
XeF6 + H2O → XeOF4 + 2HF

Question 3.
Give the formulae and describe the structures of a noble gas species, isoelectronic with
a) ICl4
b) IBr2
c) BrO3
Answer:
a) ICl4 is also electronic with XeF4 and it has square planar shape.
b) IBr2 is also electronic with XeF2 and it has linear shape.
c) BrO3 is also electronic with XeO4 and it has tetrahedral shape.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements

Question 4.
Explain the reaction of the following with water.
a) XeF2
b) XeF4
c) XeF6
Answer:
a) XeF2 is hydrolysed to form Xe, HF and O2
2XeF2 + 2H2O → 2Xe + 4HF + O2

b) XeF4 is hydrolysed to give XeO3
6XeF4 + 12H2O → 4Xe + 2XeO3 + 24 HF + 3O2

c) XeF6 undergo hydrolysis to form XeO3
XeF6 + 3H2O → XeO3 + 6HF
XeF6 undergo partial hydrolysis to form XeOF4 + XeO2F2
XeF6 + H2O → XeOF4 + 2HF
XeF6 + 2H2O → XeO2F2 + 4HF

Question 5.
Explain the structures of [A.P. Mar. 18] [Mar. 14]
a) XeF2 and
b) XeF4
Answer:
a) Structure of XeF2 :

  1. In XeF2 central atom is ‘Xe’.
  2. ‘Xe’ undergoes sp3d hybridisation in it’s 1st excited state
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 6
  3. Shape of molecule is linear
  4. Xe form two σ – bonds with two fluorines (sp3 – 2pz overlap)
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 7

b) Structure of XeF4 :

  1. Central atom in XeF4 is ‘Xe’.
  2. Xe undergoes sp3d2 hybridisation in it’s 2nd excited, state.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 8
  3. Shape of the molecule is square planar with bond angle 90° and bond length 1.95Å.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 9
  4. Xe – forms four a – bonds by the overlap of sp3d2 – 2pz(F) orbitals.

Question 6.
Explain the structures of
a) XeF6 and
b) XeOF4
Answer:
a) Structure of XeF6 :

  1. Central atom in XeF6 is ‘Xe’
  2. Xe under goes sp3d3 hybridisation in it’s 3rd excited state.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 10
  3. Shape of molecule is distorted octahedral.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 11

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements

b) Structure of α XeOF4

  1. In XeOF4 molecule ‘Xe’ under goes sp3d2 hybridisation.
  2. Shape of the molecule is square pyramid.
  3. There is one Xe-O double bond containing
    pπ = dπ overlaping.
    Partial hydrolysis of XeF6 gives XeOF4
    XeF6 + H2O → XeOF4 + 2HF
    XeOF4 is a colourless volatile liquid it has a square pyramidal shape.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 12

Question 7.
Complete the following.
a) XeF2 + H2O →
b) XeF2 + PF5
c) XeF4 + SbF5
d) XeF6 + ASF5
e) XeF4 + O2F2
f) NaF + XeF6
Answer:
a) 2XeF2 + 2H2O → 2Xe + 4HF + O2
b) XeF2 + PF5 → [XeF]+ + A[F6]
c) XeF4 + SbF5 → [XeF3]+ [SbF6]
d) XeF6 + ASF5 → [Xe2F11]+ [ASF6]
e) XeF4 + O2F2 → XeF6 + O2
f) NaF + XeF6 → Na+ [XeF7]

Question 8.
How are XeF2 and XeF4 prepared ? Give their structures. [T.S. Mar. 18]
Answer:
Xenon forms the binary fluorides XeF2, XeF4, XeF6 as follows. These are formed by direct combination of Xe and F2.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 13
Structure of XeF2

  1. In XeF2 central atom is Xe’.
  2. ‘Xe’ undergoes sp3d hybridisation in it’s 1st excited state
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 14
  3. Shape of molecule is linear.
  4. Xe form two σ bonds with two fluorines.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements

b) Structure of XeF4 :

  1. Central atom in XeF4 is ‘Xe’.
  2. Xe undergoes sp3d2 hybridisation in it’s 2nd excited state.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 15
  3. Shape of the molecule is square planar with bond angle 90° and bond length 1.95Å.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 16
  4. Xe – forms four σ-bonds by the overlap of sp3d2 – 2pz (F) orbitals.

Long Answer Question

Question 1.
How are XeF2, XeF4 and XeF6 prepared ? Explain their reaction with water. Discuss their structures. [A.P. Mar. 15]
Answer:
Xenon forms the binary fluorides XeF2, XeF4, XeF6 as follows. These are formed by direct combination of Xe and F2.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 17
Reaction with water:

  1. XeF2 is hydrolysed to form Xe, HF and O2
    2XeF2 + 2H2O → 2Xe + 4HF + O2
  2. XeF4 is hydrolysed to give XeO3
    6XeF4 + 12H2O → 4Xe + 2XeO3 + 24 HF + 3O2
  3. XeFg undergo hydrolysis to form XeO3
    XeF6 + 3H2O → XeOF3 + 6HF
  4. XeF6 undergo partial hydrolysis to form XeOF4 and XeO2F2
    XeF6 + H2O → XeOF4 + 2HF
    XeF6 + 2H3O → XeO2F2 + 4HF

Structure of XeF2:

  1. In XeF2 central atom is ‘Xe’.
  2. ‘Xe’ undergoes sp3d hybridisation in it’s 1st excited state
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 18
  3. Shape of molecule is linear.
  4. Xe form two σ-bonds with two fluorines.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 19

b) Structure of XeF4 :

  1. Central atom in XeF4 is ‘Xe’.
  2. Xe undergoes sp3d2 hybridisation in it’s 2nd excited state.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 20
  3. Shape of the molecule is square planar with bond angle 90° and bond length 1.95Å.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 21
  4. Xe – forms four σ-bonds by the overlap of sp3d2 – 2pz (F) orbitals.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements

Structure of XeF6 :

  1. Central atom in XeF6 is ‘Xe’
  2. Xe under goes sp3d3 hybridisation in it’s 3rd excited state.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 10
  3. Shape of molecule is distorted octahedral.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements 11

Textual Examples

Question 1.
Why are the elements of group 18 known as noble gases ?
Solution:
The elements present in Group 18 have their valence shell orbitals completely filled and, therefore, react with a few elements only under certain conditions. Therefore, they are now known as noble gases.

Question 2.
Noble gases have very low boiling points. Why ?
Solution:
Noble gases being monoatomic have no interatomic forces except weak dispersion forces and therefore, they are liquefied at very low temperatures. Hence, they have low boiling points.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(d) Group-18 Elements

Question 3.
Does the hydrolysis of XeF6 lead to a redox reaction ?
Solution:
No, the products of hydrolysis are XeOF4 and XeO2F2 where the oxidation states of all the elements remain the same as it was in the reacting state.

Intext Questions

Question 1.
Why is helium used in diving apparatus ?
Solution:
Helium is used in diving apparatus due to its very low solubility in blood.

Question 2.
Balance the following equation :
XeF6 + H2O → XeO2F2 + HF
Solution:
XeF6 + 2H2O → XeO2F2 + 4HF

Question 3.
Why has it been difficult to study the chemistry of radon ?
Solution:
Radon is a radioactive element with very short half-life of 3.82 days. That is why, the study of chemistry of radon is a difficult task.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 6(c) Group-17 Elements Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Which halogen produces O2 and O3 on passing through water?
Answer:
Fluorine produces O2 and O3 on passing through water.
3F2 + 3H2O → 6HF + O3
2F2 + 2H2O → 4HF + O2

Question 2.
Interhalogen compounds are more reactive than the constituent halogens except fluorine – explain.
Answer:
Inter halogen compounds are more reactive than halogens. This is because X – X’ bond in interhalogens is weaker than X – X bond in halogens except F – F bond.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 3.
What is the use of ClF3?
Answer:
ClF3 is very useful fluorinating agent and it is used for the production of VF6 in the enrichment
of U235.
U(s) + 3ClF3(l) → UF6(g) + 3ClF(g)

Question 4.
Write two uses of ClO2.
Answer:
Uses of ClO2:

  • ClO2 is highly reactive oxidising agent.
  • It is used as bleaching agent for paper pulp and textiles.
  • It is used in water treatment.

Question 5.
Why are halogens coloured?
Answer:
Halogens are coloured due to the absorption of radiations in visible region which results in the excitation of outer electrons to higher energy level. Halogens absorb different quanta of radiation and display different colours.

Question 6.
Write the reactions of F2 and Cl2 with water. [Mar. 14]
Answer:
Fluorine produces O2 and O3 on passing through water.
3F2 + 3 H2O → 6HF + O3
2F2 +2 H2O → 4HF + O2

Chlorine dissolves in water giving a solution of chlorine water. A freshly prepared solution of chlorine water contains HCl and HOCl .
Cl2 + H2O → HCl + HOCl
HOCl is unstable and dissociates to give nascent oxygen
HOCl → HCl + (O)

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 7.
With which neutral molecule, ClO is isoelectronic ? Is that molecule a Lewis base ? (Hint: ClF; Yes)
Answer:

  • ClO is isoelectronic with the neutral molecule ClF.
  • Yes. ClF is a Lewis base (Electron pair donar).

Question 8.
Arrange the following in the order of the property indicated for each set.
a) F2, Cl2, Br2, I2 – increasing bond dissociation enthalpy.
b) HF, HCl, HBr, HI – increasing acidic strength
c) HF, HCl, HBr, HI – increasing boiling points.
Answer:
a) Increasing bond’ dissociation enthalpy order
I2 < F2 < Br2 < Cl2

b) Increasing acidic strength order
HF < HCl < HBr < HI

c) Increasing boiling points order
HCl < HBr < HI < HF

Question 9.
Electron gain enthalpy of fluorine is less than that of chlorine – explain.
Answer:
The negative electron gain enthalpy of the fluorine is less them that of chlorine. This is due to small size of fluorine atom which results in strong inter electronic repulsions in the relatively small 2p orbitals of fluorine and thus the incoming electron does not experience much attraction.

Question 10.
HF is a liquid while HCl is a gas – explain.
Answer:
HF is a liquid due to the presence of inter molecular hydrogen bonding where as HCl is a gas due to there is no such type of bonding in it.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 11.
Bond dissociation enthalpy of F2 is less than that of Cl2 – explain.
Ans. Bond dissociation enthalpy of F2 is less than that of Cl2
Explanation:
In F2 molecule electron repulsions are greater among lone pairs because these lone pairs are much closer to each other than in case of Cl2.

Question 12.
Write the formulae of the compounds, in which oxygen has positive oxidation states and mention the oxidation states of oxygen in them.
Answer:

  • In OF2 and O2F2 oxygen has positive oxidation states.
  • In OF2, oxygen oxidation state is + 2.
  • In O2F2 oxygen oxidation state is + 1.

Question 13.
What is the use of O2F2 and I2O5?
Answer:
Use of O2F5:
O2F2 is a fluorinating agent. O2F2 oxidises plutonium to PUF6 and the reaction is used in removing plutonium as PUF6 from spent nuclear fuel.
Use of I2O5:
I2O5 is a good oxidising agent and is used in the estimation of carbon monoxide (CO).

Question 14.
Write two uses of hydrogen chloride.
Answer:
Uses of hydrogen chloride :

  • It is used in medicines and as a laboratory reagent.
  • It is used in the manufacturing of Cl2, NH4Cl and glucose (from com starch).
  • It is used in extracting glue from bones-and purifying bone black.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 15.
Explain the reactions of Cl2 with NaOH. [T.S. Mar. 16]
Answer:

  1. Reaction with cold dilute NaOH: Chlorine reacts with cold dilute NaOH to give sodium hypochlorite and sodium chloride.
    2 NaOH (cold, dil.) + Cl2 → NaCl + NaOCl + H2O
  2. Reaction with hot concentrated NaOH : Chlorine reacts with hot concentrated NaOH to give sodium chlorate and sodium chloride.
    3 Cl2 + 6 NaOH (hot, Conc.) → 5 NaCl + NaClO3 + 3 H2O

Question 16.
What happens when Cl2 reacts with dry slaked lime ? [A.P. Mar. 16, 15]
Answer:
Chlorine reacts with dry slaked lime and forms bleaching powder.
Ca(OH)2 + Cl2 → CaOCl2 + H2O

Question 17.
Chlorine acts as an oxidizing agent – explain with two examples.
Answer:
Chlorine acts as oxidising agent.
Example – 1: Cl2 oxidises Iodine to Iodate .
I2 + 6 H2O + 5 Cl2 → 2HIO3 + 10 HCl
Example – 2 : Cl2 oxidises Sodium Sulphite to Sodium Sulphate
Cl2 + Na2SO3 + H2O → Na2SO4 + 2 HCl

Question 18.
What is aqua regia ? Write its reaction with gold and platinum.
Answer:
A mixture of 3 parts of Cone. HCl and one part of Cone. HNO3 constitutes aqua regia. It is used for dissolving noble metals.
It’s reaction with gold :
Au + 4H+ + [latex]\mathrm{NO}_3^{-}[/latex] + 4Cl → [latex]\mathrm{AuCl}_4^{-}[/latex] + NO + 2 H2O
It’s reaction with Platinum
3Pt + 16H+ + 4[latex]\mathrm{NO}_3^{-}[/latex] + 18 Cl → [latex]3 \mathrm{PtCl}_6^{-2}[/latex] + 4 NO + 8H2O

Question 19.
How is chlorine manufactured by Deacon’s method ? [T.S. & A.P. Mar. 19 & T.S. Mar. 16]
Answer:
Deacon’s process : In Deacon’s process chlorine is obtained by the oxidation of hydrogen chloride gas by atmospheric oxygen in the presence of CuCl2 (catalyst) at 723 K.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 1

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 20.
Chlorine acts as a bleaching agent only in the presence of moisture – explain.
Answer:
Moist chlorine is a powerful bleaching agent. This bleaching property is due to oxidation.
Cl2 + H2O → 2HCl + (O)
Ex : Coloured substance + (O) → colourless substance.

Question 21.
The decreasing order of acidic character among hypohalogen acids is HClO > HBrO >HIO. Give reason.
Answer:
Given the decreasing order of acidic character among hypohalogen acids is
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 2
HaO > HBrO > HIO
From the above mentioned Ka values the given order of hypohalogen acids – acid strength order is
HClO > HBrO > HIO

Question 22.
The acidic nature of the oxoacids of chlorine is
HOCl < HClO2 < HClO3 < HClO4 – explain.
(Hint: HA + H2O ⇌ H3O+ + A conjugate base, greater the stability of A, lesser will be its basic strength or greater will be the tendency of HA to release H+. In other words, stronger will be the acid HA. Among the conjugate bases of oxoacids of chlorine, the stability order is HOCl < [latex]\mathrm{ClO}_2^{-}[/latex] > [latex]\mathrm{ClO}_3^{-}[/latex] > [latex]\mathrm{ClO}_4^{-}[/latex])
Answer:
Given the acidic nature of oxoacids of chlorine is
HOCl < H[latex]\mathrm{ClO}_2^{-}[/latex] > H[latex]\mathrm{ClO}_3^{-}[/latex] > [latex]\mathrm{ClO}_4^{-}[/latex]
HA + H2O ⇌ H3O+ + A conjugate base, greater the stability of A, lesser will be its basic strength or greater will be the tendency of HA to release H+. In other words, stronger will be the acid HA. Among the conjugate bases of oxoacids of chlorine, the stability order is
HOCl < H[latex]\mathrm{ClO}_2^{-}[/latex] > H[latex]\mathrm{ClO}_3^{-}[/latex] > H[latex]\mathrm{ClO}_4^{-}[/latex]

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 23.
What are interhalogen compounds ? Give two examples.
Answer:
The binary diamagnetic compounds of halogens which are formed by the reaction of halogens among themselves are called interhalogen compounds.
E.g.: IF7, ClF3, BrF3, ClF, IF3 etc.

Question 24.
Explain the structure of ClF3.
Answer:
Structure of ClF3:

  • Central atom in ClF3 is ‘Cl’
  • Excited state electronic configuration of ‘Cl’ is
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 3
  • Cl atom undergoes sp3d hybridisation
  • It is a bent T-shaped molecule (or) trigonal bipyramidal with 2 – positions occupied by lone pairs.

Question 25.
OF2 should be called oxygen difluolide and not fluorine oxide – Why ?
Answer:
OF2 should be called oxygen difluoride and riot fluoride oxide.
The binary compotmds of oxygen with fluoride are not pronounced as oxides because the electronegativity of fluorine is greater than oxygen.

Question 26.
Iodine is more soluble in KI than in water – Explain.
Answer:
Iodine is more soluble in KI than in water.

Reason:
Iodine combine with KI forming soluble complex KI3.
KI + I2 → KI3 (Soluble complex)
Iodine does not dissolve in water. This is due to positive free energy change (+ ∆G)

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 27.
Among the hydrides of halogens
a) Which is most stable ?
b) Which is most acidic ?
c) Which has lowest boiling point ?
Answer:
a) Among hydrides of halogens HF is most stable.
b) Among hydrides of halogens HI is most acidic.
c) Among hydrides of halogens HCl (189K) has lowest boiling point.

Question 28.
Compare the bleaching action of Cl2 and SO2.
Answer:

  • Cl2 is a powerful bleaching agent. This bleaching action is due to oxidation.
    Cl2 + H2O → 2HCl+ (O)
    Coloured substance + (O) → colourless substance.
  • It bleaches vegetable or organic matter in the presence of moisture. Bleaching effect of Cl2 is permanent.
  • SO2 acts as bleaching agent in presence of moisture.
    SO2 + 2 H2O → H2SO4 + 2[H]
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 4
  • SO2 bleaches wool and silk.

Question 29.
Give the oxidation states of halogens in the following :
a) Cl2O
b) [latex]\mathrm{ClO}_2^{-}[/latex]
c) KBrO3
d) NaClO4
Answer:
a) Cl2O :
2x – 2 = 0
x = -+ 1
Oxidation state of chlorine in Cl2O is + 1.

b) [latex]\mathrm{ClO}_2^{-}[/latex]
x + 2(-2) = -1
x = -1 + 4 = +3
In latex]\mathrm{ClO}_2^{-}[/latex] the oxidation state of ‘Cl’ is + 3

c) KBrO3 :
1 + x + 3 (-2) = 0
x = + 5
In KBrO3 the oxidation state of Br is + 5.

d) NaClO4
1 + x + 4(-2) = 0
x = + 7
In NaClO4 the oxidation state of Cl is + 7.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 30.
Describe the molecular shape of [latex]\mathrm{I}_3^{-}[/latex] .
(Hint: Central iodine is of sp3d. – linear)
Answer:

  • In Tri iodide ion central iodine atom undergo sp3d hybridisation.
  • It contains three lone pairs and two bond pairs.
  • According to VSEPR theory it has linear shape.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 5

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
How can you prepare Cl2 from HCl and HCl from Cl2 ? Write the reactions.
Answer:
Preparation of Cl2 from HCl:

  • On heating MnO2 with Conc. HCl, Cl2 gas is liberated
    MnO2 + 4HCl → MnCl2 + Cl2 + 2H2O
  • By the Õxidation of HCl gas by atmospheric oxygen in presence of CuCl2 catalyst at 723 K.
    4 HCl + O2 AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 6 2Cl2 + 2 H2O

Preparation of HCl from Cl2:

  • Cl2 when reacted with H2 to form HCl
    H2(g) + Cl2(g) → 2HCl(g)

Question 2.
Write balanced equations for the following.
a) NaCl is heated with Conc.H2SO4 In the presence of MnO2.
b) Chlorine is passed into a solution of Nal ¡n water.
Answer:
a) NaCl is heated with Conc.H2SO4 in presence of MnO2 liberates Cl2 gas.
4 NaCl + MnO2 + 4 H2SO4 → MnCl2 + 4 NaHSO4 + 2 H2O + Cl2.

b) When chlorine water is added to a solution of sodium iodide a brown colour is formed.
Cl2 + 2 NaI → 2 NaCl + I2

Question 3.
Explain the structures of
a) BrF5 and
b) IF2.
Answer:
a) Structure of BrF5.

  • Central atom in BrF5 is Br.
  • ‘Br’ undergoes sp3d2 hybridisation in 2nd excited state.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 7
  • Shape of the molecule is octahedral with one position occupied by a lone pair (or) square pyramidal.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

b) Structure of IF7 :

  • Central atom in IF7 is T.
  • T undergoes sp3d3 hybridisation in 3rd excited state.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 8
  • Shape of the molecule is Penta gonal bipyramid structure
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 9

Question 4.
Write a short note on the hydrides of halogens.
Answer:
Hydrides of halogens :
Formation :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 10
These compounds dissolve in water to form hydrohalic acids.
Boiling points HF – 293 K
HCl – 189K
HBr – 206 K
HI – 238 K
The decreasing order of stability of these compounds is
HF > HCl > HBr > HI
The increasing order of acidic strength of these compounds
HF < HCl < HBr < HI

Question 5.
How is chlorine obtained in the laboratory ? How does it react with the following ? [T.S. Mar. 15]
a) cold dil. NaOH
b) excess NH3
c) KI
Answer:
In the laboratory chlorine is prepared by the oxidation of HCl with MnO2.
4 HCl + MnO2 → MnCl2 + 2 H2O + Cl2

a) Chlorine reacts with cold dil. NaOH to form sodium hypochlorite.
Cl2 + 2 NaOH → NaCl + NaOCl + H2O

b) Cl2 reacts with excess of NH3, Nitrogen and ammonium chloride are formed.
8 NH3 + 3 Cl2 → 6 NH4Cl + N2

c) Cl2 reacts with KI to liberate iodine
Cl2 + 2KI → 2 KCl + I2

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 6.
What are interhalogen compounds ? Give some examples to illustrate the definition. How are they classified ?
Answer:
The binary diamagnetic compounds of halogens which are formed by the reaction of halogens among themselves are called interhalogen compounds.
E.g.: IF7, ClF3, BrF3, ClF, IF3 etc.
The above examples are binary diamagnetic compounds and formed by* combination of halogens only. .
Inter halogen compounds are classified into four types.

  1. AX – Type : Eg : ClF, BrF
  2. AX3 – Type : Eg: ClF3, IF3
  3. AX5 – Type : Eg : ClF5, BrF5
  4. AX7 – Type : Eg : IF7

‘A’ is less electronegative halogen.
X is more electronegative halogens.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
How is ClF3 prepared ? How does it react with water ? Explain its structure.
Answer:
Preparation of ClF3: Chlorine reacts with excess of fluorine to form ClF3.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 11
Reaction with H2O: ClF3 reacts with water explosively and oxidises water to give oxygen or in controlled quantities oxygen diflouride (OF2) as well as HF and HCl.
ClF3 + 2H2O → 3 HF + HCl + O2
ClF3 + H2O → 4 HF + HCl + OF2
Structure of ClF3:

  • Central atom in ClF3 is ‘Cl’
  • Excited state electronic configuration of ‘Cl’ is
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 12
  • Cl atom undergoes sp3d hybridisation
  • It is a bent T-shaped molecule (or) trigonal bipyramidal with 2 – positions occupied by lone pairs.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 2.
How is chlorine prepared in the laboratory ? How does it react with the following ? [T.S. Mar. 19, 15]
a) Iron
b) hot, cone. NaOH
c) acidified FeSO4
d) Iodine
e) H2S
f) Na2S2O3
Answer:
In the laboratory chlorine is prepared by the oxidation of HCl with MnO2.
4 HCl + MnO2 → MnCl2 + 2 H2O + Cl2

a) Cl2 reacts with Iron to form FeCl3
2 Fe + 3Cl2 → 2 FeCl3

b) Cl2 reacts with hot Cone. NaOH to form sodium chloride and sodium chlorate
3Cl2 + 6 NaOH → 5 NaCl + NaClO3 + 3 H2O

c) Cl2 reacts with acidified FeSO4 and ferric ions are formed.
2 FeSO4 + H2SO4 + Cl2 → Fe2(SO4)3 + 2 HCl

d) Cl2 reacts with Iodine to form ICl
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 12

e) Cl2 reacts with H2S and forms HCl and ‘S’
Cl2 + H2S → 2 HCl + S

f) ‘S’ is precipitated by the reaction of Cl2 with Na2S2O3.
‘Na2S2O3 + Cl2 + H2O → Na2SO4 + 2 HCl + S

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 3.
Discuss the anomalous behaviour of fluorine.
Answer:
Abnormal behaviour of fluorine : Fluorine being the first element in the group differs considerably from other halogens. The reasons may be traced out to one or more of the following, characteristics.
F2 has

  1. a small size
  2. The highest electronegativity amongst the known elements.
  3. No d-orbital are available in its valence shell.
  4. Low enthalpy of F-F bond dissociation and
  5. Only two electrons are present in the penultimate shell while other halogens 8 electrons.

The abnormal characteristics of F2 can be summarised as follows.

  1. F2 exhibits -1 oxidation state because it is the most electronegative element known. Therefore, no higher oxidation state for it in its compounds.
  2. In it’s hydride HF, it has hydrogen bonding, but other halides of hydrogen do not show this property. HF can form [latex]\mathrm{HF}_2^{-}[/latex] ion. No such ions are known with other halogens.
  3. It combines with carbon while others do not combine even under drastic conditions.
  4. F2 has a lower EA compared to that of Cl2 even though F2 is the most electronegative element.
  5. Fluorides have the highest ionic character among the halides.
    Example : AlF2 is ionic while AlCl3 is covalent compound.

Question 4.
How is chlorine prepared by electrolytic method ? Explain its reaction with [A.P. Mar. 16, 15]
a) NaOH and
b) NH3 under different conditions.
Answer:
Preparation of chlorine by electrolytic method : Chlorine is obtained by the electrolysis of brine solutions (Cone. NaCl). Cl2 gas is liberated at anode.
2 NaCl → 2 Na+ + 2Cl
2 H2O + 2e → 2 OH + H2 (cathode)
2 Cl → Cl2 + 2e (anode)
a)

  1. NaOH:
    Chlorine reacts with cold dil. NaOH to form sodium hypochlorite.
    Cl2 + 2 NaOH → NaCl + NaOCl + H2O
  2. Cl2 reacts with hot cone. NaOH to form sodium chloride and sodium chlorate.
    3 Cl2 + 6 NaOH → 5 NaCl + NaClO3 + 3 H2O

b)

  1. Cl2 reacts with excess of NH3, Nitrogen and ammonium chlorate are formed.
    8 NH3 + 3 Cl2 → 6 NH4Cl + N2
  2. NH3 reacts with excess of Cl2 to form NCl3 and HCl.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 13

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 5.
Write the names and formulae of the oxoacids of chlorine. Explain their structures and relative acidic nature.
Answer:
Four oxyacids of chlorine are known. They are
Hypochlorous acid – HOCl
Chlorous acid – HClO2
Chloric acid – HClO3
Perchloric acid – HClO4
Structure of HClO : In this chlorine atom is sp3 hybridised. Outer electronic configuration of Cl in ClO after sp3 hybridisation.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 14
Shape is tetrahedral with 3 lone pairs (or) linear.
No π – bonds.

Chlorous acid : (HClO2) : Chlorine is in sp3 hybrid state, in first excited state. Shape is tetrahedral with 2 lone pairs (or) angular one πd-p bond is present.
First excited state
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 17

Chloric acid (HClO3) : The central chlorine atom undergoes sp3 hybridisation in second excited state.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 15
Shape is tetrahedral with one lone pair (or) pyramidal.
Two πd-p bonds present.

Perchloric acid (HClO4) : The central chlorine atom undergoes sp3 hybridisation in third excited state.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 16
Shape is perfect tetrahedral. No lone pairs.
Three πd-p bonds present.

Textual Examples

Question 1.
Halogens have maximum negative electron gain enthalpy in the respective periods of the periodic table. Why ?
Solution:
Halogens have the smallest size in their respective periods and therefore high effective nuclear charge. As a consequence, they readily accept one electron to acquire noble gas electronic configuration.

Question 2.
Although electron gain enthalpy of fluorine is less negative as compared to chlorine, fluorine is a stronger oxidising agent than chlorine. Why ?
Solution:
It is due to

  1. Low enthalpy of dissociation of F-F bond
  2. High hydration enthalpy of F

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 3.
Fluorine exhibits only – 1 oxidation state whereas other halogens exhibit +1, +3, +5 and +7 oxidation states also. Explain.
Solution:
Fluorine is the most electronegative element and cannot exhibit any positive oxidation .state. Other halogens have d orbitals and therefore, can expand their octets and show +1, +3, +5 and +7 oxidation states also.

Question 4.
Write the balanced chemical equation for the reaction of Cl2 with hot and concentrated NaOH. Is this reaction a disproportionation reaction ? Justify.
Solution:
3 Cl2 + 6 NaOH → 5NaCl + NaClO3 + 3H2O
Yes. Chlorine from zero oxidation state is changed to -1 and +5 oxidation states.

Question 5.
When HCl reacts with finely powdered iron, it forms ferrous chloride and not ferric chloride. Why ?
Solution:
Its reaction with iron produces H2.
Fe + 2HCl → FeC2 + H2
Liberation of hydrogen prevents the formation of ferric chloride.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 6.
Discuss the molecular shape of BrF3 on the basis of VSEPR theory.
Solution:
The central atom Br has seven electrons in the valence shell. Three of these will form electron pair bonds with three fluorine atoms leaving behind four electrons. Thus, there are three bond pairs and two lone pairs.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 18
According to VSEPR theory, these will occupy the comers of a trigonal bipyramid. The two lone pairs will occupy the equatorial positions to minimise lone pair- lone pair and the bond pair-lone pair repulsions which are greater than the bond pair-bond pair repulsions. In addition, the axial flourine atoms will be bent towards the equatorial fluorine in order to minimise the lone pair-lone pair repulsions. The shape would be that of a slightly bent T.

Intext Questions

Question 1.
Considering the parameters such as bond dissociation enthalpy, electron gain enthalpy and hydration enthalpy, compare the oxidising power of F2 and Cl2.
Oxidizing power is a combined effect of bond dissociation enthalpy, electron gain enthalpy and hydration enthalpy.
Solution:
Comparing F2 and Cl2 with the given parameters.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 19
From the data given above, it is clear that the bond dissociation enthalpy and electron gain enthalpy are higher for chlorine but hydration energy is much higher for fluorine. It compensates the effect of other two and thus, makes flourine more oxidizing than chlorine.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements 20
The relative oxidizing power of the halogens can be further illustrated by their reactions with water.
2 F2(g) + 2 H2O(l) → 4H+ (aq) + 4F (aq) + O2(g) ……………. (i)
Cl2(g) + H2O(l) → HCl (aq) + HOCl (aq) ……………… (ii)

Question 2.
Give two examples to show the anomalous behaviour of fluorine.
Solution:
The two anomalous behaviour of flourine are as follows :
a) It forms only one oxo-acid while other halogens form a number of oxo-acids.
b) Hydrogen flouride (HF) is a liquid (b.p. 293 K) due to strong hydrogen bonding whereas other hydrogen halides are gases.

Question 3.
Sea is the greatest source of some halogens. Comment.
Solution:
Sea water contains chlorides, bromides and iodides of sodium, potassium, magnesium and calcium. NaCl is the most abundant (2.5% by mass) among all of these. Certain forms of marine life contain iodine in their systems; Various sea weeds, for example, contain upto . 0.5% of iodine and chile saltpetre contains upto 0.2% of sodium iodate. NaCl and camalite, KCl, MgCl2. 6H2O etc are present in the deposits of dried up seas.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(c) Group-17 Elements

Question 4.
Give the reason for bleaching action of Cl2 ?
Solution:
Bleaching action of chlorine is due to its oxidizing property. When chlorine reacts with water, it gives nascent oxygen which decoloures is the coloured substance.
Cl2 + H2O → 2HCl + [O]
Coloured substance + [O] → Colourless substance
Bleaching action of chlorine creates permanent effect. It bleaches the vegetable or organic matter in the presence of moisture.

Question 5.
Name some poisonous gases which can be prepared from chlorine gas.
Solution:

  1. Phosgene (COCl2)
  2. Tear gas (CCl3NO2)
  3. Mustard gas (ClCH2CH2SCH2CH2Cl)

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 6(b) Group-16 Elements Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Why is dioxygen a gas but sulphur a solid?
Answer:
Dioxygen is a gas but sulphur a solid.
Explanation:

  • Due to small atomic size and high electronegativity oxygen forms Pπ – Pπ multiple bond and exists as O2 molecules held together by weak vander waal’s forces. Thus oxygen exists as a gas at room temperature.
  • Due to large atomic size and less electronegativity sulphur forms strong S—S single bonds and exists as S8 molecules with puckered ring structure. Hence sulphur is a solid at room temperature.

Question 2.
What happens when
a) KClO3 is heated with MnO2
b) O3 is passed through KI soultion
Answer:
a) When KClO3 is heated with Mn02 and liberates oxygen gas.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 1
b) O3 is passed through KI solution I2 is liberated
2KI + O3 + H2O → 2KOH + I2 + 2O2

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 3.
Give two examples each for amphoteric oxides and neutral oxides.
Answer:

  • Examples of amphoterc oxides – Al2O3, SiO2, PbO.
  • Examples of neutral oxides – CO, NO and N2O.

Question 4.
Oxygen generally exhibits an oxidation state of -2 only while the other members of the group show oxidation states of +2, +4 and +6 also – explain.
Answer:

  • Oxygen exhibits -2 oxidation state due to its high electronegativity. The tendency of exhibiting -2 oxidation state decrease down the group.
  • Due to decrease of electronegativity down the group the other elements exhibit +2, +4 and +6 oxidation states also.

Question 5.
Write any two compounds, in which oxygen shows an oxidation state different from -2. Give the oxidation states of oxygen in them.
Answer:
OF2 and O2 F2 are two compounds in which oxygen shows an oxidation state different from-2.

  • In OF2 the oxidation state of oxygen is +2
  • In O2F2 the oxidation state of oxygen is +1.

Question 6.
Oxygen molecule has the formula O2 while sulphur has S8 – explain.
Answer:
Due to small atomic size and high electronegativity oxygen forms Pπ – Pπ multiple bond and exists as O2 molecule.
Due to large atomic size and less electronegativity sulphur forms strong S – S single bonds and exists S8 molecule.

Question 7.
Why is H2O a liquid while H2S is a gas ?
Answer:
H2O is liquid due to the presence of intermolecular hydrogen bonding. While H2S is gas because it is not having such type of bonding.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 8.
H2O is neutral while H2S is acidic – explain.
Answer:
H2O is neutral while H2S is acidic.
Reason: The O-H bond dissociation Enthalpy is greater than the S – H bond dissociation Enthalpy.

Question 9.
Name the most abundant element present in earth’s crust.
Answer:
The most abundant element present in earth’s crust is oxygen (about 46.6%).

Question 10.
Which element of group-16 shows highest catenation ?
Answer:
Sulphus shows highest catenation among group – 16 elements and exists as S9 molecule with puckered ring structure.

Question 11.
Among the hydrides of chalcogens, which is most acidic and which is most stable ?
Answer:

  • Among hydrides of chalcogens, H2Te is most acidic.
  • Among hydrides of chalcogens, H2O is most stable.

Question 12.
Give the hybridization of sulphur in the following.
a) SO2
b) SO3
c) SF4
d)SF6
Answer:
a) Hybridisation of’S’ in SO2 is Sp2
b) Hybridisation of ‘S’ in SO3 is Sp2
c) Hybridisation of ‘S’ in SF4 is Sp3d
d) Hybridisation of ‘S’ in SF6 is Sp3d2

Question 13.
Write the names and formulae of any two oxyacids of sulphur. Indicate the oxidation state of sulphur in them.
Answer:

  • Peroxy mono sulphuric acid – H2SO5 ‘S’ oxidation state +6 .
  • Peroxy di sulphuric acid – H2S2O8 ‘S’ oxidation state +6

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 14.
Explain the structures of SF4 and SF6.
Answer:
Structure of SF4:

  • It SF4 ‘S’ undergoes sp3d hybndisation.
  • It has trigonal bipyramidal structure in which one of the equitorial positions is occupied by a lone pair of electrons. This geometry is also known as see – saw geometry.

Structure of SF6:

  • In SF6 ‘S’ undergoes sp3d2 hybridisation.
  • It has octahedral structure.

Question 15.
Give one example each for
a) a neutral oxide
b) a peroxide
c) a super oxide
Answer:
a) CO, N2O are neutral oxides.
b) Na2O2, BaO2 are pernxides.
c) KO2, RbO2 are super oxides.

Question 16.
What is tailing of mercury? How is it removed? [A.P. & T.S. (Mar. 15)]
Answer:
Mercury loses it’s lustreness, meniscus and consequently sticks to the walls of glass vessel when it reacts with ozone. This phenomenon is called tailing of mercury.
2Hg + O3 → Hg2O + O2
It is removed by shaking it with water which dissolves Hg2O.

Question 17.
Write the principle involved in the quantitative estimation of ozone gas.
Answer:
When ozone reacts with an excess of Kl solution buffered with a borate buffer (pH 9.2) iodine is liberated which can be titrated against a standard solution of sodium thiosulphate. In this way O3 is estimated quantitatively.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 18.
Write the structure of ozone.
Answer:
Structure of Ozone:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 2

  • O3 is angular molecule with bond angle 117°
  • O – O bond length is 128 pm.

Question 19.
SO2 can be used as an anti-chior. Explain.
Answer:
SO2 gas is used as anti-chlor. Anti-chior means the substance which removes the excess of on clothes. SO2 reacts with chlorine in presence of charcoal to give suiphuryl chloride
SO2(g) + Cl2(g) → SO2Cl2l

Question 20.
How is ozone detected ?
Answer:
Ozone is a pale blue gas, dark blue liquid and violet black solid and it has characterstic smell.

  • It is detected by the reaction with ‘Hg’ which is called as tailing of mercury.
    2Hg + O3 → Hg2O + O2
  • Ozone turns benzidene paper to brown colour.

Question 21.
How does ozone react with Ethylene ?
Answer:
Ethylene reacts with ozone to form Ethylene ozonoid followed by the hydrolysis to form formaldehyde.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 3

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 22.
Out of O2 and O3, which is paramagnetic ?
Answer:

  • O2 is paramagnetic due to presence of unpaired electrons
  • O3 (gaseous) is diamagnetic due to absence of unpaired electrons.

Question 23.
Between O3 and O2, ozone is a better oxidizing agent – why ?
Answer:
Ozone is next to fluorine in the oxidising capacity. It is best oxidising agent than O2. (Fluorine is the powerful oxidising agent). Ozone liberates nascent oxygen easily.

Question 24.
Write any two uses each for O3 and H2SO4.
Answer:
Uses of O3:

  • Ozone is used in sterilisation of water.
  • Ozone is used in manufacture of artificial silk and camphor etc.
  • Ozone is used to identify unsaturation in carbon compounds.

Uses of H2SO4:

  • H2SO4 is used in the manufacture of fertilisers.
  • H2SO4 is used in petrol refining.
  • H2SO4 is used in detergent industry.

Question 25.
Which form of sulphur shows paramagnetism ?
Answer:
In vapour state sulphur partly exists as S2 molecule which has two unpaired electrons in the antibonding π (π*)orbitals like O2. Hence exhibits paramagnetism.

Question 26.
How is the presence of SO2 detected ?
Answer:
SO2 has a pungent odour SO2 presence can be detected by the following tests.

  1. SO2 changes the colour of acidified potassium dichromate solution from orange to green.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 4
  2. SO2 decolourises acidified KMnO4 solution.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 5

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 27.
Why are group – 16 elements called chalcogens ?
Answer:
Chalcogens means mineral forming (or) ore forming elements. Most of elements exist in earth crust as oxides, sulphides, selinides, telurids etc. So Group – 16 elements are called as chalcogens.

Question 28.
Among chalcogens, which has highest eletronegativity and which has highest electron gain enthalpy?
Answer:

  • Among chalcogens Oxygen has high electronegativity.
  • Among chalcogens Sulphur has high electron gain Enthalpy.

Question 29.
Which hydride of group – 16 has highest boiling point and weakest acidic character ?
Answ:

  • Among group – 16 hydrides water (H2O) has high bioling point.
  • Among group – 16 hydrides water (H2O) has weakest acidic, character.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Justify the placement of O, S, Se, Te and Po in the same group of the periodic table in terms of electronic configuration, oxidation states and hydride formation.
Answer:
1) Electronic configurations :
Oxygen (O) – [He] 2s2 2p2
Sulphur (S) – [Ne] 3s2 3p2
Selenium (Se) – [Ar] 3d10 4s24p4
Tellurium (Te) – [Kr] 4d10 5s2 sp4
Polonium (Po) – [Xe] 4f14 5d10 6s2 6p4
All the above elements has general outer electronic configuration ns2np4.

2) Oxidation states :
All the gives elements (chalcogens) exhibits common oxidation state of-2
O-2, S-2, Se-2 etc.

3) Hydride formation:
All these elements (chalcogens) forms hydrides of type EH2(E = chalcogen)
Eg : H2O, H2S, H2Se, H2Te, H2Po.
The above mentioned concepts evident that the elements O, S, Se, Te and Po are present in the same group of periodic table.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 2.
Describe the manufacture of H2SO4 by contact process.
Answer:
Manufacture of H2SO4 by contact process:
Manufacturing of H2SO4 involves three main steps.
Step – 1.
SO2 production : The required SO2 for this process is obtained by burning S(or) Iron pyrites in oxygen.
S + O2 → SO2
4FeS2 + 15O2 → 2Fe2O3 + 8SO3
Step – 2
SO3 formation: SO2 is oxidised in presence of catalyst with atmosphric air to form SO3
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 6
Step – 3
Formation of H2SO4: SO3 formed in the above step absorbed in 98% H2SO4 to get oleum (H2S2O7). This oleum is diluted to get desired concentration of H2SO4.
SO3 + H2SO4 → H2S2O7
H2S2O7 + H2O → 2H2SO4

Question 3.
How is ozone prepared ? How does it react with the following? [Mar. 14]
a) PbS
b) KI
c) Hg
d) Ag
Answer:
Preparation of Ozone:
A slow dry stream of oxygen under silent electric discharge to form ozone (about 10%). The product obtained is known as ozonised oxygen.
3O2 → 2O3 ∆ H° = 142kJ/mole

  • The formation of ozone is an endothermic reaction.
  • It is necessary to use silent electric discharge in the preparation of O3 to prevent its decomposition

a) Reaction with PbS : Black lead suiphide oxidised to white lead sulphate in presence of ozone.
PbS + 4O3 → PbSO4 + 4O2

b) Reaction with KI: Moist Kl is oxidised to Iodine in presence of ozone.
2KI + H2O + O3 -→ 2KOH + I2 + O2

c) Reaction with Hg : Mercury loses it’s lustreness, meniscus and consequently sticks to the walls of glass vessel when it reacts with ozone. This phenomenon is called tailing of mercury.
2Hg + O3 → Hg2 O + O2
It is removed by shaking it with water which dissolves Hg2O.

d) Reaction with Ag : Ag metal oxidised to Ag2O (Ag metal is tarnished):
2Ag + O3 → Ag2O + O2

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 4.
Write a short note on the allotropy of sulphur.
Answer:
The important allotropes of sulphur are
a) yellow rhombic (α. sulphur)
b) Monoclinic (β – sulphur)

  • The stable from is α-sulphur (at room temperature)

Rhombic sulphur (α – Sulphur):

  • Colour : Yellow. ,
  • Melting point: 385.8K.
  • Specific gravity : 2.06.
  • It is insouble in water and partially soluble in alcohol, benzene etc. and readily soluble in CS2.

Monoclinic sulphur (β – Sulphur):

  • Melting point: 392K
  • Specific gravity : 1.98.
  • It is soluble in CS2.
  • Rhombic sulphur transforms to monoclinic sulphur by heating above 369K. This temperature is called transition temperature.

Question 5.
How does SO2 react with the following ?
a) Na2SO3(aq)
b) Cl2
c) Fe+3 ions
d) KMnO4
Answer:
a) Sodium sulphite (aq) reacts with So2 to form sodium hydrogen sulphite.
Na2SO3 + H2O + SO2 → 2NaHSO3

b) SO2 as reacts with chlorine gas in the presence of charcoal to form sulphuryl chloride.
SO2(g) + Cl2(g) → SO2Cl2(l)

c) Fe+3 ions are reduced to Fe+2 ions by SO2.
2Fe+3 + SO2 + 2H2O → 2Fe+2 + SO-24 + 4H+

d) SO2 gas decolourises acidified potassium permanganate (VII) solution.
5SO2 + 2MnO4 + 2H2O → 5SO-24 + 4H++ 2Mn+2

Question 6.
Starting from elemental sulphur, how is H2SO4 prepared ?
Answer:
Manufacture of H2SO4 by contact process :
Manufacturing of H2SO4 involves three main steps.
Step – 1.
SO2 production : The required SO2 for this process is obtained by burning S(or) Iron pyrites in oxygen.
S + O2 → SO2
4FeS2 + 15O2 → 2Fe2O3 + 8SO3
Step – 2
SO3 formation: SO2 is oxidised in presence of catalyst with atmosphric air to form SO3
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 6
Step – 3
Formation of H2SO4: SO3 formed in the above step absorbed in 98% H2SO4 to get oleum (H2S2O7). This oleum is diluted to get desired concentration of H2SO4.
SO3 + H2SO4 → H2S2O7
H2S2O7 + H2O → 2H2SO4

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 7.
Describe the structures (shapes) of SO-24 and SO3.
Answer:
Structure of SO3:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 7

  • In SO3 sulphur undergoes sp2 hybridisation.
  • Shape : Trigonal planait s
  • Bondangle: 120°.
  • S -0 bond length: 143 pm.

Structure of SO-24:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 8

  • In SO-24 sulphur undergo sp3 hybridisation.
  • Shape : Tetrahedral.
  • It has several resonance structures.
  • In this two Pπ – dπ bonds are present.

Question 8.
Which oxide of sulphur can act as both oxidizing and reducing agent? Give one example each.
Answer:
Sulphur dioxide (SO2) acts as both oxidising as well as reducing agent.
SO2 as Oxidising agent:
Sodium suiphide oxidises to hypo with SO2.
2Na2S + 3SO2 → 2Na2S2O2 + S
SO2 as Reducing agent:
SO2 reduces Fe+3 ions to Fe+2 ions.
2Fe+3 + SO2 + 2H2O → 2Fe+2 + SO-24 + 4H+

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 9.
Explain the conditions favourable for the formation of SO3 from SO2 in the contact process of H2SO4.
Answer:
Le Chatlier’s principle – Application to produce SO3:
The oxidation of SO2 to SO3 in the presence of a catalyst is a reversible reaction. The thermochemical equation for the conversion is written as
2SO2(g) + O2(g) ⇌ 2SO3(g); ∆H = -196 kJ
The equation reveals the following points :

  1. 3 volumes of the reactants convert into 2 volumes of SO3. i.e., a decrease of volume accompanies the reaction.
  2. the reaction is an exothermic change.
  3. the catalyst may be present to increase the SO3 yields.

According to Le Chatlier’s principle,
i) a decrease in volume of the system is favoured at high pressures. But in practice only about 2 bar pressure is used. The reason for not using high pressures is acid resisting towers which can withstand high pressures cannot be built.

ii) exothermic changes are favoured at low temperatures. It is not always convenient in the industry to work at low temperatures. In such situations an optimum temperature is maintained. At this temperature considerable amounts of the product are obtained. In the manufactrue of H2SO4, the optimum temperature suitable for the conversion of SO2 into SO3 is experimentally found to be 720K.

iii) The rate of formation of SO3 is enhanced by the use of a catalyst. (V2 O5 (or) Pt – asbestos).
Favourable Conditions :
Temperature : 720K
Pressure : 2 bar
Catalyst: V2O5 (or) platinized asbestos.

Question 10.
Complete the following
a) KCl + H2SO4 (Conc) →
b) Sucrose AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 9
c) Cu + H2SO4 (Conc) →
d) C + H2SO4 (Cone) →
Answer:
a) 2KCl + Cone. H2SO4 → 2HCl + K2SO4
b) C12H22O11 AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 9 12C + nH2O
c) Cu + 2H2SO4(Conc) → CuS04 + SO2 + 2H2O
d) C + 2H2SO4(Conc) → CO2 + 2SO2 + 2H2O

Question 11.
Which is used for drying ammonia ?
Answer:
For drying ammonia quick line (CaO) is used.
For drying ammonia cone. H2SO4, P4O10 and anhydrous CaCl2 cannot be used because they react with ammonia and forms (NH4)2SO4, (NH4)3PO4 and CaCl2. 8NH3
H2SO4 + 2NH3 → (NH4)2 SO4
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 10
CaCl2 + 8NH3 → CaCl38NH3.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 12.
Why cone H2SO4, P4O10 and anhydrous CaCl2 cannot be used to dry ammonia ?
(Hint: ammonia reacts with them forming (NH4)2 SO4; (NH4)3 PO4 and CaCl2, 8NH2)
Answer:
For drying ammonia quick line (CaO) is used.
For drying ammonia cone. H2SO4, P4O10 and anhydrous CaCl2 cannot be used because they react with ammonia and forms (NH4)2SO4, (NH4)3PO4 and CaCl2. 8NH3
H2SO4 + 2NH3 → (NH4)2 SO4
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 10
CaCl2 + 8NH3 → CaCl38NH3.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Explain in detail the manufacture of sulphuric acid by contact process. [T.S. Mar. 18, 16]
Answer:
Manufacture of H2SO4 by contact process :
Manufacturing of H2SO4 involves three main steps.
Step – 1.
SO2 production : The required SO2 for this process is obtained by burning S(or) Iron pyrites in oxygen.
S + O2 → SO2
4FeS2 + 15O2 → 2Fe2O3 + 8SO3
Step – 2
SO3 formation: SO2 is oxidised in presence of catalyst with atmosphric air to form SO3

Le Chatlier’s principle – Application to produce SO3 :
The oxidation of SO2 to SO3 in the presence of a catalyst is a reversible reaction. The thermochemical equation for the conversion is written as
2SO2(g) + O2(g) ⇌ 2SO3(g); ∆H = -196 kJ
The equation reveals the following points : .

  1. 3 volumes of the reactants convert into 2 volumes of SO3. i.e., a decrease of volume accompanies the reaction.
  2. the reaction is an exothermic change.
  3. the catalyst may be present to increase the SO3 yields.

According to Le Chatlier’s principle, .
i) a decrease in volume of the system is favoured at high pressures. But in practice only about 2 bar pressure is used. The reason for not using high pressures is acid resisting towers which can withstand high pressures cannot be built.

ii) exothermic changes are favoured at low temperatures. It is not always convenient in the industry to work at low temperatures. In such situations an optimum temperature is maintained. At this temperature considerable amounts of the product are obtained. In the manufactrue of H2SO4, the optimum temperature suitable for the conversion of SO2 into SO., is experimentally found to be 720K.

iii) The rate of formation of SO3 is enhanced by the use of a catalyst. (V2 O5 (or) Pt – asbestos).
Favourable Conditions :
Temperature : 720K .
Pressure : 2 bar
Catalyst: V2O5 (or) platinized asbestos.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 11
Step – 3 :
Formation of H2SO4: SO3 formed in the above step absorbed in 98% H2SO4 to get oleum (H2S2O7). This oleum is diluted to get desired concentration of H2SO4.
SO3 + H2SO4 → H2S2O7
H2S2O7 + H2O → 2H2SO4

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 2.
How is ozone prepared from oxygen ? Explain its reaction with [A.P. Mar. 19, 18, 17, 16] [Mar. 14]
a) C2H4
b) KI
c) Hg
d) PbS.
Answer:
Preparation of Ozone :
A slow dry stream of oxygen under silent electric discharge to form ozone (about 10%). The product obtained is known as ozonised oxygen.
3O2 → 2O3; ∆H° = 142kJ/mole

  • The formation of ozone is an endothermic reaction.
  • It is necessary to use silent electric discharge in the preparation of O3 to prevent its decomposition

a) Reaction with C2H3 : Ethylene reacts with ozone to form Ethylene ozonoid followed by the hydrolysis to form formaldehyde.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 12

) Reaction with KI: moist KI is oxidised to Iodine in presence of ozone.
2KI + H2O + O3 → 2KOH + I2 + O2

c) Reaction with Hg : Mercury loses it’s lustreness, meniscus and consequently sticks to the walls of glass vessel when it reacts with ozone. This phenomenon is called tailing of mercury.
2Hg + O3 → Hg2O + O2
It is removed by shaking it with water which dissolves Hg2O.

d) Reaction with PbS : Black lead sulphide oxidised to white lead sulphate in presence of ozone.
PbS + 4O3 → PbSO4 + 4O2.

Intext Questions

Question 1.
List the important sources of sulphur.
Answer:
Occurrence or sources of sulphur in the earth’s crust, percentage of sulphur is only 0.03 to 0. 1%. In combined state, it occurs

  1. In the form of sulphates, eg., gypsum (CaSO4 . 2H2O). epsom salt (MgSO4 . 7H2O), baryte
    (BaSO4).
  2. In the form of sulphides, eg., galena (PbS), zinc blende (ZnS), Copper pyrites (CuFeS2). In volcanoes, traces of sulphur occur as H2S. In organic materials such as eggs, proteins, garlic, onion,mustard, hair and wool, sulphur is present in trace amounts.

Question 2.
Write the order of thermal stability of the hydrides of group 16 elements.
Answer:
The thermal stability of hydrides of group 16 elements is directly proportional to the bond dissociation enthalpy of H – E bond. On moving down the group, bond dissociation energy decreases because bond length increases.
Thus, the order of bond dissociation energy is
H2O > H2S > H2Se > H2Te > H2Po
This is also the order of thermal stability.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 3.
Why is H2O a liquid and H2S a gas ?
Answer:
The difference in electronegativity values of 0(3.5) and H(2.1) is more than the difference between the electronegativity values of H(2.1) and S(2.5) i.e., O – H bond is more polar than S – H bond. That is why H-bonding is present among water molecules but absent in H2S. Thus,
strong intermolecular interactions causes water to exist as a liquid but due to weak van der waals’ force H2S exists as a gas.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 13

Question 4.
Which of the following does not react with oxygen directly ? Zn, Ti, Pt, Fe.
Answer:
Platinum (Pt).

Question 5.
Complete the following reactions.
i) C2H4 + O2
ii) 4Al + 3O2
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 14

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 6.
Why does O3 act as a powerful oxidising agent ?
Answer:
Because ozone liberates nascent oxygen very easily.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 15

Question 7.
How is Oa estimated quantitatively ?
Answer:
When ozone reacts with an excess of potassium iodide solution buffered with a borate buffer (pH 9.2), iodine is liberated which can be titrated against a standard solution of sodium thiosulphate. In this way O3 can be estimated quantitatively.

Question 8.
What happens when sulphur dioxide is passed through an aqueous solution of Fe (III) salt ?
Answer:
When SO2 is passed through an aqueous solution of Fe (III), i.e., ferric salt, it is reduced to Fe (II) i,e., ferrous salt. Here, SO2 acts as a reducing agent.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 16

Question 9.
Comment on the nature of two S – O bonds formed in SO2 molecule. Are the two S – O bonds in this molecule equal ?
Answer:
The two S – O bonds in SO2 molecule are covalent in nature. These are equal with bond length = 143 pm. The resonating structures of SO2 are as follows.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 17
SO2 is a resonance hybrid of these two canonical forms.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 10.
How is the presence of SO2 detected ?
Answer:
SO2 has a pungent odour. Two tests to detect the presence of SO2 are as follows :

  1. SO2 decolourises acidified KMnO4 solution.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 18
  2. SO2 Changes the colour of acidified potassium dichromate solution from orange to green.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 19

Question 11.
Mention three areas in which H2S04 plays an important role.
Answer:
Uses of sulphuric acid.

  1. It is used in the manufacture of pigments, paints and dyestuff intermediate.
  2. It is used in petroleum refining.
  3. It is also used in fertilizer industry.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements

Question 12.
Write the conditions to maximize the yield of H2SO4 by contact process.
Answer:
The key step in the manufacture of H2SO4 is catalytic oxidation of SO2 to produce SO3 in presence of V2O5.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(b) Group-16 Elements 20
The reaction is exothermic, reversible and the forward reaction results in the decrease in volume. Thus according to Le-Chatelier’s principle, the forward reaction should be favoured by low temperature and high pressure. But the temperature should not be very low otherwise the. rate of reaction will become very slow.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 6(a) Group-15 Elements Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Why does the reactivity of nitrogen differ from phosphorus?
Answer:
Nitrogen gas exists as a diatomic molecule. Due to the presence of a triple bond between Base N – Atoms bond dissociation energy is high (941.4 KJ /mol). Hence nitrogen is inert and unreactive.
Phosphorus is a tetra atomic molecule and the P-P single bond is weaker than N ≡ N. P – P bond dissociation energy is 213 KJ/mole. Hence phosphorus is more reactive than Nitrogen.

Question 2.
How is nitrogen prepared in the laboratory?
Write the chemical equations of the reactions involved.
Answer:
Preparation of di Nitrogen :

  • Very pure nitrogen is obtained by the thermal decomposition of sodium (or) barium a-zide.
    Ba(N3)2 → Ba + 3N2
  • In the laboratory dinitrogen is prepared by treating an aqueous solution of NH4Cl with NaNO2
    NH4Cl(aq) + NaNO2(aq) → N2(g) + 2H2O(I) + NaCl(aq)
  • Nitrogen can also be obtained by the thermal decompostion of ammonium dichromate.
    (NH4)3 Cr2O7 AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 1 N2 + 4H2O + Cr2O3

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 3.
Nitrogen exists as diatomic molecule and phosphorus as P4 – Why ?
Answer:
Nitrogen exists as diatomic molecule :

  • Nitrogen has small size and high electronegativity and nitrogen atom forms Pπ – Pπ multiple bonds with it self (triple bond). So it exists as a discrete diatomic molecule in elementary state.

Phosphorus exists as tetra atomic molecule :

  • Phosphorus has large size and less electronegative and it forms P-P single bonds. So it exists as tetra atomic i.e., P4.

Question 4.
Why does nitrogen show catenation properties less than phosphorus ?
Answer:
Explanation :
The single N-N bond is weaker than the single P-P bond due to high inter electronic repulsion of the non-boriding electrons in N2 because of small bond length. Therefore the catenation property is weaker in nitrogen as compared to phosphorus.

Question 5.
Nitrogen molecule is highly stable – Why ?
Answer:
Nitrogen Molecule is more stable because in between two nitrogen atoms of N2, a triple bond is present. To break this triple bond high energy is required (941.4KJ/mole).

Question 6.
Why are the compounds of bismuth more stable in +3 oxidation state ?
Answer:
Bismuth compounds are more stable in +3 oxidation state because ‘Bi’ exhibits +3 stable oxidation state instead of +5 due to inert pair effect.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 7.
What is allotropy ? Explain the different allotropic forms of phosphorus.
Answer:
Allotropy: The existance of an element in different physical forms having similar chemical properties is called allotropy.
Allotropes of ‘P’: → White ‘P’ (or) Yellow ‘P’.

  • Red ‘P’
  • Scarlet ‘P’
  • Violet ‘P’
  • α – black ‘P’
  • β – black ‘P’.

White phosphorus :

  • It is poisonous and insoluble in water and soluble in carbon disulphide and glows in dark. It is a translucent white waxy solid. ‘
  •  It dissolves in boiling NaOH solution and gives PH3.
    P4 + 3NaOH + 3H2 → PH3 + 3NaH2PO2. (sodium hypo phosphite)
  •  It is more reactive than other solid phases.
  • Bond angle is 60° and it readily catches fire.

Red phosphorus :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 2

  • Red ‘F possesses iron grey lustre.
  • In is odour less, non poisonous and insoluble in water as well as CS2.
  • Red F’ is much less reactive than white ‘P’.
    Black ‘P’:
  • α – Black ‘P’: It is formed when red ‘P’ is heated in a sealed tube 803K.
  • β – Black F : It is prepared by heating white P’ at 473 K under high pressure.

Question 8.
How do you account for the inert character of dinitrogen ?
Answer:
Di Nitrogen is chemically inert. .
Explanation : In nitrogen molecule there exists a triple bond between two nitrogen atoms. To break this triple bond high energy (bond dissociation energy) is required (941.4 KJ/mole).

Question 9.
Explain the difference in the structures of white and red phosphorus.
Answer:
White ‘P’ molecule has tetrahedral structure (discrete molecule). Discrete ‘P’ molecules are held by vander waal’s forces
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 3
White phosphorus
Red ‘P’ is polymeric consisting of chains of P4 tetrahedron linked together through covalent bonds.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 4

Question 10.
How is α – black phosphorus prepared from red phosphorus?
Answer:
α – Black ‘P: It is formed when red? is heated in a sealed tube 803K.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 11.
Write the difference between the properties of white phosphorus and red phosphorus.
Answer:
White ‘P’

  • It is white waxy solid (translucent).
  • It is insolable in water and solable in CS2.
  • It is more reactive.
  • It is poisonous.

Red ‘P’

  • It possesses iron grey lustre.
  • It is in soluble in CS2 as cool water.
  • It is more reactive than white ‘P’.
  •  It is non – poisonous.

Question 12.
What is inert pair effect ?
Answer:
Inert pair effect: The reluctance of ns pair of electrons to take part in bond formation is called inert pair effect.
Bi exhibits +3 oxidation state instead of +5 due to inert pair effect.

Question 13.
Explain why is NH3 basic while BiH3 is only feebly basic.
Answer:
NH3 is basic while BiH3 is only feebly basic.

Explanation :
Due to small atomic size of nitrogen, the electron density on nitrogen atom is greater than that on Bi atom. So electron releasing tendency is greater in NH3.
Hence NH3 is basic and BiH3 is feebly basic.

Question 14.
Arrange the hydrides of group – 15 elements in the increasing order of basic strength and decreasing order of reducing character.
Answer:

  1. Increasing order of basic strength of Group – 15 elements hydrides is
    BiH3 < SbH3 < ASH3 < PH3 < NH3.
  2. Decreasing order of reducing character of Group – 15 elements hydrides is
    BiH3 > SbH3 > ASH3 > PH3 > NH3.

Question 15.
PH3 is a weaker base than NH3 – Explain.
Answer:
PH3 is a weaker base than NH3.

  • In NH3 nitrogen atom undergoes SP3 hybridisation and due to small size it has high electron density than in ‘P’ of PH3.
  • Due to large size of ‘P’ atom and availability of large surface area, lonepair of electron spread in PH3. Hence PH3 is weaker base then NH3.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 16.
A hydride of group -15 elements dissolves in water to form a basic solution. This solution dissolves the AgCl precipitate. Name the hydride. Write the chemical equations involved.
Answer:
Given a hydride of group – 15 elements dissolves in water to form a basic solution;This solution dissolves the Agcl precipitate.

The given hydride is ammonia. It forms basic solution when dissolved in water due to formation of OH ions.
NH3(g) + HxOl ⇌ [latex]\mathrm{NH}_4^{+}(\mathrm{aq})[/latex] + OH(aq)
This solution dissolves AgCl. Ppt due to formation of complex compound.
AgCl(s) (white Ppt) + 2NH3(aq) → [Ag(NH3)2]Cl(aq) (colourless)

Question 17.
What happens when white phosphorus is heated with cone. NaOH solution in an inert atmosphere of CO2? [A.P. Mar. 19, 15]
Answer:
When white phosphorus heated with con. NaOH solution in an inert atomosphere of CO2 forms PH3.
P4 + 3NaOH + 3H2O → PH3 + 3NaH2PO2.

Question 18.
NH3 forms hydrogen bonds but PH3 does not – Why ?
Answer:
NH3 forms hydrogen bonds but PH3 does not.
Reason : Ammonia forms hydrogen bonds because it it a polar molecule and N-H bond is highly polar. Nitrogen has more electronegativity than phosphrous. In case of PH3 P-H bond polarity decreases.

Question 19.
The HNH angle is higher than HPH, HAsH and HSbH angles – Why?
Answer:
The central atom ε (where, ε = N, P, As, Sb, Bi) in all given hydrides is Sp3 hybridized. However, its electronegativity decreases and atomic size increase on moving down the group. Therefore is a gradual decrease in the force of repulsion between the shared electron pairs around the central atom. Thus, bond angle decreases as we move down the group.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 5

Question 20.
How do calcium phosphide and heavy water react?
Answer:
Calcium phosphide reacts with heavy water to form Deutero phosphine.
Ca3P2 + 6D2O → 3 Ca (OD)2 + 2PD3

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 21.
Ammonia is a good complexing agent – Explain with an example. [Mar. 14]
Answer:
NH3 is a lewis base and it donates electron pair to form dative bond with metal ions. This results in the formation of complex compound.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 6

Question 22.
A mixture of Ca3P2 and CaC2 is used in making Holme’s signal – Explain. [A.P. Mar. 16]
Answer:
A Mixture of Ca3P2 and CaC2 is used in Holme’s signal.This Mixture containing containers are pierced and thrown in the sea, when the gas is evolved bum and serve as a signal.
The spontaneous combustion of PH3 is the technical use of Holme’s signal.

Question 23.
Which chemical compound is formed in the brown ring test of nitrate ions ?
Answer:
In the brown ring test of nitrate salts a brown ring is formed. It’s formula is [Fe(H2O)5N0]+2.

Question 24.
Give the resonating structures of NO2 and N2O5.
Answer:
Resonance structure of NO2:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 7
Resonance structure of N2O5
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 8

Question 25.
Why does R3P = O exist but R3N = O does not (R = alkyl group) ?
Answer:
R3P = O exist but R3N = O does not.
Explanation :
Nitrogen does not form dπ – Pπ multiple bond with oxygen because of lack of d – orbitals in Nitrogen atom. But in case of R3N = O the value of nitrogen should be 5. So these compounds do not exist where as in case of ‘P’ atom d-orbitals are available. So P-atom can able to form dπ – Pπ multiple bonds hence R3P = O exist.

Question 26.
How is nitric oxide (NO) prepared ?
Answer:
The catalytic oxidation of NH3 by atmospheric oxygen gives nitric oxide.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 9

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 27.
Give one example each of normal oxide and mixed oxide of nitrogen.
Answer:

  • Nitric oxide (NO) is an example of normal oxide of Nitrogen.
  • Dinitrogen trioxide (N2O3) is an example of mixed oxide of nitrogen.

Question 28.
NO is paramagnetic in gaseous state but diamagnetic in liquid and solid states – Why ?
Answer:
In gaseous state NO2 exists as a Monomer and contains one unpaired electron but in solid state it dimerises to N2O4 so it doesnot contain unpaired electron.
Hence NO2 is parce magnetic is geseous state but diamagnetic in solid state.

Question 29.
Give an example of
a) acidic oxide of phosphorus
b) neutral oxide of nitrogen.
Answer:
a) P2O5 (or) P4O10, phosphorus pentoxide is an example of acidic oxide of phosphorus
b) Nitrous oxide (N2O) and Nitric oxide (NO) are neutral oxides of nitrogen.

Question 30.
Explain the following
a) reaction of alkali with red phosphorus.
b) reaction between PCl3 and H3PO3.
Answer:
a) Red phosphorus reacts with an alkali to form hypophosphoric acid (H4P2O6)
b) PCl3 undergoes hydrolysis to form H3PO3
PCl3 + 3H2O → H3PO3 + 3HCl

Question 31.
How does PCl3 react with
a) CH3COOH
b) C2H5OH and
c) water.
Answer:
a) PCl3 reacts with CH3COOH and form phosphorous acid, acetyl chloride.
3CH3COOH + PCl3 → 3CH3COCl + H2PO3

b) PCl3 reacts with phosphorous acid and forms phosphorus acid, Ethyl chloride
3C2H5OH + PCl3 → 2C2H5Cl3 + H3PO3

c) PCl3 reacts with water (hydrolysis) to form phosphorus acid. It undergo hydrolysis in presence of moisture.
PCl3 + 3H2O → H3PO3 + 3HCl

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 32.
PCl3 can act as an oxidizing as well as a reducing agent – Justify.
Answer:
PCl3 acts as reducing agent. It is evidented by the following reaction.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 10
PCl3 acts as oxidising agent. It is evidented by the following reaction.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 11

Question 33.
Which of the following are not known ?
PCl3, AsCl3, SbCl3, NCl5, BiCl5, PH5
Answer:
NCl5, BiCl5, PH5 are not known in the given compounds.

Question 34.
Which of the following is more covalent – SbCl5 or SbCl3 ?
Answer:
SbCl5 (Penta halide) is more covalent than SbCl3 (Tri halide). Because Sb in the higher oxidation state exert more polarising power.

Question 35.
Write the oxidation states of phosphorus in solid PCl5.
Answer:

  • In solid state PCl5 exists as an ionic solid [PCl4)+ [PCl6]
  • ‘P’ exhibits +5 oxidation state in [PCl4)+ [PCl6]

Question 36.
Illustrate how copper metal can give different products on reaction with HNO3.
Answer:
Reaction of Cu metal with dilute HNO3.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 12
Reaction of Cu Metal with cone. HNO3
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 13

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 37.
Which oxide of nitrogen has oxidation number of N same as that in nitric acid ?
Answer:

  • In HNO3, ‘N’ has oxidation state +5.
  • Among oxides of nitrogen N2O5 exhibits ‘+5’ oxidation state.

Question 38.
Write the chemical reactions that occur in the manufacture of nitric acid.
Answer:
Chemical reactions involved in the manufacturing of HNO3.

  • Oxidation of NH3
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 14
  • NO2 formation :
    2NO + O2 ⇌ 2NO2
  • Formation of HNO3:
    3NO2 + H2O → 2HNO3 + NO

Question 39.
Iron becomes passive in cone. HNO3 – Why ?
Answer:
Iron becomes passive in cone. HNO3 due to formation of a passive film of oxide on the surface of iron.

Question 40.
Give the uses of
a) nitric acid and
b) ammonia.
Answer:
Use of HNO3:

  • HNO3 is used in the manufacture of ammonium nitrate for fertilisers and other nitrates for use in explosives and pyrotechnics.
  • HNO3 is used in the pickling of stainless steel.
  • HNO3 is used as oxidiser in rocket fuels.

Question 41.
What are the oxidation states of phosphorus in the following ?
i) H3PO3
ii) PCl3
iii) Ca3P2
iv) Na3PO4
v) POF3
Answer:
i) H3PO3
3(1) + x + 3(-3) = 0
x = +3

ii) PCl3
x + 3(-1) = 0
x = 3

iii) Ca3P2
3(+2) + 2x = 0
x = -3

iv) Na3PO4
3(1) + x + 4(-2) = 0
x = +5

v) POF3
x + (-2) + 3(-1) = 0
x = +5

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 42.
H3PO3 is diprotic while H3PO2 is monoprotic – Why ?
Answer:
H3PO3 is diprotic :
Structure of H3PO3:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 15

H3PO2 is monoprotic :
Structure of H3PO2 :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 16

Question 43.
Give the disproportionation reaction of H3PO3.
Answer:
Orthophosphoric acid (H3PO3) on heating disproportionates to give orthophosphoric acid and phosphine.
4H3PO3 → 3H3PO4 + PH3.

Question 44.
H3PO2 is a good reducing agent – Explain with an example.
Answer:
In H3PO2, two H-atoms are bonded directly to P-atom which imparts reducing character to the acid.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 45.
Draw the structures of
a) Hypo phosphoric acid
b) Cyclic meta phosphoric acid.
Answer:
a) Structure of hypo phosphoric acid (H4P2O6) :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 17
b) Structure of cyclic meta phosphoric acid (HPO3)3
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 18

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Discuss the general characteristics of Group – 15 elements with reference to their electronic configuration, oxidation state, atomic size, ionization enthalpy and electronegativity.
Answer:
1) Electronic Configuration : All these elements of this group have s2p3 configuration in their respective outmost orbits.
Nitrogen (N) : [He] 2s22p3; phosphorus (P) : [Ne] 3s23p3, Arsenic (As) : [Ar] 3d104s24p3
Atimony (Sb) : [Kr] 4d10 5s2 5p3 and Bismuth (Bi) = [Xe] 4f14 5d10 6s26p3

2) Oxidation Spates : As per their configurations, these elements may utilize either the three electrons iti the p-orbitals or the five electrons present in both s -and p -orbitals in the exhibition of oxidation states. Consequently, they exhibit common oxidation states +III and +V.

3) Atomic size: In Group-15 elements atomic size increase down the group. A considerable increase in covalent radius observed from N to P and from As to Bi only a small increase in atomic size observed.

4) Ionisation enthalpy : In group – 15 elements ionisation enthalpy decreases down the group due to gradual increase in atomic size.

5) Electronegativity : In group-15 elements electronegativity values decrease down the group with increase in atomic size.

Question 2.
Discuss the trends in chemical reactivity of group – 15 elements.
Answer:
Nitrogen gas exists as diatomic molecule. Dut to the presence of triple bond between Base N – Atoms bond dissociation energy is high (941.4 KJ /mol). Hence nitrogen is inert and unreactive.

Phosphorus is a tetra atomic molecule and P-P single bond is weaker than N ≡ N. P – P bond dissociation energy U 213 KJ/mole. Hence phosphorus is more reactive than Nitrogen.

Explanation :
The single N-N bond is weaker than the single P-P bond due to high inter electronic repulsion of the non-bonding electrons in N2 because of small bond length. There fore the catenation property is weaker in nitrogen as compoud to phosphorares.
R3 P = O exist but R3N = O does not.

Explanation :
Nitrogen does not form dπ – Pπ multiple bond with oxygen because of lack of d – orbitals in Nitrogen atom. But in case of R3N = 0 the value of nitrogen should be 5. So these compounds do not exist where as in case of P’ atom d-orbitals are available. So P-atom can able to form dπ – Pπ multiple bonds hence R3P = 0 exist.

  1. Reactivity towards hydrogen: Group -15 elements forms EH3 type hydrides (E = Group – 15 elements) .
    Eg : PH3, NH3, AsH3, BiH3, SbH3.

    • Among above hydrides NH3 is mild reducing agent while BiH3 is strong reducing agent.
    • Stability of hydrides decreases from NH3 to BiH3.
    • Basicity of hydrides decreases as follows.
      NH3 > PH3 > AsH3 > SbH3 > BiH3.
  2. Reactivity towards Oxygen : These forms two types of oxides E2O3 and E<sub2O5.
    Eg : P2O3 > N2O5, N2O3, P2O5.

    • Acidic character of oxides decrease down the group.
    • E3O3 of N and P are acidic, As and Sb are amphoteric while ‘Bi’ is basic.
  3. Reactivity towards halogens : These elements forms two types of halides EX3 and EX5.
    ‘N’ – does not form penta halides due to lack of the d-orbitals.
    Penta halides are more covalent than tri halides because the elements in higher oxidation state have more polarising power.
  4. Reactivity towards metals : All these elements react with metals to form their binary compounds containing – 3 oxidation state.
    Eg. : Ca3N2, Ca3P2 etc.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 3.
How does P4 react with the following ?
a) SOCl2
b) SO2Cl2
Answer:
a) When P4 reacts with SOCl2 to form phosphorus trichloride.
P4 + 8 SOCl2 → 4 PCl3 + 4 SO2 + 2 S2Cl2
b) When P4 reacts with SOCl2 to form phosphorus pentachloride.
P4 + 10 SOCl2 → 4 PCl5 + 10 SO2

Question 4.
Explain the anomalous nature of nitrogen in group -15.
Answer:
Anomalous properties of Nitrogen : Nitrogen differs from the remaining elements of this group due to its small size, high electronegativity, high ionisation enthalpy and non-availability of d-orbitals.

Nitrogen gas exists as diatomic molecule. Due to the presence of triple bond between base N – Atoms bond dissociation energy is high (941.4 KJ /mol). Hence nitrogen is inert and un-reactive.

Explanation :

  • The single N-N bond is weaker than the single P-P bond due to high inter electronic repulsion of the non-bonding electrons in N2 because of small bond length. Therefore the catenation property is weaker in nitrogen as compound to phosphorus.
  • Nitrogen does not form penta halides due to lack of d-orbitals.
    R3 P = O exist but R3N = O does not.

Explanation :
Nitrogen does not form dπ – Pπ multiple bond with oxygen because of lack of d – orbitals in Nitrogen atom. But in case of R3N = O the value of nitrogen should be 5. So these compounds do not exist where as in case of ‘P atom d-orbitals are available. So P-atom can able to form dπ – Pπ multiple bonds hence R3P = O exist.

Question 5.
Complete the following reactions.
a) Ca3P2 + HaO →
b) P4 + KOH →
c) CuSO4 + NH3
d) Mg + N2
d) (NH4)2 + Cr2O7 AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 1
f) Decomposition of nitrous acid →
Answer:
a) Ca3P2 + 6 H2O → 3 Ca(OH)2 + 2PH3
b) P4 + 3 KOH + 3 H2O → PH3 + 3KH2 PO2
c) CuSO4(aq) (blue) + 4NH3 → [Cu (NH3)4] SO4 (deep blue)
d) 3 Mg + N2 → Mg3N2
e) (NH4)2 + Cr2O7 AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 1 N2 + 4 H2O + Cr2O3
f) 3HNO2 → HNO3 + 2 NO + H2O

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 6.
How does PCl5 react with the following?
a) Water
b) C2H5OH
c) CH3COOH
d) Ag
Answer:
a) PCl5 undergo hydrolysis to form phosphoric acid.
PCl5 + H2O → POCl3 + 2HCl
POCl3 + 3H2O → H3PO4 + 3 HCl

b) PCl5 reacts with C2H5OH to form Ethyl chloride.
C2H5OH + PCl5 → C2H5Cl + POCl3 + HCl

c) PCl5 reacts with CH3COOH to form acetyl chloride.
CH3COOH + PCl5 → CH3COCl + POCl3 + HCl

d) PCl5 reacts with Ag to form PCl3 and AgCl
PCl5 + 2 Ag → 2 AgCl + PCl3

Question 7.
Complete the following.
a) NH4NO3 AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 1
b) HNO3 + P4O10
c) Pb(NO3)2 AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 19
d) Zn + dil.HNO3
e) P4 + conc.HNO3
f) HgCl2 + PH3
Answer:
a) NH4NO3 AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 1 N2O (Nitrous oxide) + 2 H2O
b) 12 HNO3 + P4O10 → 6 N2O5 + 4 H3PO4
c) 2 Pb(NO3)2 AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 1 2 PbO + 4 NO2 + O2
d) 4 Zn + 10 HNO3 (dil) → 4 Zn (NO3)2 + 5 H2O + N2O
e) P4 + 20 HNO3 → 4H3PO4 + 20 NO2 + 4 H2O
f) 3 HgCl2 + 2 PH3 → Hg3P2 + 6 HCl

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
How is ammonia manufactured by Habes process? Explain the reactions of ammonia with [A.P. Mar. 18]
a) ZnSO4(aq)
b) CuSO4(aq)
c) AgCl(s)
Answer:
In Haber process ammonia is directly synthesised from elements (nitrogen and hydrogen). The principle involved in this is
N2 (g) + 3H2O (g) ⇌ 2NH3 + 92.4kJ
This is a reversible exothermic reaction.
According to Le Chatelier’s principle favourable conditions for the better yield of ammonia are low temperature and high pressure. But the optimum conditions are
Temperature : 720k
Pressure : 200 atmospheres
Catalyst : Finely divided iron in the presence of molybdenum (Promoter).
Procedure : A mixture of nitrogen and hydrogen in the volume ratio 1 : 3 is heated to 725 – 775K at a pressure of 200 atmospheres is passed over hot finely divided iron mixed with small amount of molybdenum as promotor. The gases coming out of the catalyst chamber consists of 10 – 20% ammonia gas are cooled and compressed, so that ammonia gas is liquified, and the uncondensed gases are sent for recirculation.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 20
b) Aq.CuSO4 reacts with ammonia to form a deep blue complex,
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 21
c) Solid AgCl reacts with ammonia to form a colourless complex.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 22

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 2.
How is nitric acid manufactured by Ostwald’s process ? How does it react with the following ? [T.S. Mar. 19]
a) Copper
b) Zn
c) S8
d) P4
Answer:
Ostwald’s process : Ammonia, mixed with air in 1 : 7 or 1 : 8, when passed over a hot platinum gauze catalyst, is oxidised to NO mostly (about 95%).
The reaction is
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 23
The liberated heat keeps the catalyst hot. The ‘NO’ is cooled and is mixed with oxygen to give the dioxide, in large empty towers (oxidation chamber). The product is then passed in to warm water, under pressure in the presence of excess of air, to give HNO3.
4NO2 + O2 + 2H2O → 4HNO3.
The acid formed is about 61% concentrated.

a) Copper reacts with dil. HNO3 and cone. HNO3 and liberates Nitric Oxide and Nitrogen dioxide respectively
3 Cu + 5 HNO3 (dil) → 3 Cu (NO3)2 + 2 NO + 4 H2O
Cu + 4 HNO3 (cone.) → Cu (NO3)2 + 2 NO2 + 2 H2O

b) Zn reacts with dil. HNO3 and Cone. HNO3 and liberates Nitrous oxide and Nitrogen dioxide respectively.
4 Zn + 10 HNO3 (dil) → 4 Zn (NO3)2 + 5 H2O + N2O
Zn + 4 HNO3 (cone.) → Zn (NO3)2 + 2 H2 + 2 NO2

c) S8 reacts with cone, nitric acid to form Sulphuric acid, NO2 gas.
S8 + 48 HNO3 → 8 H2SO4 + 48 NO2 + 16 H2O
d) P4 reacts with cone, nitric acid to form phosphoric acid and NO2 gas.
P4 + 20 HNO3 → 4 H3PO4 + 20 NO2 + 4 H2O

Textual Examples

Question 1.
Though nitrogen exhibits +5 oxidation state, it does not form peniahalide. Give reason.
Answer:
Nitrogen with n = 2, has s and p orbitals only. It does not have d orbitals to expand its covalence beyond four. That is why it does not form pentahalide.

Question 2.
PH3 has lower boiling point than NH3. Why ? [T.S. Mar. 16]
Answer:
Unlike NH3. PH3 molecules are not associated through hydrogen bonding in liquid state. That is why the boiling point of PH3 is lower than NH3.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 3.
Write the reaction of thermal decomposition of sodium azide.
Answer:
Thermal decomposition of sodium azide gives dinitrogen gas.
2NaN3 → 2Na + 3N2

Question 4.
Why does NH3 act as a Lewis base ?
Answer:
Nitrogen atom in NH3 has one lone pair of electrons with is available for donation. Therefore, it acts as a Lewis base.

Question 5.
Why does NO2 dimerise ?
Answer:
NO2 contains odd number of valence electrons. It be haves as a typical odd molecule. On dimerisation. It is converted to stable N2O4 molecule with even number of electrons.

Question 6.
In what way can it be proved that PH3 is basic in nature ?
Answer:
PH3 reacts with acids like HI to form PH4I which shows that it is basic in nature.
PH3 + HI →PH4I
Due to lone pair on phosphorus atom, PH3 is acting as a Lewis base in the above reaction.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 7.
Why does PCl3 fume in moisture ?
Answer:
PCl3 hydrolyses in the presence of moisture giving fumes of HCl.
PCl3+ 3H2O → H3PO3 + 3HCl

Question 8.
Are all the five bonds in PCl5 molecule equivalent ? Justify your answer.
Answer:
PCl5 has a trigonal bipyramidal structure and the three equatorial P-Cl bonds are equivalent. While the two axial bonds are different and longer than equatorial bonds.

Intext Questions

Question 1.
Why are pentahalides more covalent than trihalides ?
Answer:
Higher the positive oxidation state of central atom, more will be its polarising power, which in turn increases the covalent character of the bond formed between the central atom and the halogen atom. In pentahalides, the central atom is in +5 oxidation state while in trihalides, it is in +3 oxidation state. Therefore, pentahalides are more covalent than trihalides.

Question 2.
Why is BiH3 the strongest reducing agent amongst all the hydrides of Group 15 elements ?
Answer:
Among the 15 group elements, the size of Bi atom is largest and hence, the Bi-H bond length is largest or Bi-H bond dissociation energy is lowest. That’s why Bi-H bond dissociates more readily than the other hydrides of the group and hence, BiH3 is the strongest reducing agent.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 3.
Why is N2 less reactive at room temperature ?
Answer:
Dinitrogen is inert of less reactive because the bond enthalpy of N ≡ N bond is very high.

Question 4.
Mention the conditions required to maximise the yield of ammonia.
Answer:
Ammonia is produced by Haber’s process as.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 24
Yield of ammonia is favoured by high pressure according to Le-Chatelier’s principle, Other conditions, that favour the production of ammonia are as follows :

  1. Temperature – approximately 700 K
  2. Pressure – 200 atm or 200 × 105 Pa
  3. Catalyst – Iron oxide
  4. Promotor – Molybdenum of K2O and Al2O3

Question 5.
How does ammonia react with a solution of Cu2+?
Answer:
When ammonia (aqueous solution is ammonium hydroxide) reacts with a solution of Cu2+, a deep blue solution is obtained due to the formation of tetraamine copper (II) ion.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 25

Question 6.
What is the covalence of nitrogen in N2O5?
Answer:
Structural formula of N2O5
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 26
Since, N atom has 4 shared electron pairs; the valence of N is 4.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 7.
Bond angle in PH4+ is higher than that in PH3. Why ?
Answer:
In both PH4+ and PH3, phosphorus atom is sp3 hybridized. In PH4+, all the four orbitals are bonded whereas in PH3, there is a lone pair of electrons too. Due to lone pair-bonded pair repulsion in PH3, the bond angle is less than 109.5°.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 27

Question 8.
What happens when white phosphorus is heated with concentrated NaOH solution in an inert atmosphere of CO2? .
Answer:
White phosphorus dissolves in boiling NaOH in an inert atmosphere of CO2 producing phosphine (PH3) gas and sodium hypophosphite (NaH2PO2).
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 28

Question 9.
What happens when PCl5 is heated ?
Answer:
In PCl3, there are 5P – Cl bonds, out of which three are equatorial (longer) and two are axial (shorter). When PCl5 is heated strongly, two less stable axial bonds break and phosphorus trichloride (PCl3) is formed.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 29
Structure of PCl5 showing axial and equatorial bonds.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements

Question 10.
Write a balanced equation for the hydrolytic reaction of PCl5 in heavy water.
Answer:
Reaction of PCl5 in heavy water (D2O)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6(a) Group-15 Elements 30

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 5th Lesson General Principles of Metallurgy Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 5th Lesson General Principles of Metallurgy

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is the role of depressant in froth floatation?
Answer:
By using depressants in froth floatation process, it is possible to separate a mixture of two sulphide ores.
Eg: In the ore containing ZnS and PbS, the depressant used is NaCN. It prevents ZnS from coming to the froth but allows PbS to come with the froth.

Question 2.
Between C and CO, which is a better reducing agent at 673K.
Answer:

  • Out of C and CO, Carbon nonoxide (CO) is a better reducting agent at 673K.
  • At 983K (or) above coke(C) is better reducing agent.
  • The above observations are form Ellingham diagram.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy

Question 3.
Name the common elements present in the anode mud in the eletrolytic refining of copper.
Answer:

  • The common elements present in the anode mud in eletrolytic refining of copper are less reactive valuable metals, silver (Ag), gold (Au) and platinum (Pt) etc….
  • These elements donot lose eletrons at anode and collect under the anode as anode mud.

Question 4.
State the role of silica in the metallurgy of copper.
Answer:
The role of silica in the metallurgy of copper is to àcts as an acidic flux. Silica reacts with the impurities of iron and form slag.
FeO (Gangue) + SiO2 (flux) → FeSiO3 (Slag)

Question 5.
Explain “poling. [A.P. Mar.16, 15]
Answer:
When the metals are having the metal oxides as impurities this method is employed. The impure metal is melted and is then covered by carbon powder. Then it is stirred with green wood poles. The reducing gases formed from the green wood and the carbon, reduce the oxides to the metal.
Eg: Cu & Sn metals are refined by this method.

Question 6.
Decribe a method for the refining of nickel.
Answer:
Mond’s process:

  • In Mond’s process, nickel is heated in a stream of carbon monoxide forming a volatile complex, nickel tetra carbonyl.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 1
  • Nickel tetra carbornyl is strongly heated to decompose and gives the pure Nickel
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 2

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy

Question 7.
How is cast iron different from pig iron ?
Answer:

  • Cast iron is formed by melting pig iron with scrap iron and coke in presence of blast of hot air. It contains carbon content 3%(approximately). It is extremely hard and brittle.
  • Pig iron is formed from blast furnace. It contains carbon 4% (approximately). It contains small quantities of impurities S, P, Si, Mu etc….

Question 8.
What is the difference between a mineral and an ore ?
Answer:
Minerals : The naturally occuring chemical compounds of metal in the earth’s crust are called minerals.
Ore : The mineral from which metal can be extracted economically is called ore.

Question 9.
Why copper matte is put in silica lined converter ?
Answer:
Copper matte conains Cu2 sand FeS. In this mixture FeS is gangue. For removing the gangue, silica present in the lining of the Bessemer’s converter acts as acidic flux and forms slag.
2FeS (gangue) + 3O2 → 2FeO + 2SO2
FeO (gangue) + SiO2 (flux) → FeSiO3 (Slag)

Question 10.
What is the role of cryolite in the metallurgy of aluminium? [T.S. Mar. 16, 15]
Answer:
By adding the cryolite to the pure Alumina, the melting point of pure Alumina is lowered (which is very high 2324K) and eletrical conductivity of pure alumina is increased.

Question 11.
How is leaching carried out in the case of low grade copper ores?
Answer:
In case of low grade ores of copper, hydrometallurgy technique is used for extraction. Here leaching process can be done by using acids (or) bacteria, The solution containing Cu+2 is treated with scrap iron (or) H2.
Cu+2(aq) + H2(g) → Cu(S) + 2H+(aq)

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy

Question 12.
Why is zinc not extracted from zinc oxide through reduction using CO?.
Answer:
Zinc is not extracted from zinc oxide through reduction by using CO.
Explanation:
2Zn + O2 → 2ZnO, ∆G° = -650 IcI
2C0 + O2 → 2CO, ∆G° = -450 kJ
2ZnO + 2CO → 2Zn, 2CO2, ∆G° = 200 kJ
∆G° = Positive indicatis that the reaction is not feasible.

Question 13.
Give the composition of the following alloys. [A.P. & T.S. Mar. 19, 17] [Mar. 14]
a) Brass
b) Bronze
c) German Silver
Answa:
a) Composition of Brass : 60 – 80% Cu, 20 – 40% Zn .
b) Composition of Bronze : 75 – 90% Cu, 10 – 25% Sn
c) Composition of German silver : 50 – 60% Cu, 10 – 30% Ni, 20 – 30% Zn.

Question 14.
Explain the terhts gangue and slag.
Answer:
Gangue : The ore is contaminated with the minerals of earth crust and undesired chemical compounds. These are known as gangue (or) matrix.
Slag: The fused material obtained during the refining (or) smelting of metals by combining the flux with gangue is called slag.
Eg : FeO (gangue) + SiO2 (flux) → FeSiO3 (Slag)

Question 15.
How is Ag or Au obtained by leaching from the respective ores ?
Answer:
Ag and Au are leached with a dilute solution of NaCN (or) KCN in presence of 02(air). From the leached solution the metal is obtained through displacement by Zinc. .
4M(s) + 8eN(aq) + 2H2O(aq) + O2(g) → 4[M(CN)2](aq) + 4OH(aq)
2[M(CN)2 ](aq) + Zn(s) → [Zn(CN)4]2-(aq) + 2M(s)

Question 16.
What are the limitations of Ellingham diagram ?
Answer:
Limitations of Ellingham diagram :

  • Ellingham diagram is based only on the thermodynamic concepts. It does not explain the kinetics of the reduction process. The graph simply indicates whether a reacton is possible or not but not the kinetics of the reaction.
  • The interpretation of ∆G° is depends on K [ ∆G° = -RTl.nK]
    It is presumed that the reactants and products are in equilibrium. .
    MxO + Ared ⇌ xM + AOox
    This is not always true because the reactant or product may be solid.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy

Question 17.
Write any two ores with formulae of the following metals :
(a) Aluminium
(b) Zinc
(c) Iron
(d) copper
Answer:
a) Ores of Aluminium : Bauxite – Al2 O3. 2H2O
Cryolite – Na3AlF6
b) Ores of Zinc : Zinc blende – Zns
Calamine – ZnCO3
c) Ores of Iron : Haematite – Fe2O3
Magnetite – Fe3O4
d) Ores of copper : Copper pyrites – CuFeS2
Copper glance – Cu2S.

Question 18.
What is matte ? Give its composition.
Answer:
During the extraction of ‘Cu’ from copper pyrites the product of the blast furnace consists mostly of Cu2S and a little of FeS. This product is known as “Matte”. It is collected from the outlet at the bottom of the fumance.

Question 19.
What is blister copper ? Why is it so called ? [T.S. Mar. 18]
Answer:
During the extraction of ‘Cu’ from copper pyrites when the matte is charged into a Bessemer converter then cuprous oxide combine with cuprous sulphide and forms Cu metal.
2CU2O + Cu2S → 6Cu + SO2
The ‘Cu’ meted is cooled.
The obtained copper metal is impure and is known as “Blister copper” (98% pure).
The solid fied copper has blistered appearance due to evolution of SO2 Hence it is called blister copper.

Question 20.
Explain magnetic separation of impurities from an ore.
Answer:
Electro-magnetic method : The method is used if the gangue or the ore particles are magnetic in nature. The finely powdered ore is dropped on a belt moving on two strong electromagnetic rollers. The magnetic and the non-magnetic substances form two separate heaps.

For example, let the ore particles be magnetic and then the non-magnetic material will be the gangue. The non-magnetic material forms a heap nearer to the magnetic roller.
Eg : Haematite and magnetite hae magnetic ore particles. Cassiterite or Tin stone has Wolframite as magnetic impurity.

Question 21.
What is flux ? Give an example.
Answer:
Flux : An outside substance added to ore to lower its melting point is known as flux.

  • Flux combines with gangue and forms easily fusible slag.
    gangue + flux → slag
    Eg: FeO (gangue) + SiO2 (flux) → FeSiO3 (Slag

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy

Question 22.
Give two uses each of the following metals :
(a) Zinc
(b) Copper
(c) Iron
(d) Aluminium
Answer:
a) Uses of Zinc :

  • Zinc is used in large quantities in batteries
  • Zinc is used for galvanising iron.
  • Zinc is used in manufacturing alloys.
    Eg: Brass, German silver,

b) Uses of copper :

  • Copper is used in manufacturing of water pipes and steam pipes.
  • Copper is used in making wires used in electrical industry.
  • Copper is used in manufacturing of alloys.
    Eg : Brass, Bronze. .

c) Uses of Iron:

  • Cast iron is used in casting stoves, railway siéepers- gutter pipers, toys etc.
  • It is used in manufacturing of wrought iron and steel.
  • Wrought iron is used in making anchors, wires, bolts, chains etc.

d) Uses of Aluminium :

  • Aluminium foils are used as wrappers for chacolates.
  • Aluminium is fine dust used in paints and lacquers.
  • Aluminium is used in photo frames.
  • Aluminium is used in extraction of Cr and Mn from their oxides.

Question 23.
Between C and CO, which is a better reducing agent for ZnO ?.
Answer:
Case – I : [Coke as reducing agent]
ZnO + C → Zn + CO, ∆G° become lesser as the T is more then 1120K
Case – II : [CO as reducing agent]
ZnO + CO2 → Zn + CO, ∆G° becomes lesser when the T is more then 1323K.

  • The value of ∆G° is negative for a reaction to occur.
  • In the equation (1) ∆G° becomes negative at low temperature- so equation (1) is feasible i. r. C is a better reducing agent for ZnO.

Question 24.
Give the uses of
a) Cast iron
b) Wrought iron
c) Nickel steel
d) Stainless steel
Answer:
a) Uses of Cast iron :

  • Cast iron is used for casting stoves, railway sleepers, gutter pipes, toys etc.
  • It is used in manufacturing of wrought iron and steel.

b) Uses of wrought iron :

  • Wrought iron is used in making anchors, wires.
  • Wrought iron is used in making chains and agricultural implements.

c) Uses of Nickel steel:

  • Nickel steel is used for making cables, automobiles and aeroplane parts.
  • Nickel steel is used for making pendulum, measuring tapes, chrome steel for cutting tools and crashing machines.

d) Uses of stainless steel:

  • Stainless steel is used in manufacturing of cycles, automobiles.
  • Stainless steel is used in manufacturing of utensils, pens etc.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy

Question 25.
How is aluminium useful in the extraction of chromium and manganese from their oxides ?
Answer:

  • ’AT’ is used as reducing agent.
  • 4 By Alumino thermite process Cr, Mn are extracted from their oxides.
  • The reactions are highly exothermic.
    Cr2O3 + 2Al → 2Cr + Al2O3
    3Mn3O4 + 8Al → 4Al2O3 + 9Mn

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Copper can be extracted by hydrometallurgy but not zinc – explain.
Answer:
Copper can be extracted by hydromefallurgy but not zinc.
Explanation:

  • E0 Value of Zn+2/Zn = -0.762V is less than that of E0 value of Cu+2/Cu = 0.337V .
  • From the above data zinc is a stronger reducing agent and can easily displace the Cu+2 ions present in the complex.
    [Cu(CN)2] + Zn (Soluble complex → [Zn(CN)2] + Cu (Precipitate)
  • Zinc can be isolated by hydrometallurgy only when stronger reducing agents than zinc are present.
  • So zinc cannot be extracted by hydrometallurgy.

Question 2.
Why is the extraction of copper form pyrites more difficult then that from its oxide ore through reduction?
Answer:
The extraction of copper from pyrites is more difficult than that from its oxide ore through reduction.
Explanation:
Pyrites (Cu2S) Cannot be reduced by carbon(or) hydrogent because the standard free energy of formation (∆G°) of Cu2S is greater then those of CS2 and H2S.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 3
The ∆G° of copper oxide is less than that of CO2.
∴ The sulphide ore is first converted to oxide by roasting and then reduced.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 4

Question 3.
Explain zone refining.
Answer:
Zone refining:

  • Zone refining is based on the principle that the impurities are more soluble in the melt than in the solid state of the metal.
  • A circular mobile heater is fixed at one end of a rod of impure metal.
  • The molten zone moves along with the heater moves forward the pure metal crystallises out of the melt and the impurities pass into the adjacent molten zone.
  • The above process is repeated several times and the heater is moved in the same direction form one end to the other end. At one end impurities get concentrated. This end is cut off.
  • This method is very useful for producing semiconductor grade metals of very high purity. Eg : Ge, Si, B, Ga etc…
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 5

Question 4.
Write down the chemical reactions taking place in the extraction of zinc from zinc blende.
Answer:
In the extraction of zinc from zinc blende the following chemical reactions taking place.
i) Roasting : The process of strong heating the zinc blende in presence of air is roasting.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 6
ii) Reduction : Zinc oxide obtained by roasting undergo reduction with coke.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 7

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy

Question 5.
Write down the chemical reactions taking place in different zones in the blast furnace during the extraction of iron.
Answer:
The chemical reactions taking place in different zones in the blast furnace during the extraction of iron are
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 8

Question 6.
How is alumina separated from silica in the bauxite ore associated with silica ? Give equations.
Answer:
Serpeck’s process is used for the purification of white Bauxite i.e., Bauxite containing silica as impurity.
In this process bauxite is mixed with coke and is then heated to 2075K in a current of nitrogen. Silica is reduced to silicon and escapes as a vapour.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 9
Aluminium nitride formed in the above step is hydrolysed to form aluminium hydroxide.
AlN + 3H2O → AZ(OH)3 ↓ + NH3
Al(OH)3 PPt is washed, dried and then ignited to from purified bauxite.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 10

Question 7.
Giving examples to differentiate roasting and calcination. [T.S. Mar. 19, 18, 16, 15; A.P. Mar. 16, 15]
Answer:
Roasting: Removal of the volatile components of a mineral by heating mineral either alone (or) mixed with some other substances to a high temperature in the presence of air is called Roasting.

  • It is applied to the sulphide ores.
  • SO2 gas is producted along with metal oxide.
    Eg : 2ZnS + 3O2 AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 11 2ZnO + 2SO2

Calcination: Removal of the volatile components of a mineral by heating in the absence of air is called calcination.

  •  It is applied to carbonates and bicarbonates.
  • CO2 gas is produced along with metal oxide.
    Eg: CaCO3 AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 11 CaO + CO2
    ZnCO3 AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 11 ZnO + CO2

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy

Question 8.
The Value of ∆G° for the formation of Cr2O3 is – 540kJ mol-1 and that of Al2O3 is – 827kJ mol-1. Is the reduction of Cr2O3 Possible with Al?
Answer:
From the given data the following are the thermo chemical equations
[latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex] Cr(s) + O2(g) → [latex]\frac{2}{3}[/latex] Cr2O2(s), ∆G° – 540 KJ ……………….. (1)
[latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex] Al(s) + O2(g) → [latex]\frac{2}{3}[/latex] Al2O3(s), ∆G° – 827 KJ ……………….. (2)
Equation (1) – Equation (2)
[latex]\frac{2}{3}[/latex] Cr2O3(s) + [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex] Al(s) → [latex]\frac{2}{3}[/latex] Al2O3(s) + [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex] Cr(s), ∆G° – 287 KJ
∆G° = -ve, So the reaction is feasible
Hence the reduction of Cr2O3 is possible with ‘Al’.

Question 9.
What is the role of graphite rod in the electrometallurgy of aluminium ? [A.P. Mar. 16]
Answer:

  • In the electrolytic reduction of alumina by Hall – Heroult process graphite rod acts as anode.
  • At anode, O2 gas is liberated which reacts with the carbon of anode to form CO2 gas. So these graphite rods are consumed slowly and need to be replaced from time to time.
    Al2O3 ⇌ 2Al+3 + 3O-2
    Cathode : Al+3 + 3e → Al
    Anode : 3O-2 → 3[O] + 6e
    C(s) + O2(g) → CO2(g)

Question 10.
Outline the principles of refining of metals by the following methods.
(a) Zone refining
(b) Electrolytic refining
(c) Poling
(d) Vapour phase refining.
Answer:
a) Zone refining :

  • Zone refining is based on the principle that the impurities are more soluble in the melt than in the solid state of the metal. .
  • A circular mobile heater is fixed at one end of a rod of impure metal.
  • The molten zone moves along with the heater moves forward the pure metal crystallises out of the melt and the impurities pass into the adjacent molten zone.
  • The above process is repeated several times and the heater is moved in the same direction form one end to the other end. At one end impurities get concentrated. This end is cut off.
  • This method is very useful for producing semiconductor grade metals of very high purity.
    Eg : Ge, Si, B, Ga etc..
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 12

b) Electrolytic refining : This process is used for less reactive metals like Cu, Ag, AZ, Au etc.

  • In this process anode is made by impure metal and a thin strip of pure metal acts as cathode. .
  • On electrolysis metal dissolves from anode and pure metal gets deposited at cathode.
    M → Mn+ + ne
    Impure
    Mn+ + ne → M (Cathode) Pure metal
    Impurities settle down below anode in the form of anode mud.

c) Poling : When the metals are having the metal oxides as impurities this method is employed. The impure metal is melted and is then covered by carbon powder. Then it is stirred with green wood poles. The reducing gases formed from the green wood and the carbon, reduce the oxides to the metal.
Eg : Cu & Sh metals are refined by this method.

d) Vapour phase refining: In this method the metal is converted into its volatile compound and collected. It is then decomposed to give pure metal. .

  1. The metal should form a volatile compound with an available reagent.
  2. The volatile compound should be easily decomposable. So the the recovery is easy.
    E.g : Mond’s process :
  3. In Mond’s process, nickel is heated in a stream of carbon monoxide forming a volatile complex, nickel tetra carbonyl.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 13
  4. Nickel tetra carbomyl is strongly heated to decompose and gives the pure Nickel
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 14

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy

Question 11.
Predict the conditions under which Al might be expected to reduce MgO.
Answer:
The Equations for the formation of two oxides are
[latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex]Al(S) + O2(g) → 2Mg(S) + [latex]\frac{2}{3}[/latex] O2(g) [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex] 2MgO(S)
From the Ellingham diagram the two curves of these oxides formation intersect each otherat a certain point. The corresponding value of ∆G° becomes zero for the reduction of MgO by aluminium metal,
2MgO(S) + [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex] Al(S) ⇌ 2Mg(S) + [latex]\frac{2}{3}[/latex] Al2O3(S)

  • From the above information the reduction of MgO by Al metal cannot occur below this temperature (1665 K) instead, Mg can reduce  Al2O3 to Al below 1665 K.
  • Al-Metal can reduce MgO to Mg above 1665K because ∆G° for Al2O3 is less compared to that of MgO.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 15

Question 12.
Explain the purification of sulphide ore by froth floatation method. [A.P. Mar.’19, 17, 15; T.S. Mar. 15]
Answer:
Froth floatation method :
This method is used to concentrate sulphide ores.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 16

  • In this process a suspension of the powdered ore is made with water.
  • A rotating paddle is used to agitate the suspension and air is blown into the suspension in presence of an oil.
  • Froth is formed as a result of blown of air, which carries the mineral particles.
  • To the above slurry froth collectors and stabilizers are added.
  • Collectors like pine oil enhance non-wettability of the mineral particles.
  • Froth stabilizers like cresol stabilize the froth.
  • The mineral particles wet by oil and gangue particles wet by water.
  • The broth is light and is skimmed off. The ore particles are then obtained from the froth. By using depressants in froth floatation process, it is possible to separate a mixture of two suplhide ores.
    Eg : In the ore containing ZnS and PbS, the depressant used is NaCN. It prevents ZnS from coming to the froth but allows PbS to come with the froth.

Question 13.
Explain the process of leaching of alumina from bauxite. [T.S. Mar. 17]
Answer:
The principal ore of aluminium, bauxite, usually contains SiO2, iron oxides and titanium oxide (TiO2) as impurities, concentration is carried out by digesting the powdered ore with a concentrated solution of NaOH at 473 – 523 K and 35 – 36 bar pressure. The way. Al2O3 is leached out as sodium aluminate (and SiO2 too as sodium silicate) leaving the other impurities behind :
Al2O3 (S) + 2NaOH(aq) + 3H2O(l) → 2 Na[Al(OH)4](aq)
The aluminate is alkaline in nature and is neutralised by passing CO2 gas and hydrated Al2O3 is precipitated. At this stage, the solution is seeded with freshly prepared samples of hydrated Al2O3 which induces the precipitation of Al2O3 xH2O
2 Na[Al(OH)4](aq) + CO2(g) → Al2O3 xH2O(s) + 2NaHCO3(aq)
The sodium silicate remains in the solution and the insoluble hydrated alumina is filtered, dried and heated to give pure Al2O3:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 17

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy

Question 14.
What is Ellingham diagram ? What information can be known from this in the reduction of oxides ?
Answer:
The graphical representation of Gibbs energy which provides a sound basis for considering the choice of reducing agent in the reduction of oxides. This graphical representation is known as Ellingham diagram.

  • This diagram helps us in predicting the feasibility of thermal reduction of an ore.
  • The Criterion of feasibility of a reaction is that at a given temperature, Gibbs energy of the reaction must be negative.
  •  Ellingham diagram normally consists plots of ∆G° vs T for formation of oxides of elements.
  • The graph indicates whether a reaction is possible or not, i.e., the tendency of reduction with a reducing agent is indicated with a reducing agent is indicated.
  • The reducing agent forms its oxide when the metal oxide is reduced. The role of reducing agent is to make the sum of ∆G° values of the two reactions negative.
  • Out of C and CO, Carbon monoxide (CO) is a better reducting agent at 673K.
  • At 983K (or) above coke(C) is better reducing agent.
  • The above observations are form Ellingham diagram.
    Zinc is not extracted from zinc oxide through reduction by using CO.

Explanation :

  • 2Zn + O2 → 2ZnO, ∆G° =-650 kJ
  • 2CO + O2 → 2CO2, ∆G° = -450 kJ
  • 2ZnO + 2CO → 2Zn, 2CO2, ∆G° = 200 kJ
    ∆G° = Positive indicatis that the reaction is not feasible.
    The above fact is explained on the basis of Ellingham diagram.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 18

Question 15.
How is copper extracted from copper pyrites?
Answer:
Extraction of copper from copper pyrites :
Copper pyrite is the main source of copper metal. Various steps involved in the extraction of copper discussed below.
Step – I:
Concentration of ore by froth floatation process :
The ore is first crushed in ball mills. The finely divided ore is suspended in water. A little pine oil is added and the mixture is vigorously agitated by a current of air. The froth formed carries the ore particles almost completely. The gangue sinks to the bottom of the tank. The froth is separated and about 95% concentrated ore is obtained.

Step -II:
Roasting : To remove the volatile impurities like As (or) Sb, the ore is roasted in a free supply of air. A mixture of sulphides of copper and iron are obtained and these are partially oxidised to respective oxides.
Cu2S. Fe2S3 + O2 → Cu2S + 2FeS + SO2
2Cu2S + 3O2 → 2Cu2O + 2SO2
2FeS + 3O2 → 2FeO + 2SO2

Step -III:
The roasted ore is mixed with a little coke and sand (Silica) and smelted in a blast furnace and fused. A blast of air, necessary for the combustion of coke, is blown through the tuyeres present at the base of the furnace. The oxidation of the sulphides of copper and iron will be completed further. A slag of iron silicate is formed according to the reactions given below :
2FeS + 3O2 → 2FeO + 2SO2
FeO + SiO2 → Fe SiO3 Ferrous Silicate (Slag)
Cu2O + FeS → Cu2S + FeO

Step -IV : After smelting the copper ore in blast furnace, the product of the blast furnace consists mostly of Cu2S and a little of ferrous sulphide. This product is known as “Matte.” It is collected from the outlet at the bottom of the furnace. After then the following processes are carried out for getting the pure copper.

Bessemerization : The matte is charged into a Bessemer converter. A bessemer converter is a pear-shaped furnace. It is made of steel plates. The furnace is given a basic lining with lime or magnesium oxide (obtained from dolomite or magnesite). The converter is held in position by trunnions and can be tilted in any position. A hot blast of air and sand is blown through the tuyeres present near the bottom. Molten metal, the product in the furnace, collects at the bottom of the converter.

Reactions that took place in blast furnace go to completion. Almost all of iron is eliminated as a slag. Cuprous oxide combines with cuprous sulphide and forms Cu metal.
2Cu2O + Cu2S → 6Cu + SO2
The molten metal is cooled in sand moulds. S02 escapes. The impure copper metal is known as “Blister copper” and is about 98% pure.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 19
Step -V:
Refining : The Blister copper is purified by electrolysis. The impure copper metal is made into plates. They are suspended into lead – lined tanks containing Copper (II) Sulphate solution. Thin plates of pure copper serve as cathode. The cathode plates are coated with graphite. On electrolysis, pure copper is deposited at the cathode. The copper obtained is almost 100% pure Cu.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy

Question 16.
Explain the extraction of Zinc form Zinc blende.
Answer:
“Zinc blende (ZnS)” is an important source for ‘Zn’ metal.
Extraction of Zinc : Zinc blende ore is treated in the following stages.
i) Crushing : The ore is crushed to a fine powder in ball mills.

ii) Concentration of the ore : The ore is concentrated first by gravity process. The crushed ore is washed with a stream of water on a Wilfley’s table. The tables have a corrugated top and are under a rocking motion. Due to this motion, the lighter gangue particles are washed away by the steam. The heavier ore particles settle to the bottom of the table.

The partially concentrated ore is further concentrated by froth floatation process. The ore particles go with the froth.

The concentrated ore is subjected further to electromagnetic separation, if iron oxide is present in the gangue. Iron oxide is magnetic and so forms a heap nearer to the magnetic pole.

iii) Roasting: The concentrated ore thus obtained is roasted in rotary shelf burner which is provided with horizontal shelves and raking arms. The ore is added at the top and zinc oxide is collected from the bottom. The following reactions take place.
2ZnS + 3O2 → 2ZnO + 2SO2
ZnS + 2O2 → ZnSO4
2ZnSO4 → 2ZnO + 2SO2 + O2.
iv) Reduction : Three methods are in practice for the reduction of the oxide to the metal., The most commonly used method is the Belgian process. In this process the roasted ore is mixed with coal or coke intimately and is taken in fireclay or earthem ware retorts. The retorts are made of fireclay which are bottle shaped tubes. These are closed at one end. The other end is connected to air cooled earthem ware condenser. A large number of retorts are placed in tiers in a large furnace and heated in 1100°C by burning the gas. ‘Prolongs’ made of sheet iron are attached to the condensers. The metal condenses in these earthem ware condensers and the prolongs. The metal powder collected is mixed with some zinc oxide and is known as “zinc dust”. Some of the zinc metal is collected in the fused state. This is solidified in moulds. This metal is called “zinc spelter”.
ZnO + C → Zn + CO
ZnO + CO → Zn + CO2
Electrolytic refining : Very pure zinc is obtained by electrolysis. The electrolyte is zinc sulphate solution containing a little H2SO4. Impure zinc is made the anode and the pure zinc plates are made the cathode.

Question 17.
Explain smelting process in the extraction of copper.
Answer:
The roasted ore is mixed with a little coke and sand (Silica) and smelted in a blast furnace and fused. A blast of air, necessary for the combustion of coke, is blown through the tuyeres present at the base of the furnace. The oxidation of the sulphides of copper and iron will be completed further. A slag of iron silicate is formed according to the reactions given below :
2FeS + 3O2 → 2FeO + 2SO2
FeO + SiO2 → Fe SiO3
Ferrous Silicate (Slag)
Cu2O + FeS → Cu2S + FeO

Question 18.
Explain electrometallurgy with an example.
Answer:
Electro metallurgy : Metallurgy involving the use of electric arc furnaces, electrolysis and other electrical operations is called electrometallurgy.
In the reduction of a molten metal salt, electrolysis is used. These methods are based on electro chemical principles.
These are expained by the equation
∆G° = -n FE°
n = no. of electrons
E° = Electrode potential.
Electrolytic Reduction of Alumina : Pure Alumina (Al2O3) is a bad conductor of electricity and it has high melting point (2050°C). So it cannot be electrolysed. Alumina is electrolysed by dissolving in fused cryolite to increase the conductivity and small amount of Fluorspar is added to reduce its melting point. Thus the electrolyte is a fused mixture of Alumina, Cryolite and Fluorspar.
Electrolysis is carried out in an iron tank lined inside with graphite (carbon) which functions as cathode. A number of carbon rods (or) copper rods suspended in the electrolyte functions as Anode.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 20
An electric current of 100 amperes at 6 to 7 volts is passed through the electrolyte. Heat produced by the current keeps the mass in fused state at 1175 to 1225K. The following reactions take place in the electrolytic cell under these conditions.
Na3AlF6 → 3NaF + AlF3
Cryolite
4AlF3 → 4Al3+ + 12F
At cathode : 4Al3+ + 12e → 4Al
At anode : 12F → 6F2 + 12e
F2 formed at the anode reacts with alumina and forms Aluminium fluoride.
2Al2O3 + 6F2 → 4AlF3 + 3O2
Aluminium, produced at the cathode, sinks to the bottom of the cell. It is removed from time to time through topping hole.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy

Question 19.
Explain briefly the extraction of aluminium from bauxite.
Answer:
Extraction of Aluminium from Bauxite:
For the purpose of extraction of Al, Bauxite is the best source.
purification of Bauxite : Bauxite containing Fe2O3 as impurity is known as red Bauxite.
Bauxite containing SiO2 as impurity is known as white Bauxite and can be purified by “Serpeck’s Process”. Red Bauxite is purified by Bayer’s process and Hall’s process.
Bayer’s Process : Red bauxite, is roasted and digested in concentrated NaOH at 423 K. Bauxite dissolves in NaOH to form sodium meta aluminate while impurity Fe2O3 does not dissolve which can be removed by filtration.
Al2O3.2H2O + 2NaOH → 2NaAlO2 + 3H2O
The solution which contains sodium meta aluminate is diluted and crystals of AZ(OH)3, are added which serves as seeding orgent. Sodium meta aluminate undergoes hydrolysis to precipitate Al(OH)3.
2NaAlO2 + 4H2O → 2NaOH + 2Al(OH)3
Al(OH)3 is filtered and ignited at 1200°C to get anhydrous alumina.
2Al(OH)3 AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 11 Al2O3 + 3H2O
Halls’ Process: Red Bauxite is fused with sodium carbonate to form sodium meta aluminate which is extracted with water. The impurity Fe2O3 is filtered out.
Al2O3 + Na2CO3 → 2NaAlO2 + CO2
Into the solution of sodium meta aluminate, CO2 gas is passed to precipitate Al(OH)3.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 26
The precipitated Al(OH)3 is ignited at 1200°C to get anhydrous alumina.
2Al(OH)3 → Al2O3 + 3H2O
Serpeck’s Process: Powdered bauxite is mixed with coke and heated to 2075 K in a current of nitrogen gas. Aluminium Nitride is formed while Si02 is reduced to SiO2 which escapes out.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 27
Aluminium nitride is hydrolysed to get aluminium hydroxide which on ignition gives anhydrous alumina.
AlN + 3H2O → Al(OH)3 ↓ + NH3
2Al(OH)3 AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 11 3 Al2O3 + 3H2O

Electrolytic Reduction of Alumina : Pure Alumina (Al2O3) is a bad conductor of electricity and it has high melting point (2050°C). So it cannot be electrolysed. Alumina is electrolysed by dissolving in fused cryolite to increase the conductivity and small amount of Fluorspar is added to reduce its melt¬ing point. Thus the electrolyte is a fused mixture of Alumina, Cryolite and Fluorspar.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 28
Electrolysis is carried out in an iron tank lined inside with graphite (carbon) which functions as cathode. A number of carbon rods (or) copper rods suspended in the electrolyte functions as Anode.
Na3AlF6 → 3NaF + AlF3
Cryolite
4AlF3 → 4Al3+ + 12F
At cathode : 4Al3+ + 12e → 4Al
At anode : 12F → 6F2 + 12e
F2 formed at the anode reacts with alumina and forms Aluminium fluoride.
2Al2O3 + 6F2 → 4AlF3 + 3O2
Aluminium, produced at the cathode, sinks to the bottom of the cell. It is removed from time to time through topping hole.

Purification of Aluminium : (Hoope’s Process)
The impurities present are Si, Cu, Mn etc.,
The electrolytic cell used for refining of aluminium consists of iron tank lined inside with carbon. This acts as anode. The tank contains three layers of fused masses. The bottom layer contains impure aluminium. Middle layer contains mixture of AlF3, NaF and BaF2 saturated with Al2O3. Top layer contains pure aluminium and graphite rods kept in it act as cathode.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 29
On passing current aluminium ions from the middle layer are discharged at the cathode as pure aluminium. Equivalent amount of aluminium from the bottom layer passes into middle layer.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
The choice of a reducing agent in a particular case depends on thermo-dynamic factor, •lain with two examples.
Answer:
The choice of a reducing agent in a particular case depends on thermodynamic factor. This fact can be explained by considering the following examples.

  • Out of C and CO, Carbon nonoxide (CO) is a better reducting agent at 673K.
  • At 983K (or) above coke(C) is better reducing agent.
  • The above observations are form Ellingham diagram.
  • Zinc is not extracted from zinc oxide through reduction using CO.

Explanation :
2Zn + O2 → 2ZnO, ∆G° = -650 kJ
2CO + O2 → 2CO2, ∆G° = -450 kJ
2ZnO + 2CO → 2Zn + 2CO2, ∆G° = 200 kJ
∆G° = Positive indicatis that the reaction is not feasible.
The extraction of copper from pyrites is more difficult than that from its oxide ore through reduction. ‘ .
Explanation : Pyrites (Cu2S) Cannot be reduced by carbon (or) hydrogent because the standard free energy of formation (∆G°) of Cu2S is greater then those of CS2 and H2S.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 21
The ∆G° of copper oxide is less than that of CO2.
∴ The sulphide ore is first converted to oxide by roasting and then reduced. Roasting
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 22
The following are the conditions that Al might be expected to reduce MgO. The Equations for the formation of two oxides are
[latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex]Al(S) + O2(g) → [latex]\frac{2}{3}[/latex] Al2O3(S)
2Mg(S) + O2(g) → 2MgO(S)
From the Ellingham diagram the two curves of these oxides formation intersect each other at a certain point. The corresponding value of ∆G° becomes zero for the reduction of MgO by aluminium metal,
2MgO(S) + [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex]Al(S) → 2Mg(S) + [latex]\frac{2}{3}[/latex] Al2O3(S)

  • From the above information the reduction of MgO by Al metal cannot occur below this temperature (1665 K) instead, Mg can reduce Al2O3 to Al below 1665 K.
  • Al-Metal can reduce MgO to Mg above 1665 K because ∆G° for Al2O3 is less compared to that of MgO.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 23

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy

Question 2.
Discuss the extraction of Zinc from Zinc blend
Answer:
“Zinc blende (ZnS)” is an important source for ‘Zn’metal.
Extraction of’Zinc : Zinc blende ore is treated in the following states.
i) Crushing : The ore is crushed to a fine powder in ball mills.
ii) Concentration of the ore : The ore is concentrated first by gravity process. The crushed ore is washed with a stream of water on a Wilfley’s table. The tables have a corrugated top and are under a rocking motion. Due to this motion, the lighter gangue particles are washed away by the steam. The heavier ore particles settle to the bottom of the table.

The partially concentrated ore is further concentrated by froth floatation process. The ore particles go with the froth.

The concentrated ore is subjected further to electromagnetic separatioh, if iron oxide is present in the gangue. Iron oxide is magnetic and so forms a heap nearer to the magnetic pole.

iii) Roasting: The concentrated ore thus obtained is roasted in rotary shelf burner which is provided with horizontal shelves and raking arms. The ore is added at the top and zinc oxide is collected from the bottom. The following reactions take place.
2ZnS + 3O2 → 2ZnO + 2SO2
ZnS + 2O2 → ZnSO4
2ZnSO4 → 2ZnO + 2SO2 + O2
iv) Reduction : Three methods are in practice for the reduction of the oxide to the metal. The most commonly used method is the Belgian process. In this process the roasted ore is mixed with coal or coke intimately and is taken in fireclay or earthern ware retorts. The retorts are made of fireclay which are bottle shaped tubes. These are closed at one end. The other end is connected to air cooled earthern ware condenser. A large number of retorts are placed in tiers in a large furnace and heated in 1I00°C by burning the gas. ‘Prolongs’ made of sheet iron are attached to the condensers. The metal condenses in these earthern ware condensers and the prolongs. The metal powder collected is mixed with some zinc oxide and is known as “zinc dust”. Some of the zinc metal is collected in the fused state. This is solidified in moulds. This metal is called “zinc spelter”.
ZnO + C → Zn + CO
ZnO + CO → Zn + CO2
Electrolytic refining : Very pure zinc is obtained by electrolysis. The electrolyte is zinc sulphate solution containing a little H2SO4. Impure zinc is made the anode and the pure zinc plates are made the cathode.

Question 3.
Explain the reactions occuring in the blast furnace in the extraction of iron.
Answer:
In the Blast furnace, reduction of iron oxides takes place in different temperature ranges. Hot air is blown from the bottom of the furnace and coke is burnt to give temperature upto about 2200K in the lower portion itself. The burning of coke therefore supplies most of the heat required in the process. The CO and heat moves to upper part of the furnace. In upper part, the temperature is 1o%er and the iron oxides (Fe2O3 and Fe3O4) coming from the top are reduced in steps to FeO. Thus, he reduction reactions taking place in the lower temperature range and in the higher temperature range, depend on the points of corresponding intersections in the ∆rG° vs T plots.

These reactions can be summarised as follows:
At 500 – 800 K (lower temperature range in the blast furnace)
3 Fe2O3 + CO → 2 Fe3O4 + CO2
Fe3O4 + 4 CO → 3 Fe + 4 CO2
Fe2O3 + CO → 2 FeO + CO2
At 900 – 1500 K (higher temperature range in the blast furnace)
C + CO2 → 2 CO
FeO + CO → Fe + CO2
Lime stone is also decomposed to CaO which removes silicate impurity of the ore as CaSiO3 slag. The slag is in molten state and separates out from iron.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 24
The iron obtained from Blast furnace contains about 4% carbon and many impurities in smaller amount (e.g., S, P, Si, Mn). This is known as pig iron. Cast iron is different from and is made by melting pig iron with scrap iron and coke using hot air blast. It has slightly lower carbon content (about 3%) and is extremely hard and brittle.
Fe2O3 3 C → 2 Fe + 3 CO

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy

Question 4.
Discuss the extraction of copper from copper pyrites.
Answer:
Extraction of copper from copper pyrites:
Copper pyrite is the main source of copper metal. Various steps involved in the extraction of copper discussed below.
Step – I:
Concentration of ore by froth floatation process:
The ore is first crushed in ball mills. The finely divided ore is suspended in water. A little pine oil is added and the mixture is vigorously agitated by a current of air. The froth formed carries the ore particles almost completely. The gangue sinks to the bottom of the tank. The froth is separated and about 95% concentrated ore is obtained.

Step – II: Roasting :
To remove the volatile impurities like As (or) Sb, the ore is roasted in a free supply of air. A mixture of sulphides of copper and iron are obtained and these are partially oxidised to respective oxides.
Cu2S. Fe2S3 + O2 → Cu2S + 2FeS + SO2
2Cu2S + 3O2 → 2Cu2O + 2SO2
2FeS + 3O2 → 2FeO + 2SO2

Step – III :
The roasted ore is mixed with a little coke and sand (Silica) and smelted in a blast furnace and fused. A blast of air, necessary for the combustion of coke, is blown through the tuyeres present at the base of the furnace. The oxidation of the sulphides of copper and iron will be completed further. A slag of iron silicate is formed according to the reactions given below :
2FeS + 3O2 → 2FeO + 2SO2
FeO + SiO2 → Fe SiO3
Ferrous Silicate (Slag)
Cu2O + FeS → Cu2S + FeO
Step -IV:
After smelting the copper ore in blast furnace, the product of the blast furnace consists mostly of Cu2S and a little of ferrous sulphide. This product is known as “Matte.” It is collected from the outlet at the bottom of the furnace . After then the following processes are carried out for getting the pure copper.

1. Bessemerization: The matte is charged into a Bessemer converter. A bessemer converter is a pear-shaped furnace. It is made of steel plates. The furnace is given a basic lining with lime or magnesium oxide (obtained from dolomite or magnesite). The converter is held in position by trunnions and can be tilted in any position. A hot blast of air and sand is blown through the tuyeres present near the bottom. Molten metal, the product in the furnace, collects at the bottom of the converter.

Reactions that took place in blast furnace go to completion. Almost all of iron is eliminated as a slag. Cuprous oxide combines with cuprous sulphide and forms Cu metal.
2Cu2O + Cu2S → 6Cu + SO2
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 25
The molten metal is cooled in sand moulds. S02 escapes. The impure copper metal is known as “Blister copper” and is about 98% pure.

Step -V:
Refining : The Blister copper is purified by electrolysis. The impure copper metal is made into plates. They are suspended into lead – lined tanks containing Copper (II) Sulphate solution. Thin plates of pure copper serve as cathode. The cathode plates are coated with graphite. On electrolysis, pure copper is deposited at the cathode. The copper obtained is almost 100% pure Cu.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy

Question 5.
Explain the various steps involved in the extraction of almninium from bauxite.
Answer:
Extraction of Aluminium from Bauxite:
For the purpose of extraction of Al, Bauxite is the best source.
purification of Bauxite : Bauxite containing Fe2O3 as impurity is known as red Bauxite.
Bauxite containing SiO2 as impurity is known as white Bauxite and can be purified by “Serpeck’s Process”. Red Bauxite is purified by Bayer’s process and Hall’s process.
Bayer’s Process : Red bauxite, is roasted and digested in concentrated NaOH at 423 K. Bauxite dissolves in NaOH to form sodium meta aluminate while impurity Fe2O3 does not dissolve which can be removed by filtration.
Al2O3.2H2O + 2NaOH → 2NaAlO2 + 3H2O
The solution which contains sodium meta aluminate is diluted and crystals of AZ(OH)3, are added which serves as seeding orgent. Sodium meta aluminate undergoes hydrolysis to precipitate Al(OH)3.
2NaAlO2 + 4H2O → 2NaOH + 2Al(OH)3
Al(OH)3 is filtered and ignited at 1200°C to get anhydrous alumina.
2Al(OH)3 AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 11 Al2O3 + 3H2O
Halls’ Process: Red Bauxite is fused with sodium carbonate to form sodium meta aluminate which is extracted with water. The impurity Fe2O3 is filtered out.
Al2O3 + Na2CO3 → 2NaAlO2 + CO2
Into the solution of sodium meta aluminate, CO2 gas is passed to precipitate Al(OH)3.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 26
The precipitated Al(OH)3 is ignited at 1200°C to get anhydrous alumina.
2Al(OH)3 → Al2O3 + 3H2O
Serpeck’s Process: Powdered bauxite is mixed with coke and heated to 2075 K in a current of nitrogen gas. Aluminium Nitride is formed while Si02 is reduced to SiO2 which escapes out.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 27
Aluminium nitride is hydrolysed to get aluminium hydroxide which on ignition gives anhydrous alumina.
AlN + 3H2O → Al(OH)3 ↓ + NH3
2Al(OH)3 AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 11 3 Al2O3 + 3H2O

Electrolytic Reduction of Alumina : Pure Alumina (Al2O3) is a bad conductor of electricity and it has high melting point (2050°C). So it cannot be electrolysed. Alumina is electrolysed by dissolving in fused cryolite to increase the conductivity and small amount of Fluorspar is added to reduce its melt¬ing point. Thus the electrolyte is a fused mixture of Alumina, Cryolite and Fluorspar.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 28
Electrolysis is carried out in an iron tank lined inside with graphite (carbon) which functions as cathode. A number of carbon rods (or) copper rods suspended in the electrolyte functions as Anode.
Na3AlF6 → 3NaF + AlF3
Cryolite
4AlF3 → 4Al3+ + 12F
At cathode : 4Al3+ + 12e → 4Al
At anode : 12F → 6F2 + 12e
F2 formed at the anode reacts with alumina and forms Aluminium fluoride.
2Al2O3 + 6F2 → 4AlF3 + 3O2
Aluminium, produced at the cathode, sinks to the bottom of the cell. It is removed from time to time through topping hole.

Purification of Aluminium : (Hoope’s Process)
The impurities present are Si, Cu, Mn etc.,
The electrolytic cell used for refining of aluminium consists of iron tank lined inside with carbon. This acts as anode. The tank contains three layers of fused masses. The bottom layer contains impure aluminium. Middle layer contains mixture of AlF3, NaF and BaF2 saturated with Al2O3. Top layer contains pure aluminium and graphite rods kept in it act as cathode.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 29
On passing current aluminium ions from the middle layer are discharged at the cathode as pure aluminium. Equivalent amount of aluminium from the bottom layer passes into middle layer.

Textual Examples

Question 1.
Suggest a condition under which magnesium could reduce alumina.
Answer:
The two equations are :
a) [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex] Al + O2 → [latex]\frac{2}{3}[/latex] Al2O3
b) 2 Mg + O2 → 2MgO
At the point of intersection of the Al2O3 and MgO curves (marked. “A” in Ellingham diagram), the ∆G becomes ZERO for the reaction :
[latex]\frac{2}{3}[/latex] Al2O3 + 2Mg → 2MgO + [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex] Al
Below that point magnesium can reduce alumina.

Question 2.
Although thermodynamically feasible, in practice, magnesium metal is not used for the reduction of alumina in the metallurgy of aluminium. Why ?
Answer:
Temperatures below the point of intersection of Al2O3 and MgO curves, magnesium can reduce alumina. But the process will be uneconomical.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy

Question 3.
Why is the reduction of a metal oxide easier if the metal formed is in liquid state at the temperature of reduction ?
Solution:
The entropy is higher if the metal is in liquid state than when it is in solid state. The value of entropy change (∆S) of the reduction process is more on +ve side when the metal formed is in liquid state and the metal oxide being reduced is in solid state. Thus the value of ∆Gbecomes more on negative side and the reduction becomes easier.

Question 4.
At a site, low grade copper ores are available and zinc and iron scraps are also available. Which of the two scraps would be more suitable for reducing the leached copper ore and why ?
Solution:
Zinc being above iron in the electrochemical series (more reactive metal is zinc), the reduction will be faster in case zinc scraps are used. But zinc is costlier metal than iron. So using iron scraps will be advisable and advantageous.

Intext Questions

Question 1.
Which of the ores mentioned in Table can be concentrated by magnetic separation method ?
Answer:
Ores in which one of the components (either the impurity or the actual ore) is magnetic can be concentrated.
E.g.: ores containing iron (haematite, magnetite, siderite and iron pyrites).
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 30
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 31

Question 2.
What is the significance of leaching in the extraction of aluminium ?
Answer:
Leaching is significant as it helps in removing the impurities like SiO2, Fe2O3 etc. from the bauxite ore.

Question 3.
The reaction, Cr2O3 + 2 Al → Al2O3 + 2 Cr (∆G = -421 kJ) is thermodynamically feasible as is apparent from the Gibbs energy value. Why does it not take place at room temperature?
Answer:
Certain amount of activation energy is essential even for such reactions which are thermodynamically feasible, therefore heating is required.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy

Question 4.
Is it true that under certain conditions Mg can reduce Al2O3 and Al can reduce MgO ? What are those conditions ?
Answer:
Yes, below 1350°C Mg can reduce Al2O3 and above 1350°C, Al can reduce MgO. This can be inferred from ∆G vs T plots.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 5 General Principles of Metallurgy 32

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 4th Lesson Surface Chemistry Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 4th Lesson Surface Chemistry

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is an interface ? Give one example.
Answer:
The interface is normally a few molecules thick but its area depends on the size of the particles of bulk.
Interface is represented by separating the bulk phases by hyphen (-) (or) a slash (/).
Eg : Interface between a solid and a gas may be represented by solid-gas (or) solid/gas.

Question 2.
What is adsorption ? Give one example.
Answer:
Adsorption : The accumulation (or) concentration of a substance on the surface rather than in the bulk of solid (or) liquid is known as adsorption.
Eg : Adsorption of gases like O2, H2, Cl2 etc., on charcoal.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 3.
What is absorption ? Give one example.
Answer:
Absorption : The uniform distribution of a substance through out the bulk of the solid substance is known as absorption.
Eg : Chalk stick dipped in ink.

Question 4.
Distinguish between adsorption and absorption. Give one example of each.
Answer:
Adsorption
1. The accumulation (or) concentration of a substance on the surface rather than in the bulk of solid (or) liquid is known as adsorption.
Eg :Adsorption of gases like O2, H2, Cl2 etc., on charcoal.

Absorption
1) The uniform distribution of a susbstance through out the bulk of the solid substance is known as absorption.
Eg : Chalk stick dipped in ink.

Question 5.
The moist air becomes dry in the presence of silica gel. Give reason for this.
Answer: The moist air becomes dry in presence of silica gel because the water molecules present in air get adsorbed on the surface of the gel.

Question 6.
Methylene blue solution when shakes with animal charcoal gives a colourless filtrate on filteration. Give the reason.
Answer:
Methylene blue solution (organic dye) when shaken with animal charcoal gives a colourless filtrate on filtration. The molecules of the dye from the solution are adsorbed on the charcoal.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 7.
A small amount of silica gel and a small amount of anhydrous calcium chloride are placed separately in two corners of a vessel containing water vapour. What phenomena will occur ?
Answer:
A small amount of silica gel and a small amount of anhydrous CaCl2 are placed separately in two comers of a vessel of water vapour. Water vapours are is absorbed by anhydrous CaCl2 but adsorbed by silical gel.

Question 8.
What is desorption ?
Answer:
Desorption: The process of removing aa adsorbed substance from a surface on which it is adsorbed is called desorption.

Question 9.
What is sorption ?
Answer:
In case of some substances both adsorption and absorption takes place. This phenomenon is called sorption.

Question 10.
Amongst adsorption, absorption which is a surface phenomena and why ?
Answer:

  1. Adsorption is a surface phenomenon.
  2. In adsorption the concentration of the adsorbate increases only at the surface of the adsorbent. While in absorption the concentration is uniformly distributed throughout the bulk of the compound.

Question 11.
What is the name given to the phenomenon when both absorption and adsorption take place together ?
Answer:
The name of the phenomenon when both adsorption and absorption take place together is sorption.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 12.
Chalk stick dipped in an ink solution exhibits the following :
a) The surface of the stick retains the colour of the ink.
b) Breaking the chalk stick,-it is found still white from inside.Explain the above observations.
Answer:
a) Chalk stick dipped in an ink solution, the surface of the stick retains the colour of the ink due to adsorption of coloured molecules in the ink.
b) Chalk stick dipped in an ink solution, the surface of the stick retains the colour of the ink due to adsorption of coloured molecules in the ink while the solvent of the in k goes deep into the stick due to absorption so on breaking the chalk stick, it is found to be white inside.

Question 13.
What are the factors which influence the adsorption of a gas on a solid ?
Answer:
Adsorption of a gas on solids is influenced by the following factors.
a) Surface area of the adsorbent, b) Nature of the gas, c) Pressure of the adsorbate, d) Temperature.

Question 14.
Why is adsorption always exothermic ?
Answer:
During the adsorption, there is always a decrease in residual forces of the surface. There is decrease in surface energy which appears as heat.
∴ Adsorption is always Exothermic.

Question 15.
Give the signs of ∆H & ∆S, when ammonia gas gets adsorbed on charcoal.
Answer:
When NH3 gas gets adsorbed on charcoal the sign of ∆H is negative and the sign of ∆S is also negative.

Question 16.
How many types of adsorption are known ? What are they ?
Answer:
Adsorption process is divided into two types.
1) Physisorption 2) Chemisorption

Question 17.
What types of forces are involved in physisorption of a gas on solid ?
Answer:
Weak Vander waals forces are involved in physisorption of a gas on solid.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 18.
What type of interaction occurring between gas molecules and a solid surface is responsible for chemisorption of the gas on solid.
Answer:
Chemical bonds occur between gas molecules and a solid surface, is responsible for chemisorption of the gas on solid.

Question 19.
Why chemisorption is called activated adsorption ?
Answer:
Chemisorption involves a high energy of activation. Hence it is referred as activated adsorption.

Question 20.
What is the difference between physisorption and chemisorption ?
Answer:
1) In physisorption the forces present between adsorbate and adsorbent are weak vander . waal’s forces.
2) In chemisorption the forces present between adsorbate and adsobent are chemical bonds (valency forces).

Question 21.
Out of physisorption and chemisorption, which can be reversed ?
Answer:
Out of physisorption and chemisorption, phyisorption is reversed (reversible).

Question 22.
How is adsorption of a gas related to its critical temperature ?
Answer:
Higher the critical temperature, greater is the case of liquefaction of a gas. Then the extent of adsorption will be high.

Question 23.
The critical temperature of SO2 is 630 K and that of CH4 is 190 K. Which is adsorbed easily on activated charcoal ? Why ?
Answer:
Given the critical temperature of SO2 is 630 K and that of CH4 is 190 K.
SO2 gas is adsorbed easily on activated charcoal because of higher critical temperature. Higher the critical temperature of gas, extent of adsorption is high.

Question 24.
Easily liquefiable gases aye readily adsorbed on solids. Why ?
Answer:
Easily liquefiable gases are readily adsorbed on solids because vander waal’s forces are stronger near the critical temperatures.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 25.
Amongst SO2, H2 which will be adsorbed more readily on the surface of charcoal and why ?
Answer:
Among SO2, H2 gases, SO2 gas adsorb more readily on the surface of charcoal because SO2 has high critical temperature (630 K) than dihydrogen (33K).

Question 26.
Compare the enthalpy of adsorption for physisorption and chemisorption.
Answer:

  1. In physical adsorption enthalpy of adsorption is low (20 – 40 KJ/mole)
  2. In case of chemical adsorption enthalpy of adsorption is high (80 – 240 KJ/mole)

Question 27.
What is the magnitude of enthalpy of physical adsorption ? Give reason for this magnitude.
Answer:
The magnitude of enthalpy of physical adsorption is low 20 – 40 KJ ,/mole. This is due to the presence of weak vander waal’s forces between gas molecules and solid surface.

Question 28.
What is the magnitude of enthalpy of chemisorption ? Give reason for this magnitude.
Answer:
The magnitude of enthalpy of chemical adsorption is high 80 – 240 KJ /mole. This is due to the presence of chemical bonds between gas molecules and solid surface.

Question 29.
Give any two applications of adsorption.
Answer:
Applications of adsorption :
a) Separation of inert gases : Different noble gases adsorb at different temperatures on coconut charcoal. By this principle (adsorption) mixture of noble gas is separated by adsorption on coconut charcoal.
b) Gas masks : Gas mask is a device which consists of activated charcoal (or) mixture of adsorbents is used by coal miners to adsorb poisonous gases during breathing.

Question 30.
Why physisorption suffers from lack of specificity ?
Answer:
Physisorption suffers from lack of specificity.
Explanation: A given surface of an adsorbent doesnot show any preference of a particular gas as the vander waal’s forces are universal.

Question 31.
What is an adsorption isotherm ? Write the equation of Freundlich adsorption isotherm.
Answer:
Adsorption Isotherm : The variation in the amount of gas adsorbed by the adsorbent with pressure at constant temperature can be expressed by means of a curve known as adsorption isotherm.
Freundlich adsorption isotherm equation is [latex]\frac{x}{m}[/latex] = k. P1/n
x = mass of the gas adsorbed
m = mass of the adsorbent
P, k and n are constants.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 32.
In the Freundlich adsorption isotherm, mention the conditions under which, following graph will be true ?
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 1
Answer:
In the above graph extent of adsorption does not depends on the pressure.
When [latex]\frac{1}{n}[/latex] = 0, [latex]\frac{x}{m}[/latex] = constant, the adsorption is independent of pressure.

Question 33.
What role does adsorption play in heterogenous catalysis ?
Answer:
In heterogeneous catalysis, adsorption of reactants on the solid surface of the catalysts increases the rate of reaction.
Eg : Manufacturing of NH3 using Fe-as catalyst [Haber’s process].

Question 34.
What is the role of MnO2 in the preparation of O2 from KClO3 ?
Ans. The chemical equation for the preparation of O2 from KClO3 is
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 2
MnO2 increases the rate of reaction. Hence it is a catalyst for the above reaction.

Question 35.
Define “promoters” and “poisons” in the phenamenon of catalysis ?
Answer:
Promoters : The substances with enhance the activity of catalyst are known as promoters. Poisons : The substances which decrease the activity of a catalyst are known as poisons.

Question 36.
What is homogeneous catalysis ? How is it different from heterogeneous catalysis ?
Answer:
Homogeneous Catalysis : The catalysis in which reactants and catalyst are in same phase is called Homogeneous catalysis.
In case of heterogeneous catalysis, catalyst and reactants are present in different phases where as in case of homogeneous catalysis catalyst and reactants are present in same phase.

Question 37.
Give two examples for homogeneous catalytic reactions.
Answer:
The following are the examples for homogeneous catalytic reactions.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 3

Question 38.
Give two examples for heterogeneous catalysis.
Answer:
The following are the examples of heterogeneous catalytic reactions.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 4

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 39.
Give two examples which indicate the selectivity of heterogeneous catalysis.
Answer:
The following reactions indicate the selectivity of heterogeneous catalysis.
Starting with H2 and CO, and using different catalysts, we get different products.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 5
The action of a catalyst is highly selective in nature. A substance which acts as a catalyst in one reaction may fail to catalyse another reaction.

Question 40.
Why zeolites are treated as shape selective catalysts ?
Answer:

  • The catalytic reaction that depends upon the pore structure of the catalyst and the size of the reactant and product molecules is called shape selective catalysts.
  • Zeolites are shope selective catalysts because of their honey comb-like structure. They are microporous alumino silicates with 3-dimensional net work of silicates.

Question 41.
Which zeolite catalyst is used to convert alcohols directly into gasoline ?
Answer:
Zeolite ZSM – 5 is used to convert alcohols directly into gasoline (petrol) by dehydrating them to give a mixture of hydrocarbons.

Question 42.
What are enzymes ? What is their role in human body ?
Answer:
Enzymes are complex nitrogenous organic compounds which are produced by living plants and animals.
These act as specific catalysts in biological reactions.
These catalyse the numerous reactions that occur in the bodies of animals and plants to maintain the life process.

Question 43.
Can catalyst increase the yield of reaction ?
Answer:
Catalyst does not increase the yield of reaction. Catalyst just speed up the product formation.

Question 44.
Name any two enzyme catalyzed reactions. Give the reactions.
Answer:
1) Inversion of Cane Sugar :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 6
2) Decomposition of urea into ammonia and CO2:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 7

Question 45.
Name the enzymes obtained from soyabean source.
Answer:
The enzyme obtained from soyabean source is urease.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 46.
Name the enzymes used in
a) Decomposition of urea into ammonia.
b) Conversion of proteins into peptides in stomach.
Answer:
a) The enzyme used in the decomposition of urea into ammonia is urease.
b) The enzyme used in conversion of proteins into peptides in stomach is pepsin.

Question 47.
What enzymes are obtained from yeast ?
Answer:
The enzymes obtained from yeast are invertase, zymase and maltase.

Question 48.
At what ranges of temperature and pH, enzymes are active ?
Answer:
The optimum temperature range for enzymatic activity is 298 – 310 K. Human body temperature being 310 K is suited for enzyme catalysed reactions. The rate of an enzyme – catalysed reaction is maximum at a particular pH called optimum pH, which lies between 5-7.

Question 49.
Represent diagrammatically the mechanism of the enzyme catalyis.
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 8

Question 50.
Name any two industrially important heterogeneous catalytic reactions mentioning the catalysts used.
Answer:
i) Manufacturing of NH3 by Haber’s process
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 9
ii) Hydrogenation of vegetable oils in presence of finely divided nickel as catalyst.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 10
The above mentioned are industrially important heterogeneous catalytic reactions.

Question 51.
What is a colloidal solution ? How is it different from a true solution with respect to dispersed particle size and homogeneity ?
Answer:
A heterogeneous system in which one substance is dispersed as large particles in another substance is called colloidal solution.

  • In colloidal solution the particle size of the dispersed phase is of the order of 1 mμ – 1 μ where as in true solution the particle size of the solute are the order of mp or less.
  • Colloidal solution is a heterogeneous binary system where as true solution is a homogeneous binary system.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 52.
Name the dispersed phase and a dispersion medium in the following colloidal systems

  1. fog
  2. smoke
  3. milk.

Answer:

  1. Fog : Dispersed phase → liquid
    Dispersion medium → gas
  2. Smoke : Dispersed phase → carbon particles (solid)
    Dispersion medium → Air
  3. Milk : Dispersed phase → liquid fat
    Dispersion medium → water

Question 53.
What are lyophilic and lyophobic sols ? Give one example for each type.
Answer:
Lyophilic colloid : The colloidal solution in which the dispersed phase has great affinity to the dispersion medium is called a Lyophilic colloid or Lyophilic solution.
Ex : Starch solution.

The starch paste when dissolved in hot water, with stirring, the starch solution is formed. The starch particles (dispersed phase) has great affinity to water molecules (dispersion medium). So starch solution is a lyophilic solution or lyophilic colloid.

Lyophobic colloid : The colloidal solution in which there exists not much affinity between the dispersed phase and dispersion medium, it is called a Lyophobic colloid or Lyophobic solution.
Ex: Gold solution.

Gold rods are placed in water containing alkali. Electric arc is applied between gold rods. The gold particles dissolves in water, to give gold solution.

Gold particles (dispersed phase) have not much affinity towards water (dispersion medium). So this is a Lyophobic solution or Lyophobic colloid.

Question 54.
Explain the terms with suitable examples .

  1. aerosol
  2. hydrosol.

Answer:

  1. Aerosol: The colloidal solution in which dispersed phase is solid and dispersion medium is gas is called an aerosol.
    Eg : Smoke, dust.
  2. Hydrosol: In a colloidal solution dispersion medium is water them it is called aquasol (or) hydrosol.
    Eg : Milk, Gold sol.

Question 55.
Explain why lyophilic colloids are relatively more stable than lyophobic colloids ?
Answer:

  • Lyophilic colloids are reversible and are quite stable. These are not coagulated.
  • Lyophobic sols are irreversible and need stabilizing agents for their stabilization. These sols are readily precipitated on the addition of small amounts of electrolytes.

Question 56.
Give two examples of colloidal solutions of liquids dispersed in solid. What is the name given to the colloidal solution ?
Answer:
Cheese, butter, jellies are examples of colloidal solutions of liquids dispersed in solid. The name of the colloidal solution given to this type is Gels.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 57.
What is the difference between multimolecular and macromolecular colloids ? Give one example for each.
Answer:

  • In multimolecular colloids, a large number of atoms (or) small molecules of the dispersed phase aggregate together to form species in the colloidal range.
  • Macro molecules in suitable solvents form solutions in which the sizes of the macromolecules are in the colloidal range.

Question 58.
What are micelles ? Give one example.
Answer:
Micelles : Some substances which at low concentrations behave as normal strong electrolytes, but at high concentrations exhibit colloidal behaviour due to formation of aggregates. The aggregated particles thus formed are called micelles.
Eg : Stearate ions (C17H35COO) associate together in high concentration, in a solution of soap in water and forms a micelle.

Question 59.
How do micelles differ from a normal colloidal solutions ?
Answer:
Some substances which at low concentrations behave as normal strong electrolytes, but at high concentrations exhibit colloidal behaviour due to formation of aggregates. The aggregated particles thus formed are called micelles.

  • hese are also known as associated colloids.
  • These colloids have both lyophilic and lyophobic parts.
  • Micelles may contain as many as 100 or more of normal molecules.
  • On dilution these colloids revert back to individual electrolytes.

Question 60.
Give two examples of associated colloids.
Answer:
Surface active agents such as soaps and synthetic detergents are examples of associated colloids.

Question 61.
Can the same substance act both as colloid and crystalloid ?
Answer:
Yes, Micelles, (associated colloids) act as normal strong electrolytes at low concentrations and exhibit colloid behavior at high concentrations.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 62.
Give two examples of lyophobic sols.
Answer:
Metal sols and metal suiphide sols are examples of lyophobic colloids

  • Gold sol is lyophobic colloid

Question 63.
Give examples of’colloidal system of

  1. Liquid In solid
  2. Gas in solid.

Answer:

  1. Cheese, butter, jellies are examples of liquid in solid type colloidal system.
  2. Foam rubber, pumice ‘stone are examples of gas in solid type of colloidal system.

Question 64.
What type of substances form lyophobic sols?
Answer:
Substances like metals, their sulphides.donot form colloidal sol simply by mixing with the dispersion medium. These form colloids by special methods, These sols are lyophobic colloids.

Question 65.
What is critical micelle concentration (CMC) and kraft temperature (Tk) ?
Answer:
The formation of micelles takes place only above a particular temperature called Kraft temperature (Tk) and above a particular concentration called Critical micelle concentration (CMC).

Question 66.
Why lyophobic colloids are called irreversible colloids ?
Answer:

  • Lyophobic colloids are coagulated by the addition of small amounts of electrolytes.
  • The precipitates does not give back the colloidal sol by same addition of the dispersion medium.
  • Hence lyophobic sols are called irreversible sols.

Question 67.
How a colloidal sol of arsenous sulphide is prepared ?
Answer:
Colloidal sol of arsenous sulphide is prepared by the double decompostion of As2O3 and H2S as follows.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 11

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 68.
What is Peptization ?
Answer:
Peptization : The process of converting a precipitate into colloidal sol by shaking it with the dispersion medium in the presence of a small amount of electrolyte is called Peptization.

Question 69.
What is dialysis ? How is dialysis can be made fast ?
Answer:
Dialysis : The process of removing a dissolved substance from a colloidal solution using a suitable membrane is called dialysis.
Dialysis is made faster by applying an Emf. This is known as Electrodialysis.

Question 70.
What is collodion solution ?
Answer:
Collodion solution : Collodion is a 4% solution of nitro cellulose in a mixture of alcohol and ether.

Question 71.
How an ultrafilter paper is prepared from ordinary filter paper ?
Answer:
Ultra filter paper is prepared by soaking the filter paper in collodion solution, hardening by formaldehyde and then finally dried.

Question 72.
What is Tyndall effect ?
Answer:
Tyndall effect : When light enters a colloidal solution, it is scattered by the large sized colloidal dispersed phase particles. Therefore when light passes through a solution we will be able to see the path of the light as a luminous beam. This is called Tyndall effect.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 12
This is an optical property exhibited by colloidal solution. This phenomenon is clearly seen with a microscope placed at right angles to the path of light. Colloidal particles become self luminous due to absorption of light. A true solution does not show Tyndall effect.

Question 73.
What conditions is tyndall effect observed ?
Answer:
Tyndall effect is observed only when

  1. The diameter of the dispersed particles is not much smaller than the wave length of the light used.
  2. The refractive indices of the dispersed phase and dispersion medium differ greatly in magnitude.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 74.
Can Tyndall effect be used to distinguish between a colloidal solution and a true solution ? Explain.
Answer:
Tyndall effect is used to distinguish between a colloidal solution and a true solution.

  • True solution placed in dark and is observed in the direction of the light passed beam passing through it. It appears clear and it is observed from a direction at right angles to the direction of the light beam, it appears perfectly dark.
  • Colloidal solution viewed in the same way may appear reasonably clear in the direction of light but they show a mild to strong opalescence when viewed at right angles to the direction of light.

Question 75.
Sky appears blue in colour. Explain.
Answer:
Dust particles along with water vapour suspended in air scatter blue light which reaches our eyes and hence the sky looks blue to us.

Question 76.
What is Brownian movement.
Answer:
Brownian movement: This is a kinetic property of colloidal solution.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 13
When a colloidal solution is examined by ultramicroscope, the colloidal particles are seem to be moving in a rapid zig-zag motion.
This rapid motion of colloidal particles is called Brownian movement.

This motion is due to unequal bombardment of colloidal particles by molecules of dispersion medium. Smaller the colloidal particles the more rapid is the Brownian movement.

Question 77.
What is the main cause for charge on a colloidal solution ?
Answer:
The charge on the colloidal particles is due to electron capture by sol particles during electro dispersion of metals , and due to preferential adsorption ions from solution (or) due to formulation of electrical double layer.

Question 78.
What is electrokinetic potential or zeta potential ?
Answer:
In a colloidal sol the charges of opposite signs on the fixed and diffused parts of the double layer results in a difference in potential between these layers. The potential difference between the fixed layer and the diffused layer of opposite charge is called electro kinetic potential (or) zeta potential.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 79.
Write the chemical formula of positively charged and negatively charged hydrated ferric oxide colloidal solutions.
Answer:

  • Formula of positively charged hydrated ferric oxide is Fe2O3.xH2O/Fe+3
  • Formula of negatively charged hydrated ferric oxide is Fe2O3.xH20/OH

Question 80.
Give the order of coagulating power of Cl, SO42-, PO43- in the coagulation of positive sols.
Answer:
The order of coagulating ability’of given ions with positive sols is PO43- > SO42- > Cl

Question 81.
Amongst Na+, Ba2+, Al3+, which coagulates negative sol readily and why ?
Answer:
The order of coagulating ability of given ions with negative sols is Al+3 > Ba+2 > Na+

Question 82.
A colloidal solution of AgI is positively charged when prepared from a solution containing excess of Ag+ ions and negatively charged when prepared from a solution containing excess of I ions Explain.
Answer:
When a dilute AgNO3 solution is added to a dilute KI solution taken in excess, the precipitated Agl adsorbs I ions present in excess and a negatively charged AgI colloidal solution is formed. However when dilute KI solution is added to dilute AgNO3 solution taken in excess, AgI precipitate adsorbs Ag+ ions present in excess and a positively charged AgI colloidal solution is formed. Generally the ion common to dispersed particle is adsorbed. .
AgI/I
Negatively charged
AgI/Ag+
Positively charged.

Question 83.
What is electrophoresis ?
Answer:
When electric potential is applied across two platinum electrodes dipping in a colloidal solution,-the colloidal particles move towards one or the other electrode. The movement of colloidal particles under an applied emf is called “electrophoresis”.

Question 84.
What is electro osmosis ?
Answer:
If the movement of colloidal particles is arrested by some suitable means, the dispersion medium moves in opposite direction. This phenomenon is termed “electro osmosis”.

Question 85.
What is coagulation ?
Answer:
The stability of the lyophilic sols is due to the presence of charge on the colloidal particles. If this charge is neutralised the particles will come nearer to each other to form aggregates (or coagulate) and settle down under the force of gravity. This process of settling down of colloidal particles is called coagulation (or) flocculation (or) precipitation.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 86.
Define flocculation value.
Answer:
The minimum concentration of an electrolyte in millimoles per litre required to cause coagulation of a sol in two hours is called “coagulating value” (or) flocculation value.

Question 87.
State Hardy – Schulze rule.
Answer:
Greater the valence of the coagulating ion added, the greater is its power to cause coagulation. This is known as Hardy-Schulze rule.

Questions 88.
Coagulation takes place when sodium chloride solution is added to a colloidal solution of hydrated ferric oxide. Explain.
Answer:
When NaCl solution is added to the colloidal solution of hydrated ferric oxide coagulation takes place (precipitation formed). .
The reason is that colloidal particles interact with ions (Na+, Cl) carrying charge opposite to that present on themselves. This causes neutralisation of charges leading to their coagulation.

Question 89.
How are lyophobic solutions protected from phenomenon of coagulation.
Answer:
Lyophobic sols are protected from the phenomenon of coagulation by adding suitable lyophilic sol.

Question 90.
What is protective colloid ?
Answer:
Lyophilic colloids used for the prevention of coagulation of lyophobic colloids are called protective colloids.

  • Lyophilic colloids protect the lyophobic colloids.

Question 91.
What is an emulsion ? Give two examples. [A.P. Mar. 17]
Answer:
Emulsion: The colloidal system in which a dispersion of finely divided droplets of a liquid in another liquid medium is called emulsion.
Eg : Milk, Vanishing cream, Cold cream.

Question 92.
How emulsions are classified ? Give one example for each type of emulsion. [A.P. Mar. 17]
Answer:
Emulsion : A dispersion of finely divided droplets of a liquid in another liquid medium is called’emulsion’.
Ex: Milk.
In Milk, the droplets of liquid fat are dispersed in water. This is an example for oil in water type emulsion.
Classification of emulsions : Emulsions are “classified into two classes. These are
a) oil in water (O/W) and
b) water in oil (W/O), (O = Oil; W = Water).

These emulsions are classified as such depending on which is dispersed phase and which is dispersion medium.
a) Oil in Water (O/W) type emulsions : In this type of emulsions, the dispersed phase is oil and the dispersion medium is water.
Ex : Milk, liquid, fat (oil) in water.
Vanishing cream; fat in water.

b) Water in Oil (W/O) type emulsions : In this type of emulsions, the dispersed phase is water and the dispersion medium is oil.
Ex : Stiff greases : water in lubrication oils
Cod liver oil : water in cod liver oil
Cold cream : water in fat.

Question 93.
What is an emulsifying agent ?
Answer:
Emulsifying agent: The third substance which is added in small amounts to an emulsion to stabilize the emulsion is called emulsifying agent.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 94.
What is demulsification ? Name two demulsifiers.
Answer:
Demulsification : The separation of an emulsion into constituent liquids is known as demulsification.

Question 95.
How is artificial rain produced ?
Answer:
Artificial rain is produced by throwing electrified sand (or) spraying a sol carrying charge opposite to the one on clouds from an aeroplane.

Question 96.
Bleeding from fresh cut can be Stopped by applying alum. Give reasons.
Answer:
Bleeding from fresh cut can be stopped by applying alum. This is due to styptic action of alum which coagulates the blood and stops further bleeding.

Question 97.
Deltas are formed at the points where river enters the sea. Why ?
Answer:
Deltas are formed at the points where river enters the sea.
Explantation : River water is a colloidal solution of clay. Sea water contains a number of electrolytes. When river water meets the sea water, the electrolytes present in sea water coagulate the colloidal solution of clay resulting in its deposition of clay with the formation of delta.

Question 98.
Name any two applications of colloidal solutions.
Answer:
Applications of colloidal solutions :
Rubber: Plant latex is a colloidal solution of rubber particles which are negatively charged. Rubber is obtained from latex by coagulation.
Industrial Products : Paints, inks, synthetic plastics, rubber, graphite, lubricants, cement, etc., are all colloidal in nature.

Question 99.
How can aerial pollution by colloidal particles of smoke be prevented ? Explain.
Answer:
Aerial pollution by colloidal particles of smoke be prevented by electrical precipitation of smoke. Smoke is a colloidal solution of solid particles such as carbon, arsenic compounds, dust, etc., in air. The smoke, before it comes out from the chimney, is led through a precipitator containing plates having a charge opposite to that carried by smoke particles. The particles on coming in contact with these plates lose their charge and get precipitated. The particles thus settle down on the floor of the chamber. The precipitator is called cottrell precipitator.

Question 100.
Alum is used to purify water obtained from natural sources. Explain.
Answer:
The water obtained from natural sources often contains suspended impurities. Alum is added to such water to coagulate the suspended impurities and make water fit for drinking purposes.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 101.
Why medicines are more effective in colloidal state ?
Answer:
Colloidal medicines are more effective because they have large surface area and are therefore easily assimilated.

Question 102.
How rubber is obtained from latex ?
Answer:
Plant latex is a colloidal solution of rubber particles which are negatively charged. Rubber is obtained from latex by coagulation.

Question 103.
Name the type of emulsion to which milk belongs.
Answer:
Milk is a oil in water type of emulsion.
Dispersed phase : liquid fat.
Dispersion medium : water.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is adsorption ? Discuss the mechanism of adsorption of gases on solids.
Answer:
Adsorption : The accumulation (or) concentration of a substance on the surface rather than in the bulk of solid (or) liquid is known as adsorption.
Eg : Adsorption of gases like O2, H2, Cl2 etc., on charcoal.
Mechanism of Adsorption :

  • Adsorption arises due to the fact that the surface particles of the adsorbent are not in the same environment as the particles inside the bulk.
  • Adsorbent possess unbalanced or residual attractive forces. These forces are responsible for attracting the adsorbate molecules on adsorbent surface.
  • The extent of adsorption increases with increase in surface area of adsorbent at a given temperature and pressure.
  • During the adsorption, there is always a decrease in residual forces of the surface. There is decrease in surface energy which appears as heat. So, Adsorption is always Exothermic.
  • Adsorption is accompanied by decrease in enthalpy as well as decrease in entropy of system. .
  • As the adsorption proceeds AH becomes less and less negative, ultimately, AH becomes equal to TAS and AG becomes zero. At this state equilibrium is attained.

Question 2.
What are different types of adsorption ? Give any four differences between characteristics of these different types. [T.S. Mar. 19, 15; A.P. Mar. 15]
Answer:
Adsorption process is divided into two types.
1) Physisorption
2) Chemisorption.
Distinguishing characteristics of Physisorption and Chemisorption are given in the following table:
Physisorption

  1. This process is weak, due to vander Waal’s forces.
  2. The process is reversible.
  3. This is a quick process, i.e., takes place quickly.
  4. The process decreases with increase of temperature.
  5. This is a multilayered process.
  6. The process depends mainly on the nature of the adsorbent.

Chemisorption

  1. This process is strong, due to chemical forces.
  2. The process is irreversible.
  3. This is a slow process.
  4. The process increases with increase of temperature.
  5. This is a unilayered process.
  6. The process depends both on the nature of adsorbent and adsorbate.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 3.
What do you understand by the terms given below (a) absorption (b) Adsorption (c) Adsorbent and Adsorbate
Answer:
Absorption : The uniform distribution of a susbstance through out the bulk of the solid .substance is known as absorption. Eg: Chalk stick dipped in ink.
Adsorption : The accumulation (or) concentration of a substance on the surface rather than in the bulk of solid (or) liquid is known as adsorption.
Eg: Adsorption of gases like O2, H2, Cl2 etc., on charcoal.

Adsorbent: The substance on whose surface the adsorption occurs is known as adsorbent.

Adsorbate : The substance whose molecules get adsorbed on the surface of the adsorbent is known as adsorbate.
Eg: In the adsorption of acetic acid by charcoal, acetic acid is adsorbate and the charcoal is adsorbent.

Question 4.
Adsorption of a gas on the surface of solid is generally accompanied by decrease in entropy. Still it is a spontaneous process. Explain.
Answer:
Adsorption is accompanied by decrease in enthalpy as well as decrease in entropy of the system.

  • For a process to be spontaneus there is a decrease in Gibbs Energy. .
  • On the basis of equation ∆G = ∆H – T∆S; ∆G = -Ve
  •  If AH has sufficiently high negative value and T∆S is positive.
  • In an adsorption process which ¡s spontaneous ∆G becomes negative by combining above.
  • As the adsorption proceeds ∆H becomes less and less negative ultimately, ∆H becomes equal to T∆S and ∆G becomes zero. At this state equilibrium is attained.

Question 5.
How can the constants k and n of the Freundlich adsorption equation be calculated?
Answer:
Freundlich adsorption isotherm equation is
[latex]\frac{x}{m}[/latex] = k. P =, x/m = Extent of adsorption ⇒ P = Pressure
k and n are constants which depend on the nature of the adsorbent and the gas at a particular temperature.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 14
Applying logarithm to the above equation
log [latex]\frac{x}{m}[/latex] = log k + [latex]\frac{1}{n}[/latex] log P.

  • A graph is plotted taking log [latex]\frac{x}{m}[/latex] on y – axis and log P on x – axis. 1f the graph is a straight line then Freundlich isotherm is valid.
  • The slope of the straight line gives [latex]\frac{1}{n}[/latex] value.
  • The intercept on the y-axis gives value of log k.
  • [latex]\frac{1}{n}[/latex] has values between 0 and 1
  • When [latex]\frac{1}{n}[/latex], = 0, [latex]\frac{x}{m}[/latex] = constant, the adsorption is independent of pressure
    [latex]\frac{1}{n}[/latex] = 1, [latex]\frac{x}{m}[/latex] = kP i.e., [latex]\frac{x}{m}[/latex] ∝ p.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 6.
How does the extent of adsorption depend upon
a) Increasing the surface area per unit mass of adsorbent.
b) Increasing temperature of the system.
c) Increasing pressure of the gas.
Answer:
a) The extent of adsorption increases by increasing the surface area per unit mass of adsorbent.
b) The extent of adsorption decrease with an increase in temperature.
c) The extent of adsorption increase with increasing pressure of the gas.

Question 7.
What is catalysis ? How is catalysis classified ? Give two examples for each type of catalysis. [A.P. Mar. 16] [Mar. 14]
Answer:
Catalysis : A substance which alters the rate of a chemical reaction without itself being consumed in the process, is called a catalyst.
The action of catalyst in altering the rate of a chemical reaction is called catalysis.

Types of catalysis: Catalysis is classified into two types as
a) Homogeneous catalysis and b) Heterogeneous catalysis.

a) Homogeneous catalysis : The catalytic process in which the catalyst is present in the same phase as that of reactants, is known as homogeneous catalysis.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 15

b) Heterogeneous catalysis : The catalytic process in which the catalyst is present in a phase different from that of the reactants is known as heterogeneous catalysis.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 16

Question 8.
Discuss the mechanism involved in adsorption of heterogeneous catalysis.
Answer:
Adsorption theory of heterogeneous catalysis :
Adsorption theory explains the mechanism of heterogeneous catalysis.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 17

  • The modern adsorption theory is the combination of the intermediate compound formation theory and the old adsorption theory.
  •  The mechanism of catalysis involves five steps.
  • Diffusion of the reactants to the surface of the catalyst.
  • Adsorption of the reactant molecules on the surface of the catalyst.
  • Occurrence of chemical reaction on the catalyst’s surface through formation of an . intermediate.
  • Desorption of reaction products from the catalyst surface, and thereby making the surface available again for more reaction to occur.
  • Diffusion of reaction products away from the catalyst’s surface.

Question 9.
Discuss some features of catalysis by zeolites.
Answer:
The catalytic reaction that depends upon the pore structure of the catalyst and the size of the reactant and product molecules is called shape selective catalysts.

  • Zeolites are shope selective catalysts because of their honey comb-like structure. They are microporous alumino silicates with 3-dimensional net work of silicates.
  • Zeolites are microporous alumino silicates with dimensional network of silicates in which some Si-atoms are replaced by aluminium atoms giving Al-o-Si frame work.
  • The reactions taking place in zeolites depend upon the size and shape of reactant and product molecules as well as on the pores and cavities of the zeolites.
  • Zeolites are found in nature and also synthesized for catalytic selectivity.

Uses:

  • Zeolites are used as catalysts in petrochemical industries for cracking.
  • Zeolite ZSM – 5 is used to convert alcohol directly into gasoline (petrol) by dehydrating them to give a mixture of hydrocarbons.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 10.
Give brief account of mechanism of enzyme catalysis with suitable diagrams.
Answer:
Mechanism of enzyme catalysis :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 18
The enzyme – catalysed reactions may be considered to proceed in two steps.
Step 1 : Binding of substrate to enzyme to form an activated complex (ES).
E + S → E S
Step 2 : Decomposition of the activated complex to form product.
E S → E + P

Question 11.
Discuss the factors that influence the catalytic activity of enzymes.
Answer:
Factors influencing the catalytic activity of enzymes :

  • Highly specific nature: One catalyst catalyses only one reaction. Each enzyme is specific ‘ for a given reaction.
    Eg : The enzyme urease catalyses the hydrolysis of urea only and not any other amide.
  • Highly active under optimum temperature: The rate of an enzyme reaction is maximum at a temperature called optimum temperature.
  • The optimum temperature range for enzymatic activity is 298 – 310 K.
  • Highly active under optimum pH : The rate of an enzyme – catalysed reaction is maximum at a particular pH called optimum pH which lies between 5 – 7.
  • Increasing activity in presence of activators and co-enzymes : The enzymatic activity is increased in presence of co-enzymes (or) in presence of activators such as Na+, Mn+2 etc.,
  •  Influence of inhibitors and poisons: The inhibitors (or) poisons interact with the active functional groups on the enzyme surface and reduce or completely destroy the catalytic activity.

Question 12.
Name any six enzyme catalysed reactions. [A.P. Mar. 19]
Answer:
i) Inversion of Cane sugar : Enzyme : Invertase
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 19

Question 13.
What do you mean by activity and selectivity of catalysts ?
Answer:
Activity :
The ability of a catalyst in increasing the rate of reaction is defined as activity of catalyst.

  • The activity of a catalyst depends upon the strength of chemisorption to a large extent.
  • The reactants must get adsorbed reasonably strongly on to the catalyst to become reactive.
    Eg : The catalystic activity increases from Group – 5 to Group – 11 for hydrogenation reactions.
    The maximum activity being shown by 7 – 9 group metals.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 20

Selectivity:
The selectivity of a catalyst is its-ability to direct a reaction to form specific products. The following reactions indicate the selectivity of heterogeneous catalysis.
Starting with H2 and CO, and using different catalysts, we get different products.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 21
The action of a catalyst is highly selective in nature. A substance which acts as a catalyst in one reaction may fail to catalyse another reaction.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 14.
How are colloids classified on the basis of physical states of components ?
Answer:
On the basis of physical states of dispersed phase and dispersion medium colloidal solutions are classified into eight types.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 22

Question 15.
How are colloids classified on the basis of nature of the dispersion medium ?
Answer:
On the basis of nature of dispersion medium colloids are classified as follows.

  •  If the dispersion medium is ‘air’, the sols are called aerosols.
    Eg : Smoke.
  • If the dispersion medium is ‘water’ the sols are called Hydrosol (or) aquasol.
    Eg : starch solution.
  • If the dispersion medium is ‘alcohol’ then the sols are called alcosols.

Question 16.
How are colloids classified on the basis of interaction between dispersed phase and dispersion medium ?
Answer:
Lyophilic colloid : The colloidal solution in which the dispersed phase has great affinity to the dispersion medium is called a Lyophilic colloid or Lyophilic solution.
Ex: Starch solution.
The starch paste when dissolved in hot water, with stirring, the starch solution is formed. The starch particles (dispersed phase) has great affinity to water molecules (dispersion medium). So starch solution is a lyophilic solution or lyophilic colloid.

Lyophobic colloid : The colloidal solution in which there exists not much affinity between the dispersed phase and dispersion medium, it is called a Lyophobic colloid or Lyophobic solution.
Ex: Gold solution.

Gold rods are placed in water containing alkali. Electric arc is applied between gold rods. The gold particles dissolves in water, to give gold solution.

Gold particles (dispersed phase) have not much affinity towards water (dispersion medium). So this is a Lyophobic solution or Lyophobic colloid.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 17.
What is the difference between a colloidal sol, gel, emulsion and a foam?
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 23

Question 18.
What are lyophilic and lyophobic sols? Compare the two terms in terms of stability and reversibility.
Answer:
Lyophilic colloid : The colloidal solution in which the dispersed phase has great affinity to the dispersion medium is called a Lyophilic colloid or Lyophilic solution.
Ex : Starch solution.
The starch paste when dissolved in hot water, with stirring, the starch solution is formed. The starch particles (dispersed phase) has great affinity to water molecules (dispersion medium). So starch solution is a lyophilic solution or lyophilic colloid.

Lyophobic colloid : The colloidal solution in which there exists not much affinity between the dispersed phase and dispersion medium, it is called a Lyophobic colloid or Lyophobic solution.
Ex: Gold solution.

Gold rods are placed in water containing alkali. Electric arc is applied between gold rods. The gold particles dissolves in water, to give gold solution.

Gold particles (dispersed phase) have not much affinity towards water (dispersion medium). So this is a Lyophobic solution or Lyophobic colloid.

Question 19.
Name a substance whose molecules consist of lyophilic as well as lyophobic parts. Give its use in our daily life.
Answer:

  • Associated colloids (or) micelles contains both lyophobic and lyophillic parts.
  • Examples are soaps and synthetic detergents.
  • The cleaning action of soap is due to the fact that soap molecule form a micelle around the oil droplet.

Question 20.
Describe Bredig’s arc method of preparation of colloids with a neat diagram.
Answer:
Electrical disintegration or Bredig’s Arc method : This process involves dispersion as well as condensation. Colloidal sols of metals such as gold, silver, platinum, etc., are prepared by this method. In this method, electric arc is struck between electrodes of the metal immersed in the dispersion medium. The intense heat produced vapourises the metal, which then condenses to form particles of colloidal size.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 24

Question 21.
Name any four examples of preparation of colloids by chemical methods with necessary chemical equations.
Answer:
Chemical methods : Colloidal solutions are prepared by chemical reactions leading to the formation of species by double decompostion, oxidation, reduction or hydrolysis. These species then aggregate leading to the formation of sols.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 25

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 22.
Describe the purification of colloidal solutions by the phenomenon of dialysis with a neat diagram. [A.P. Mar. 18]
Answer:
Colloidal solutions generally contain excess amount of electrolytes and some other soluble impurities. It is necessary to reduce the concentration of soluble impurities to a requisite minimum. The impurities presence required in traces.
“The process used for reducing the amount of impurities to a requisite minimum is known as purification of colloidal solution”.

Purification of colloidal solution by Dialysis :
Dialysis : The process of removing a dissolved substance from a colloidal solution using a suitable membrane is called dialysis.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 26

  • In a true solution particles can pass through animal membrane (or) cellophane sheet (or) parchment paper but not colloidal particles.
  • The apparatus used for the dialysis is called dialyser.
  • A bag of suitable membrane containing the colloidal solution is suspended in a vessel containing a continuously flowing water.
  • The molecules and ions diffuse through the membrane into the water and pure colloidal solution is left behind in the bag.

Question 23.
Explain the formation of micelles with a neat sketch.
Answer:
Mechanism of micelle formation: Let us take the example of soap solution. Soap is sodium or potassium salt of a higher fatty acid and may be represented as RCOC Na+ (e.g., sodium strearate CH3 (CH2)16 COO Na+, which is a major component of many bar soaps). When dissolved in water, it dissociates into RCOO and Na+ ions. The RCOO ions, however, consist of two parts – a long hydrocarbon chain R (also called non-polar ‘tail’) which is hydrophobic (water repelling), and a polar group COO(also called polar-ionic ‘head’), which is hydrophilic (water loving).
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 27
The RCOO ions are, therefore, present on the surface with their COO groups in water and the hydrocarbon chains (R) staying away from it and remain at the surface. But at critical micelle concentration, the COO irons are pulled into the bulk of the solution and are aggregated to form a spherical shape with their hydrocarbon chains pointing towards the centre of the . sphere with COO part remaining outward on the surface of the sphere. The aggregate thus formed is known as ‘ionic micelle’. These micelles may contain as many as 100 simple molecules.

Similarly, in case of detergents, e.g., sodium laurylsulphate. CH3 (CH2)11 SO3Na+, the polar group is -SO3 along with the long hydrocarbon chain. Hence, the mechanism of micelle formation here also is same as that of soaps.

Question 24.
Action of soap is due to emulsification and micelle formation. Comment.
Answer:
Soap is sodium stearate, C17H35COONa, in water soap gives the ions stearate anion and sodium ion.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 28
Cleaning action of soap : Soap anions form a micelle. The grease or dirt of the cloth are absorbed into the interior of the micelle. The tails of the anion are pegged into micelle and these micelle are washed away with the soap solution.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 29
Soap thus, functions as an emulsifying agent for the water dirt emulsion. The emulsified grease or dirt is then washed away with soap solution.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 25.
Explain the phenomenon of Brownian movement giving reasons for the occurrence of this phenomena.
Answer:
Brownian movement: This is a kinetic property of colloidal solution.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 30
When a colloidal solution is examined by ultramicroscope, the colloidal particles are seem to be moving in a rapid zig – zag motion.
This rapid motion of colloidal particles is called Brownian movement. This motion is due to unequal bombardment of colloidal particles by molecules of dispersion medium. Smaller the colloidal particles the more rapid is the Brownian movement.

Question 26.
Name the four positively charged sols. .
Answer:
The following are the positively charged sols.

  • Hydroated metallic oxide sols. Eg : Al2O3.xH2O, CrO3.xH2O etc.
  • Basic dye stuffs Eg : Methylene blue sol.
  • Hemoglobin (blood).
  • Oxides Eg : TiO2 sol.

Question 27.
Name the four negatively charged sols.
Answer:
The following are the negatively charged sols.

  • Metal sols Eg : Ag, Au-sols.
  • Metallic suphides sols Eg : ArS3, CdS sols.
  • Acid dye stuffs Eg: eosinol.
  • Sols of starch, gum, clay etc.

Question 28.
Explain the terms helmholtz electrical double layer and zeta potential. What are their significancies in the colloidal solutions ?
Answer:
Helmholtz electrical double layer :
The combination of the two layers of opposite charges around the colloidal particle is called Helmholtz electrical double layer.

  • In a colloidal sol the charges of opposite signs on the fixed and diffused parts of the double layer results in a difference in potential between these layers. The potential difference between the fixed layer and the diffused layer of opposite charge is called electro kinetic potential (or) zeta potential.
  • The above concepts applicable in colloidal solution in which the solid particles carry one kind of charge while liquid medium carries opposite charge to that of solids.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 29.
Explain with a neat sketch the phenomenon of electrophoresis.
Answer:
Electrophoresis : The existence of charge on colloidal particles is confirmed by electro-phoresis experiment.
When electric potential is applied across two platinum electrodes dipping in a colloidal solution, the colloidal articles move towards one or the other electrode. The movement of colloidal particles under an applied emf is called “electrophoresis”.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 31
Positive charged particles move towards the cathode while negative charged particles towards anode.

Question 30.
Explain the following terms, i) Electrophoresis ii) Coagulation iii) Tyndall effect.
Answer:
Electrophoresis: When electric potential is applied across two platinum electrodes dipping in a colloidal solution, the colloidal particles move towards one or the other electrode. The movement of colloidal particles under an applied emf is called “electrophoresis”.

Coagulation : The stability of the lyophilic sols is due to the presence of charge on the colloidal particles. If this charge is neutralised the particles will come nearer to each other to form aggregates (or coagulate) and settle down under the force of gravity. This process of settling down of colloidal particles is called coagulation (or) flocculation (or) precipitation.
Coagulation of lyophobic sols can be carried out by
i) Electrophoresis, ii) Boiling, iii) Adding Electrolytes, iv) Prolonged dialysis etc.

Tyndall effect : When light enters a colloidal solution, it is scattered by the large sized colloidal dispersed phase particles. Therefore when light passes through a solution we will be able to see the path of the light as a luminous beam. This is called Tyndall effect.

Question 31.
Explain the phenomenon observed
i) When a beam of light is passed through a colloidal sol.
Answer:
Tyndall effect : When light enters a colloidal solution, it is scattered by the large sized colloidal dispersed phase particles. Therefore when light passes through a solution we will be able to see the path of the light as a luminous beam. This is called Tyndall effect.

This is an optical property exhibited by colloidal solution. This phenomenon is clearly seen with a microscope placed at right angles to the path of light. Colloidal particles become self luminous due to absorption of light. A true solution does not show Tyndall effect.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

ii) An electrolyte, NaCl is added to hydrated ferric oxide.
Answer:
When NaCl solution is added to the colloidal solution of hydrated ferric oxide coagulation takes place (precipitation formed).

The reason is that colloidal particles interact with ions (Na+, Cl) carrying charge opposite to that present on themselves. This causes neutralisation of charges leading to their coagulation.

iii) An electric current is passed through a colloidal solution.
Answer:
Electrophoresis : the existence of charge on colloidal particles is confirmed by electrophoresis experiment.

When electric potential is applied across two platinum electrodes dipping in a colloidal solution, the colloidal particles move towards one or the other electrode. The movement of colloidal particles under an applied emf is called “electrophoresis”.

Positive charged particles move towards the cathode while negative charged particles towards anode.

Question 32.
Describe cottrell smoke precipitator with a neat diagram.
Answer:
Aerial pollution by colloidal particles of smoke be prevented by electrical precipitation of smoke. Smoke is a colloidal solution of solid particles such as carbon, arsenic compounds, dust, etc., in air. The smoke, before it comes out from the chimney, is led through a precipitator containing plates having a charge opposite to that carried by smoke particles. The particles on coming in contact with these plates lose their charge and get precipitated. The particles thus settle down on the. floor of the chamber. The precipitator is called conttrels precipitator.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 32

Question 33.
Among NaCl, Na2SO4, Na3PO4 electrolytes, which is more effective for coagulation of hydrated ferric oxide sol and why ?
Answer:
Among NaCl, Na2SO4, Na3PO4 electrolytes, Na3PO4 is more effective for coagulation of hydrated ferric oxide sol. This is explained by Hardy-Schulze rule.
Greater the valence of the coagulating ion added, the greater is its power to cause coagulation. This is known as Hardy-Schulze rule.

Coagulating ability order of the anions in the above salts is
PO4-3 > SO4-2 > Cl.

Question 34.
Discuss how a lyophilic colloids protect a lyophobic colloids.
Answer:
Lyophilic colloids are much stable than lyophobic colloids. A very small amount of electrolyte can precipitate the lyophobic colloids. But their precipitation can be prevented by the addition of small amounts of lyophilic colloids. This lyophilic colloids form a protecting layer around the lyophobic colloids and protect them from precipitation (coagulation). Lyophilic colloids used for. this purpose are called protective colloids.
Ex : Gelatin, gum, starch sols are generally used as protective colloids.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 35.
Discuss the use of colloids in
i) Purification of drinking water ii) Tanning iii) Medicines.
Answer:
i) Purification of drinking water: The water obtained from natural sources often contains suspended impurities. Alum is added to such water to coagulate the suspended impurities and make water fit for drinking purposes.

ii) Tanning: Animal skins are colloidal in nature. When a skin, which has positively charged particles, is soaked in tannin, which contains negatively charged colloidal particles, mutual coagulation takes place. This results in the hardening of skin (leather). This process is termed as tanning. Chromium salts are also used in place of tannin.

iii) Medicines : Most of the medicines are colloidal in nature. For example argyrol is a silver sol used as an eye lotion. Colloidal antimony is used in curing kalaazar. Colloidal gold is used as intramuscular injection. Milk of magnesia, an emulsion, is used for stomach disorders. Colloidal medicines are more effective because they have large surface area and are therefore easily assimilated.

Question 36.
Define Gold Number.
Answer:
The capacity of the lyophilic colloid in protecting a lyophobic colloid is measured in terms of Gold Number, introduced by “Zigmondy”.

Gold Number:” It is the number of milligrams of lyophilic colloid that is to be added to 10 ml of standard gold sol to prevent its precipitation by the addition of 1ml of a 10% sodium chloride solution”.
Lesser in the gold number the greater is the protecting capacity. Gold number of a few colloids are given below.
Starch = 25 .
Gelatin = 0.005 – 0.01
Albumin =0.1 – 0.2

Question 37.
How do emulsifiers stabilize emulsion ? Name two emulsifiers.
Answer:
Emulsifying agent: The third substance which is added in small amounts to an emulsion to stabilize the emulsion is called emulsifying agent.
—> The emulsifying agent forms an interfacial film between suspended particles and the medium.
Eg : 1) Carbon black stabilizes water in oil type emulsions.
2) Casein and silica stabilize oil in water type emulsions.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Explain the terms absorption, adsorption and sorption. Describe the different types of adsorption.
Answer:
Absorption : The uniform distribution of a substance through out the bulk of the solid substance is known as absorption.
Eg : Chalk stick dipped in ink.

Adsorption : The accumulation (or) concentration of a substance on the surface, rather than in the bulk of solid (or) liquid is known as adsorption.
Eg : Adsorption of gases like O2, H2, Cl2, etc., on charcoal

Sorption : In case of some substances both adsorption and absorption takes place. This phenomenon is called sorption.

Types of adsorption : On the basis of forces present between adsorbate and adsorbent molecules, adsorption classified into two types :
1) Physisorption, 2) Chemisorption.

1) Physisorption: If the forces that are responsible for the adsorption of adsorbate molecules on the surface of the adsorbent are weak vander waal’s for the adsorption is known as physisorption.
Eg : Adsorption of H2, on O2, on charcoal.
Characteristics :

  • It is a weak adsorption.
  • Enthalpy of adsorption is low (20 – 40 KJ / mole).
  • It is reversible and occurs rapidly.
  • It decrease with increase in temperature.
  • It increase with increase in pressure.
  • It is multilayered and not specific.

2) Chemisorption : If the forces that are responsible for the formation of adsorbate molecules on the source of adsorbent are chemical forces, the adsorption is called chemisorption.
Eg : Adsorption of H2 on Ni – metal surface.
Characteristics :

  • It is a strong adsorption. ,
  • Enthalpy of adsorption of high (80 – 240 KJ / mole).
  • It is irreversible and occurs slowly.
  • It increases with increase of temperature and finally decrease.
  • Pressure has no effect on chemisorption.
  • It is unilayered and specific.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 2.
Discuss the characteristics of physical adsorption.
Answer:
Characteristics of physical adsorption :

  • Lack of specificity : Physisorption is not specific. In this adsorption the given surface of adsorbent doesnot show any preference for a particular gas as the forces present are variderwaal’s forces (Universal).
  • Nature of adsorbate : The amount of gas adsorbed by a solid depends on the nature of gas. Easily liquefiable gases are readily adsorbed.
  • The gas with high critical temperature value is easily liquefied and gets readily adsorbed.
  • Reversible Nature : Physical adsorption is reversible and occurs rapidly at low temperatures.
  • Surface area of adsorbent: The extent of adsorption increase with increase in surface area of adsorbent. .
  • Finely divided metals and porous substances having large surface area are good adsorbents.
  • Enthalpy of adsorption : Physisorption is an exothermic process but the enthalpy of adsorption is low (20 – 40 KJ/mole). This is due to the presence of Vander waal’s forces.

Question 3.
Discuss the characteristics of chemisorption. .
Answer:

  1. High specificity: Chemisorption is highly specific and it will only occur if there is some possibility of chemical bonding between adsorbate and adsorbent.
  2. Irreversibility : Chemisorption involves compound formation and is irreversible in nature.
    • Chemisorption is exothermic and increases with increase of temperature.
  3. Surface area : Chemisorption increase with increase of surface area of the adsorbent.
  4. Enthalpy of adsorption : Enthalpy of chemisorption is high (80 – 240 KJ/mole).

Question 4.
Compare and contrast the phenomenon of physisorption and chemisorption.
Answer:
Characterstics of Physical adsorption :
Physisorption: If the forces that are responsible for the adsorption of adsorbate molecules on the surface of the adsorbent are weak vander waal’s for the adsorption is known as physisorption.
Eg : Adsorption of H2 on O2 on charcoal.

  • Lack of specificity : Physisorption is not specific. In this adsorption the given surface of adsorbent doesnot show any preference for a particular gas as the forces present are vander waal’s forces (Universal). ‘
  • Nature of adsorbate : The amount of gas adsorbed by a solid depends on the nature of gas.
  • Easily liquefiable gases are readily adsorbed:
    The gas with high critical temperature value is easily liquefied apd gets readily adsorbed.
  • Reversible Nature : Physical adsorption is reversible and occurs rapidly at low temperatures.
  • Surface area of adsorbent: The extent of adsorption increase with increase in surface area of adsorbent.
  • Finely divided metals and porous substances having large surface area are good adsorbents. .
  • Enthalpy of adsorption : Physisorption is an exothermic process but the enthalpy of adsorption is low (20 – 40 KJ/mole). This is due to the presence of Vander waal’s forces.

2) Chemisorption : If the forces that are responsible for the formation of adsorbate molecules on the source of adsorbent are chemical forces, the adsorption is called chemisorption.
Eg : Adsorption of H2 on Ni – metal surface.

  1. High specificity: Chemisorption is highly specific and it will only occur if there is some possibility of chemical bonding between adsorbate and adsorbent.
  2.  Irreversibility : Chemisorption involves compound formation and is irreversible in nature.
    • Chemisorption is exothermic and increases with increase of temperature.. ,
  3. Surface area : Chemisorption increase with increase of surface area of the adsorbent.
  4. Enthalpy of adsorption : Enthalpy of chemisorption is high (80 – 240 KJ/mole).

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 5.
What is an adsorption isotherm ? Discuss the phenomenon of adsorption of gases on solids with the help of Freundlich adsorption isotherm.
Answer:
Adsorption Isotherm : The variation in the amount of gas adsorbed by the adsorbent with pressure at constant temperature can be expressed by means of a curve known as adsorption Isotherm.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 33

  • Freundlich adsorption isotherm equation is
    [latex]\frac{\mathrm{x}}{\mathrm{m}}[/latex] = k, P1/n
    x = mass of the gas adsorbed
    m = mass of the adsorbent
    P, k and n are constants.
  • k and n depend on the nature of the adsorbent and the gas at a particular temperature.
  • The relation ship is generally represented in the form of a curve where x/m is plotted against pressure.
  • These curves indicate that at a fixed pressure there is a decrease in physical adsorption with rise of temperature.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 34
    [latex]\frac{\mathrm{x}}{\mathrm{m}}[/latex] = k.P1/4
    Applying logarithm
    Log [latex]\frac{\mathrm{x}}{\mathrm{m}}[/latex] = log k + [latex]\frac{\mathrm{1}}{\mathrm{n}}[/latex] log p.
  • The validity of Freundlich isotherm can be verified by plotting log [latex]\frac{\mathrm{x}}{\mathrm{m}}[/latex] on y-axis and log P on x-axis. If it is a straight line then the isotherm is valid.
  • The slope of the straight line give the value of [latex]\frac{\mathrm{1}}{\mathrm{n}}[/latex]
  • The intercept on the y-axis gives the value of log k.

Question 6.
Give a detailed account of applications of adsorption.
Answer:
Applications of adsorption : The phenomenon of adsorption funds a number of applications. Important ones are listed here.

  1. Production of high vacuum: The traces of air still remaining in the vessel evacuated by a vacuum pump to give high vacuum can be adsorbed by charcoal.
  2. Gas masks : Gas mask, a device which consists of activated charcoal or mixture of adsorbents is usually used by coal miners to adsorb poisonous gases during breathing.
  3. Control of humidity : Silica gel and alumina gel are used as adsorbents for removing mixture and controlling humidity of air in rooms.
  4. Removal of colouring matter from solutions : Animal charcoal removes colours of impure coloured solutions by adsorbing impurities responsible for the colour.
  5. Separation of inert gases : Due to the difference in degree of adsorption of gases by charcoal, a mixture of noble gases can be separated by adsorption on coconut charcoal at different temperatures.
  6. In curing diseases : A number of drugs kill germs by getting themselves adsorbed on germs.
  7. Froth floatation process : A low grade sulphide ore is concentrated by separating silica and other earthy matter by this method using pine oil and frothing agent.
  8. Adsorption indicators : Surfaces of certain precipitates such as silver halides have the property of adsorbing some dyes like eosin, fluorescein, etc. and thereby producing a characteristic colour change at the end point in argentometric titrations.
  9. Chromatographic analysis : Chromatographic analysis based on the phenomenon of adsorption finds a number of applications in analytical and industrial methods.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 7.
What is catalysis ? How is catalysis classified ?* Give four examples for each type of catalysis.
Answer:
Catalysis: A substance which alters the rate of a chemical reaction without itself being consumed in the process, is called a catalyst.
The action of catalyst in altering the rate of a chemical reaction is called catalysis.
Types of catalysis : Catalysis is classified into two types as .
a) Homogeneous catalysis and
b) Heterogeneous catalysis.
Homogeneous catalysis : The catalytic process in which the catalyst is present in the same phase as that of reactants, is known as homogeneous catalysis.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 35
Heterogeneous catalysis: The catalytic process in which the catalyst is present in a phase different from that of reactarts is known as heterogeneous catalysis.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 36

Question 8.
Discuss the mechanism of heterogeneous catalysis.
Answer:
Adsorption theory of heterogeneous catalysis :
Adsorption theory explains the mechanism of heterogeneous catalysis.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 37

  • The modern adsorption theory is the combination of the intermediate compound formation theory and the old adsorption theory.
  • The mechanism of catalysis involves five steps.
  • Diffusion of the reactants to the surface of the catalyst.
  • Adsorption of the reactant molecules on the surface of the catalyst.
  • Occurrence of chemical reaction on the catalyst’s surface through formation of an intermediate.
  • Desorption of reaction products from the catalyst surface, and thereby making the surface available again for more reaction to occur.
  • Diffusion of reaction products away from the catalyst’s surface.

Question 9.
What are enzymes ? Explain in detail the enzyme catalysis, with necessary examples.
Answer:
Enzymes are complex nitrogenous organic compounds which are produced by living plants and animals.

  • These act as specific catalysts in biological reactions.
  • These catalyse the numerous reactions that occur in the bodies of animals and plants to maintain the life process.
    Mechanism of enzyme catalysis :
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 38
    The enzyme – catalysed reactions may be considered to proceed in two steps.
    Step 1 : Binding of substrate to enzyme to form an activated complex (ES)
    E + S → ES
    Step 2 : Decomposition of the activated complex to form product.
    ES → E + P

Factors influencing the catalytic activity of enzymes :

  • Highly specific nature: One catalyst catalyses only one reaction. Each enzyme is specific for a given reaction.
    Eg : The enzyme urease catalyses the hydrolysis of urea only and not any other amide
  • Highly active under optinum temperature: The rate of an enzyme reaction is maximum at a temperature called optimum temperature.
  • The optimum temperature range for enzymatic activity is 298 – 310 K.
  •  Highly active under optimum pH : The rate of an enzyme – catalysed reaction is maximum at a particular pH called optimum pH which lies between 5-7
  •  Increasing activity in presence of activators and co-enzymes : The enzymatic activity is increased in presence of co-enzymes (or) in presence of activators such as Na+, Mn+2 etc.,
  • Influence of inhibitors and poisons: The inhibitors (or) poisons interact with the active functional groups on the enzyme surface and reduce or completely destroy the catalytic activity.
    i) Inversion of Cane sugar: Enzyme : Invertase
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 39

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 10 & 11.
What are colloidal solutions ? How are they classified ? Give examples.
Answer:
A heterogeneous system in which one substance is dispered as large particles in another substance is called colloidal solution.

  • In colloidal solution the particle size of the dispersed phase is of the order of 1 mμ – 1 μ where as in true solution the particle size of the solute are the order of mp or less.
  • Colloidal solution is a heterogeneous binary system where as true solution is a homogeneous binary system.
    On the basis of physical states of dispersed phase and dispersion medium colloidal solutions are classified into eight types.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 40

On the basis of nature of dispersion medium colloids are classified as follows.
If the dispersion medium is ‘air’, the sols are called aerosols.
Eg : Smoke.

If the dispersion medium is ‘water’ the sols are called Hydrosol (or) aquasol.
Eg: starch solution.
If the dispersion medium is ‘alcohol’ then the sols are called alcosols.

The colloidal solution in which the dispersed phase has great affinity to the dispersion medium is called a Lyophilic colloid or Lyophilic solution.
Ex : Starch solution.
The starch paste when dissolved in hot water, with stirring, the starch solution is formed. The starch particles (dispersed phase) has great affinity to water molecules (dispersion medium). So starch solution is a lyophilic solution or lyophilic colloid.

Lyophobic colloid : The colloidal solution in which there exists not much affinity between the dispersed phase and dispersion medium, it is called a Lyophobic colloid or Lyophobic solution. Ex : Gold solution.

Gold rods are placed in water containing alkali. Electric arc is applied between gold rods. The gold particles dissolves in water, to give gold solution.

Gold particles (dispersed phase) have not much affinity towards water (dispersion medium). So this is a Lyophobic solution or Lyophobic colloid.

Question 12.
How are colloids classified on the basis of the nature of interaction between a dispersed phase and a dispersion medium ? Describe an important characteristic of each class. Which of the sols need stabilising agents for preservation ?
Answer:
The colloidal solution in which the dispersed phase has great affinity to the dispersion medium is called a Lyophilic colloid or Lyophilic solution.
Ex : Starch solution.

The starch paste when dissolved in hot water, with stirring, the starch solution is formed. The starch particles (dispersed phase) has great affinity to water molecules (dispersion medium). So starch solution is a lyophilic solution or lyophilic colloid.

Lyophobic colloid : The colloidal solution in which there exists not much affinity between the dispersed phase and dispersion medium, it is called a Lyophobic colloid or Lyophobic solution.
Ex: Gold solution.

Gold rods are placed in water containing alkali. Electric arc is applied between gold rods. The gold particles dissolves in water, to give gold solution.

Gold particles (dispersed phase) have not much affinity towards water (dispersion medium). So this is a Lyophobic solution or Lyophobic colloid.

Lyophilic colloids are much stable than lyophobic colloids. Avery small amount of electrolyte can precipitate the lyophobic colloids. But their precipitation can be prevented by the addition of small amounts of lyophilic colloids. This lyophilic colloids form a protecting layer around the lyophobic colloids and protect them from precipitation (coagulation). Lyophilic colloids used for this purpose are called protective colloids.
Ex : Gelatin, gum, starch sols are generally used as protective colloids.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 13.
What are micelles ? Discuss the mechanism of micelle formation and cleaning action of soap.
Answer:
Micelles : Some substances which at low concentrations behave as normal strong electrolytes, but at high concentrations exhibit colloidal behaviour due to formation of aggregates. The aggregated particles thus formed are called micelles.
Eg : Stearate ions (C17H35COO) associate together in high concentration, in a solution of soap in water and forms a micelle.

Mechanism of micelle formation : Let us take the example of soap solution. Soap is sodium or potassium salt of a higher fatty acid and may be represented as RCOC Na+ (E.g., sodium strearate CH3 (CH2)16 COO Na+, which is a major component of many bar soaps). When dissolved in water, it dissociates into RCOO and Na+ ions. The RCOO ions, however, consist of two parts – a long hydrocarbon chain R (also called non-polar ’tail) which is hydrophobic (water repelling), and a polar group COO(also called polar-ionic ‘head), which is hydrophilic (water loving).
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 41
The RCOO ions are, therefore, present on the surface with their COO groups in water and the hydrocarbon chains (R) staying away from it and remain at the surface. But at critical micelle concentration, the COO irons are pulled into the bulk of the solution and are aggregated to form a spherical shape with their hydro¬carbon chains pointing towards the centre of the sphere with COO- part remaining outward on the surface of the sphere. The aggregate thus formed is known as ‘ionic micelle’. These micelles may contain as many as 100 simple molecules.

Similarly, in case of detergents, E.g., sodium laurylsulphate. CH3 (CH3)11 SO3Na+, the polar group is -SO3along with the long hydrocarbon chain. Hence, the mechanism of micelle formation here also is same as that of soaps.
Soap is sodium stearate, C17H35COONa, in water soap gives the ions stearate anion and sodium ion.
C17H35COONa → C17H35COO + Na+ (Stearate ion)
The anion of soap = C17H35COO
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 42
Cleaning action of soap : Soap anions form a micelle. The grease or dirt of the cloth are absorbed into the interior of the micelle. The tails of the anion are pegged into micelle and these micelle are washed away with the soap solution.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 43
Soap thus, functions as an emulsifying agent for the water dirt emulsion. The emulsified grease or dirt is then washed away with soap solution.

Question 14.
Describe the properties of colloids with necessary diagrams wherever necessary.
Answ:
i) Tyndall effect : When light enters a colloidal solution, it is scattered by the large sized colloidal dispersed phase particles.. Therefore when light passes through a solution we will be able to see the path of the light as a luminous beam. This is called Tyndall effect.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 44
This is an optical property exhibited by colloidal solution. This phenomenon is clearly seen with a microscope placed at right angles to the path of light. Colloidal particles become self luminous due to absorption of light.
A true solution does not show Tyndall effect.

ii) Brownion movement: This is a kinetic property of colloidal solution.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 45
When a colloidal solution is examined by ultramicroscope, the colloidal particles are seem to be moving in a rapid zig-zag motion.
This rapid motion of colloidal particles is called Brownian movement.

This motion is due to unequal bombardment of colloidal particles by molecules of dispersion medium. Smaller the colloidal particles the more rapid is the Brownian movement.

iii) Charge on colloidal particles : The charge on the colloidal particles is due to electron capture by sol particles during electro dispersion of metals and due to preferrential adsorption ions from solution (of) due to formulation of electrical double layer.

When a dilute AgNO3 solution is added to a dilute KI solution taken in excess the precipitated AgI adsorbs I ions present in excess and a negatively charged AgI colloidal solution is formed. However when dilute KI solution is added to dilute AgNO3 solution taken in excess, AgI precipitate adsorbs Ag+ ions present in excess and a positively charged Agl colloidal solution is formed. Generally the ion common to dispersed particle is adsorbed.
AgI/I
Negatively charged
AgI/Ag+
Positively charged.

iv) Zeta Potential: In a colloidal sol the charges of opposite signs on the fixed’and diffused parts of the double layer results in a difference in potential between these layers. The potential difference between the fixed layer and the diffused layer of opposite charge is called electro kinetic potential (or) zeta potential.

v) electrophoresis : When electric potential is applied across two platinum electrodes dipping in a colloidal solution, the colloidal particles move towards one or the other electrode. The movement of colloidal particles under an applied emf is called “electrophoresis”.
If the movement of colloidal particles is arrested by some suitable means, the dispersion medium moves in opposite direction. This phenomenon is termed “electro osmosis”.

vi) Coagulation : The stability of the lyophilic sols is due to the presence of charge on the colloidal particles. If tins charge is neutralised the particles will come nearer to each other to form aggregates (or coagulate) and settle down under the force of gravity. This process of settling down of colloidal particles is called coagulation (or) flocculation (or) precipitation.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 15.
What are emulsions ? How are they classified ? Describe the applications of emulsion. [T.S. Mar. 18, 16]
Answer:
Emulsion: The colloidal system in which a dispersion of finely divided droplets of a liquid in another liquid medium is called Emulsion.
Ex: Milk. .
In Milk, the droplets of liquid fat are dispersed in water. This is an example for oil in water type emulsion.
Classification of emulsions : Emulsions are classified, into two classes. These are
a) oil in water (O/W) and ‘
b) water in oil (W/O), (O = Oil; W = Water).
These emulsions are classified as such depending on which is dispersed phase and which is dispersion medium.

a) Oil in Water (O/W) type emulsions : In this type of emulsions, the dispersed phase is oil and the dispersion medium is water.
Ex : Milk, liquid, fat (oil) in water.
Vanishing cream; fat in water.

b) Water in Oil (W/O) type emulsions : In this type of emulsions, the dispersed phase is water and the dispersion medium is oil.
Ex : Stiff greases : water in lubrication oils
Cod liver oil : water in cod liver oil
Cold cream : water in fat.

Applications of Emulsions : Emulsions are useful

  • In the digestion of fats in intestines.
  •  In washing processes of clothes and crockery.
  •  In the preparation of lotions, creams, ointments in pharmaceutical and cosmetics.
  • In the extraction of metals (froth flotation).
  • In the conversion of cream into butter by churning.
  • To break oil and water emulsions in oil wells.
  • In the preparation of oily type of drugs for easy adsorption to the body.

Intext Questions

Question 1.
Write any two characteristics of Chemisorption. .
Solution:

  1. High specificity: Chemisorption; is highly specific and it will only occur when adsorbent and adsorbate molecules can chemically react with each other.
    Eg.: oxygen is adsorbed on metals by oxide formation.
  2. Surface area : Chemisorption increases with increase in surface area of the adsorbent.

Question 2.
Why does physisorption decrease with the increase of temperature ?
Solution:
Physisorption is an exothermic process :
Solid (Adsorbent) + Gas (Adsorbate) ⇌ Gas adsorbed on solid + Heat
When temperature is increased, the equilibrium shifts towards the backward direction to neutralise the effect of the change (Le-Chatelier’s principle). So, physisorption decreases with increase in temperature.

Question 3.
Why are finely powdered substances more effective adsorbents than their non powdered crystal forms ? .
Solution:
Finally divided substances provide increased surface area for adsorption which is not available to such extent in their crystalline forms. That’s why the powdered forms are more effective than crystalline forms for the purpose of adsorbents.

Question 4.
Hydrogen used in Haber’s process is obtained by reacting methane with steam in presence of NiO as catalyst. The process is known as steam reforming. Why is it necessary to remove CO formed in steam reforming when ammonia is obtained by Haber’s process ?
Solution:
Carbon monoxide (CO) acts as a poison for catalyst iron and promoter molybdenum in Haber’s process, i.e., the efficiency of catalyst and promoter is decreased. It also combines with Fe to form iron carbonyl, Fe(CO)5 which interfere in the production of ammonia. Hence, CO must be removed from the reaction mixture.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry

Question 5.
Why is ester hydrolysis slow in the beginning but is fast after sometime ?
Solution:
The chemical equation for ester hydrolysis is as follows :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 4 Surface Chemistry 46
Carboxylic acid produced during hydrolysis releases H+ ions in the solution which act as catalyst (auto-catalysis) for the reaction. Therefore, ester hydrolysis is slow in the beginning but becomes faster after sometime.

Question 6.
What is role of desorption in the process of adsorption catalysis.
Solution:
The reaction products formed on the catalyst surface get detached from the surface as a result of desorption, thereby making the surface available again for more reactant particles.

Question 7.
What modification can you suggest in the Hardy-Schulze law ?
Solution:
According to Hardy Schulze law, the ions carrying charge opposite to the charge on sol particles neutralise their charge and thus cause their coagulation or precipitation. But actually, the sol carrying these ions also get coagulated since the ions neutralize their charge. So, Hardy Schulze law can be modified as :

“When equimolar proportions of two oppositely charged sols are mixed, they mutually neutralize their charge and both get coagulated”.

Question 8.
Why is it essential to wash the precipitate in gravimetric chemical analysis with wash liquid before drying and weighing it quantitatively ?
Solution:
Some of the reactant ions my be adsorbed or may adhere to the surface of the particles of the precipitate formed during an ionic reaction. In order to remove these reactant ions, the precipitate should.be washed with water. If this is not done, an error may be produced during quantitative analysis.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 3(b) Chemical Kinetics Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define the speed or rate of a reaction.
Answer:
The change in the concentration of a reactant (or) product in unit time is called the speed or rate of a reaction.
(or)
The decrease in the concentration of a reactant (or) increases in the concentration of product per unit time.

Question 2.
Assuming that the volume of the system is constant, derive the expression for the average rate of the system R → P in terms of R and R [time = ‘t’ sec] [R = reactant, P = product].
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 1

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 3.
What are the units of rate of reaction ?
Answer:
Units of rate of reaction – moles/Lit × sec – moles. Lit-1 . sec-1

Question 4.
Draw the graphs that relate the concentrations .(C) of the reactants and the reaction times (t) and the concentrations of the products (C) and the reaction times (t) in chemical reactions.
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 2

Question 5.
Write the equation for the rate of the reaction.
[latex]5 \mathrm{Br}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{BrO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+6 \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+} \longrightarrow 3 \mathrm{Br}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}+3 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}_{(\text {) }}[/latex]
Answer:
Given reaction is
[latex]5 \mathrm{Br}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+\mathrm{BrO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}+6 \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+} \longrightarrow 3 \mathrm{Br}_{2(\mathrm{aq})}+3 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}_{(\text {) }}[/latex]
Rate of reaction = [latex]=-\frac{1}{5} \frac{\Delta\left[\mathrm{Br}^{-}\right]}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}=\frac{-\Delta\left[\mathrm{BrO}_3^{-}\right]}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}=\frac{-1}{6} \frac{\Delta\left[\mathrm{H}^{+}\right]}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}=\frac{-1}{3} \frac{\Delta\left[\mathrm{Br}_2\right]}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}=\frac{1}{3} \frac{\Delta\left[\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\right]}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}[/latex]

Question 6.
What is rate law ? Illustrate with an example.
Answer:
The equation that describes mathematically the dependence of the rate of a reaction on the concentration terms of the reactions is known as the rate equation (or) rate law.
Eg : 2A + 3B → 3C
Rate, of the given reaction ∝ [A]2 [B]3

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 7.
Mention a reaction for which the exponents of concentration terms are not the same as their stoichiometric coefficients in the rate equation.
Answer:
The following are the reactions for which the exponents of concentration terms are not the same as their stoichiometric coefficients in the rate equation.
CHCl3 + Cl2 → CCl4 + HCl
rate = k[CHCl3] [Cl2]1/2
CH3COOC2H5 + H2O → CH3COOH + C2H5OH
rate = k[CHCOOC2H5] [H2O]1/2

Question 8.
Define Order of a reaction. Illustrate your answer with an example. [T.S. Mar. 15]
Answer:
Order of a reaction : The sum of the powers of the concentration terms of the reactants present in the rate equation is called order of a reaction.
Order of a reaction can be 0, 1, 2, 3, and even a fraction
Eg. : 1) N2O5 → N2O4 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] O2
rate ∝ [N2O5]
∴ It is a first order reaction.

2) 2N2O → 2N2 + O2
rate ∝ [N2O]2
∴ It is 2nd order reaction.

Question 9.
What are elementary reactions ?
Answer:
The reactions taking place in one step are called elementary reactions.

Question 10.
What are complex reactions ? Name one Complex reaction.
Answer:
A sequence of elementary reactions, reactants give the products, the reactions are called complex reactions.
Eg: Oxidation of Ethane to CO2 and H2O passes through a series of intermediate steps in which alcohol, aldehyde and acid are formed.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 11.
Give the units of rate constants for Zero, first order and second order reactions.
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 3

Question 12.
Define molecularity of a reaction. Illustrate with an example.
Answer:
The number of reacting species (atoms, ions or molecules) taking parts in an elementary reaction, which must colloid simultaneously to bring about a chemical reaction is called molecularity of a reaction.
NH4NO2 → N2 + 2H2O (Unimolecular)
2HI → H2 + I2 (Bimolecular)
2NO + O2 → 2NO2 (Trimolecular)

Question 13.
What is rate determining step in a complex reaction ?
Answer:
The overall rate of a reaction is controlled by the slowest step in a reaction is called the rate determining step in a complex reaction.

Question 14.
Give the mechanism for the decomposition reaction of H2O2 in alkaline medium catalysed by I ions.
Answer:
Chemical equation of decomposition of H2O2 in alkaline medium is
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 4
Mechanism:

  • It is a first order reaction w.r.t. both H2O2, I
  • This reaction takes place is two steps
    1. H2O2 + I → H2O + IO
    2. H2O2 + IO → H2O + I + O2

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 15.
Write the equation relating [R], [R]0 and reaction time ‘t’ for a zero order reaction. [R] = concentration of reactant at time ‘t’ and [R]0 = initial concentration of reactant.
Answer:
Zero order reaction Rate constant k = [latex]\frac{[R]_0-[R]}{t}[/latex]
Eg : Decomposition of NH3
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 6
Rate = k [NH3]0 = k
∴ [latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{x}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}[/latex] = k ⇒ ∆x = ∆t × k

Question 16.
Draw the graph that relates the concentration ‘R, of the reactant and ‘t’ the reaction time for a zero Order reaction.
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 5

Question 17.
Give two examples for zero Order reactions. [A.P. Mar. 19]
Answer:
Examples for zero order reactions

  1. AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 6
  2. AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 7

Question 18.
Write the Integrated equation for a first order reaction in terms of [R], [R]0 and ‘t’.
Answer:
[Rl = Concentration of reaction after time ‘t
[R]0 = Initial concentrations of reactant
∴ k = [latex]\frac{2.303}{t} \log \frac{[R]_0}{[R]}[/latex]
This is the integrated Equation for a first order reaction.

Question 19.
Give two examples for gaseous first order reactions. [Mar. 14]
Answer:
The following are the examples for gaseous first order reactions
N2O5(g) → N2O4(g)g + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] O2(g)
SO2Cl2(g) → SO2(g) + Cl2(g)

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 20.
For the reaction A(g) → B(g) + C(g), write the integrated rate equation in terms of total pressure ‘P and the partial pressures pApBpC.
Answer:
Given
A(g) → B(g) + C(g)
p = pA + pB + pC
k = ([latex]\frac{2.303}{t}[/latex]) log ([latex]\frac{\mathrm{p}_0}{\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{A}}}[/latex])
k = ([latex]\frac{2.303}{t}[/latex]) log ([latex]\frac{\mathrm{p}_0}{2 \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{i}}-\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{t}}}[/latex])
p0 = initial pressure
Pi = Total pressure
pA, pB, pC are partial pressures.

Question 21.
What is half-life of a reaction ? Illustrate your answer with an example. .
Answer:
The time required for the initial concentration of the reactants to become half of it’s value during the progress of the reaction is called half life (t1/2) of reaction.
Eg : The radio active of C-14 is exponential with a half life of 5730 years.

Question 22.
Write the equation relating the half-life (t1/2) of a reaction and the rate constant ‘k’ for first order reaction.
Answer:
Half life of first order reaction (t1/2) = [latex]\frac{0.693}{k}[/latex]
k = rate constant

Question 23.
Write the equation useful to calculate half-life (t1/2) values for zero and first order reactions.
Answer:
Half life (t1/2) of zero order reaction
At half life (t1/2) [R] = [latex]\frac{[\mathrm{R}]_0}{2}[/latex]
∴ t1/2 = [latex]\frac{[\mathrm{R}]_0 / 2}{\mathrm{k}}[/latex]
∴ t1/2 = [latex]\frac{\left[\mathrm{R}_0\right]}{2 \mathrm{k}}[/latex]
Half life of a first order reaction
t1/2 = [latex]\frac{0.693}{\mathrm{k}}[/latex]
k = rate constant

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 24.
What are pseudo first order reactions ? Give one example.
Answer:
First order reactions whose molecularity is more than one are called pseudo first order reactions.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 8
Order = 1
molecularity = 2

Question 25.
Write the Arrhenius equation for the rate constant (k) of a reaction.
Answer:
Arrhenius equation is
k = A × e-Ea/RT
k = Rate constant
Ea = activation energy
R = gas constant
T = Temperature (K)

Question 26.
By how many times the rate constant increases for a rise of reaction temperature by 10°C ?
Answer:
For every 10°C rise of temperature rate constant of chemical reactions may be doubled (some times tripled).

Question 27.
Explain the term ‘activation energy’ of a reaction with a suitable diagram.
Answer:
Activation Energy : The energy required to for an intermediate called activated complex (C) during a chemical reaction is called activation energy.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 9

Question 28.
Write the equation which relates the rate constants k1 and k2 at temperatures T1 and T2 of a reaction.
Answer:
[latex]\log \left(\frac{\mathrm{k}_2}{\mathrm{k}_1}\right)=\frac{\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{a}}}{2.303 \mathrm{R}}\left[\frac{1}{\mathrm{~T}_1}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{~T}_2}\right][/latex]
Ea = activation energy; R = Universal gas constant.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 29.
What is collision frequency (Z) of a reaction ? How is rate related to it for the reaction A + B → Products.
Answer:
The number of collisions per second per unit volume of the reaction mixture is called collision frequency (Z). Fora bimolecular elementary reactions.
A + B → products; Rate = ZAB.e – Ea/RT.

Question 30.
Draw the graphs between potential energy – reaction coordinates for catalysed and uncatalysed reactions.
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 10

Question 31.
What is the effect of temperature on the rate constant ?
Answer:
Most of the chemical reactions are accelerated by increase of temperature.

For a chemical reaction with rise of temperature by 10°C the rate constant is nearly doubled k = A.e-Ea/RT

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define average rate of a reaction. How is the rate of reaction expressed in terms of change in the concentration of reactants and products for the following reactions.
1) 2HI(g) → H2(g) + I2(g)
2) Hg(l) + Cl2(g) → HgCl2(g)
3) 5 Br(aq) + [latex]\mathrm{BrO}_{3(\mathrm{aq})}^{-}[/latex] + [latex]6 \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}[/latex] → 3 Br2(aq) + 3 H2O(l)
Answer:
Average rate of a reaction: The change in the concentration of any one of the reactants or products per unit time is called average rate of a reaction.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 11

Question 2.
What is rate equation ? How is it obtained ? Write the rate equations for
1) 2NO(g) + O2 (g) → 2NO2 (g)
2) CHCl3 + Cl2 → CCl4 + HCl
3) CH3COOC2H5 (l) + H2O(l) → CH3COOH (aq) + C2H5OH(aq)
Answer:
The equation that describes mathematically the dependence of the rate of a reaction on the concentration terms of the reactions is known as the rate equation (or) rate law.
Eg, : 2A + 3B → 3C
Rate of the given reaction ∝ [A]2 [B]3
How to obtain: Each concentration term is raised to some power which may or may not be same as the stoichiometric coefficient of the reacting species
i) 2NO(g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g)
[latex]\frac{\Delta[\mathrm{R}]}{\Delta t}[/latex] = k [NO]2 [O2]

ii) CHCl3 + Cl2 → CCl4 + HCl
[latex]\frac{\Delta[\mathrm{R}]}{\Delta t}[/latex] = k [CHCl3] [Cl2]1/2

iii) CH3COOC2H5(l) + H2O(l) → CH3COOH(aq) + C2H5OH(aq)
[latex]\frac{\Delta[\mathrm{R}]}{\Delta t}[/latex] = k [CH3COOC2H5].

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 3.
Define and explain the order of a reaction. How is it obtained experimentally?
Answer:
Order of a reaction :. The sum of the powers of the concentration terms of the reactants
present in the rate equation is called order of a reaction.
Order of a reaction can be 0, 1, 2, 3, and even a fraction
Eg. : 1) N2O5 → N2O4 + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] O2
rate ∝ [N2O5]
∴ It is a first order reaction.

2) 2N2O → 2N2 + O2
rate ∝ [N2O]2
∴ It is 2nd order reaction.

Order of a reaction can be determined experimentally
Half – Time (t1) method : The time required for the initial concentration (a) of the reactant to become half its value (a/2) during the progress of the reaction is called half-time (t1/2) of the reaction.
A general expression for the half life, (t1/2) is given by
t1/2 ∝ [latex]\frac{1}{a^{n-1}}[/latex]
Therefore, for a given reaction two half time values (t’1/2and t”1/2) with initial concentrations a’ and a” respectively are determined experimentally and the order is established from the equation.
[latex]\left(\frac{t_{1 / 2}^{\prime}}{t_{1 / 2}^n}\right)=\left(\frac{a^n}{a^{\prime}}\right)^{n-1}[/latex]
Where ‘n’ is the order of the reaction.

Question 4.
What is “moleculartiy” of a reaction ? How is it different from the ‘order’ of a reaction ? Name one bimolecular and one trimolecular gaseous reactions. [T.S. Mar. 17] [Mar. 14]
Answer:
The number of reacting species (atoms, ions or molecules) taking parts in an elementary reaction, which must colloid simultaneously to bring about a chemical reaction is called molecularity of a reaction.
NH4NO2 → N2 + 2H2O (Unimolecular)
2HI → H2 + I2 (Bimolecular)
2NO + O2 → 2NO2 ( Trimolecular)

  • Molecularity has only integer values (1, 2, 3 )
  • It has nop zero, non fraction values while order has zero, 1, 2, 3 and fractional values.
  • It is determined by reaction mechanism, order is determined experimentally.

Question 5.
Derive the integrated rate equation for a zero order reaction.
Answer:
Zero order reaction is the reaction in which rate of reaction does not depends on the concentration of reactants.
R → P
Rate = [latex]\frac{-\mathrm{d}[\mathrm{R}]}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex] = k [R]°
Rate = [latex]\frac{-\mathrm{d}[\mathrm{R}]}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex]; d[R] = – k. dt
Integrating on both sides
[RJ = -kt + I …………….. (1)
I – Integration constant
At t = 0 → R = [R]0 initial concentration
I = [R]0
Substituting I = [R]0 in the above equation (1)
[R] = – kt + [R]0
k = [latex]\frac{\left[R_0\right]-[R]}{t}[/latex]
This is the integrated rate equation for a zero order reaction.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 6.
Derive an integrated rate equation for a first order reaction.
Answer:
In first order reactions rate depends on only one concentration term.
R → P
Rate = k [R]; -M = – k. dt
Integration on both sides
ln [R] = – kt + I
I = Integration constant
At t = 0, [R] = [R]0 ⇒ ln[R]0 = I
Substituting I = ln [R] in the above equation (1)
ln [R] = – kt + ln [R]0
ln [latex]\frac{[\mathrm{R}]}{\left[\mathrm{R}_0\right]}[/latex] = -kt ………………. (2)
k = [latex]\frac{1}{\mathrm{t}} \ln \frac{\left[\mathrm{R}_0\right]}{[\mathrm{R}]}[/latex]
Taking antilog on both sides of eq. (2)
R = [R]0. e-kt
This is first order rate equation.

Question 7.
Derive an integrated rate equation in terms of total pressure (P) and the partial pressures pA, pB, pC for the gaseous reaction A(g) → B(g) + C(g).
Answer:
Given first order gas phase equations
A(g) → B(g) + C(g)
Let pi be the initial pressure of A and pt the total pressure at time’t’. Integrated rate equation for such a reaction can be derived as
Total pressure pt = pA + pB + pC (pressure units)
pA, pB and pC are the partial pressures of A, B and C, respectively.
If x atm be the decrease in pressure of A at time t and one mole each of B and C is being formed, the increase in pressure of B and C will also be x atm each.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 12
Thus the rate expression for 1st order gaseous phase reaction derived.

Question 8.
What is half-life (t1/2) of a reaction ? Derive the equations for the ‘half-life’ value of zero and first order reactions.
Answer:
The time required for the initial concentration of the reactants to become half of it’s value during the progress of the reaction is called half life (t1/2) of reaction.
Eg : The radio active of C-14 is exponential with a half life of 5730 years.
Half life of zero order reaction :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 13

Question 9.
What is Arrhenius equation ? Derive an equation which describes the effect of rise of temperature (T) on the rate constant (k) of a reaction.
Answer:
The temperature dependence of the rate of reaction can be explained by Arrhenius equation.
k = A.e-Ea/KT
A = Arrhenius factor.
Ea = activation Energy
R = gas constant
T = Temperature. (K)
k = A.e-Ea/KT
ln k = ln A – Ea/RT
2.303 log k = 2.303 log A – Ea/RT
T1, T2 are Temperatures
k1 is rate constant at temperature T1
k2 is rate constant at temperature T2
∴ 2.303 (log k2 – log k1) = [latex]\frac{-\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{a}}}{\mathrm{R}}\left(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~T}_2}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{~T}_1}\right)[/latex]
[latex]\log \frac{\mathrm{k}_2}{\mathrm{k}_1}=\frac{\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{a}}}{2.303 \mathrm{R}}\left[\frac{1}{\mathrm{~T}_1}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{~T}_2}\right][/latex]
The above equation describes the effect of temperature (T) on rate constant (k)

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 10.
Discuss the effect of catalyst on the kinetics of a chemical reaction with a suitable diagram. [T.S. Mar. 15]
Answer:
The substance which increases the rate of reaction without being consumed in the chemical reaction is called a catalyst.
In presence of catalyst the reaction proceeds in a new path which lowers the activation energy.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 14

Question 11.
Describe the salient features of the collision theory of reaction rates of bimolecular reactions. [T.S. Mar. 18, 16; A.P. Mar. 17]
Answer:
Collision theory of reaction rate bimolecular reactions salient features.

  • The reaction molecules are assumed to be hard spheres
  • The reaction is postulated to occur when molecules collide with each other.
  • The number of collisions per second per unit volume of the reaction mixture is known as collision frequency (Z).
  • For a bimolecular elementary reaction
    A + B → products
    Rate = ZAB. e-Ea/RT ; ZAB = collision frequency.
  • All collisions do not lead to product formation.
  • The collisions with sufficient kinetic energy (Threshold energy) are responsible for product formation. These are called as effective collisions.
  • To account for effective collisions a factor p called to probability factor or steric factor is introduced.
    Rate = P ZAB. e-Ea/RT

Question 12.
Explain the terms
a) Activation energy (Ea)
b) Collision frequency (Z) :
c) Probability factor (P) with respect to Arrhenius equation.
Answer:
a) Activation Energy: The energy required to for an intermediate called activated complex (C) during a chemical reaction is called activation energy.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 15
Diagram showing plot of potential energy vs reaction coordinate

b) Collision frequency: The number of collisions per second per unit volume of the reaction mixture is called collision frequency (Z). For a bimolecular elementary reactions
A + B → products
Rate = ZAB. e-Ea/RT

c) Probability factor (P) with respect to Arrhenius equation : To account for effective collisions a factor p called to probability factor or steric factor is introduced.
Rate = P ZAB. e-Ea/RT

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Explain the following terms with suitable examples.
a) Average rate of a reaction
b) Slow and fast reactions
c) Order of a reaction
d) Molecularity of a reaction
e) Activation energy of reaction.
Answer:
a) Average rate of a reaction : The change in the concentration of any one of the reactants or products per unit time is called average rate of a reaction.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 16

b)

  1. Fast Reactions : In case pf ionic compounds reactions takes place fastly i.e., rate is high
    NaCl + AgNO3 → NaNO3 + AgCl
  2. Slow reactions : In case of covalent compounds reactions takes place slowly i.e., rate is low.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 17

c) Order of reaction : The number of reacting species (atoms, ions or molecules) taking parts in an elementary reaction, which must colloid simultaneously to bring about a chemical reaction is called molecularity of a reaction.
NH4NO2 → N2 + 2H2O (Unimolecular)
2HI → H2 + I2 (Bimolecular)
2NO + O2 → 2NO2 (Trimolecular)
Molecularity has only integer values (1, 2, 3 …………..)
It has non zero, non fraction values while order has zero, 1, 2, 3 ……….. and fractional values.
It is determined by reaction mechanism, order is determined experimentally.

d) Molecularity of a reaction: Zero order reaction is the reaction in which rate of reaction does not depends on the concentration of reactants.
R → P
Rate = [latex]\frac{-\mathrm{d}[\mathrm{R}]}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex] = k [R]°
Rate = [latex]\frac{-\mathrm{d}[\mathrm{R}]}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex]; d[R] = – k. dt
Integrating on both sides
[RJ = -kt + I …………….. (1)
I – Integration constant
At t = 0 → R = [R]0 initial concentration
I = [R]0
Substituting I = [R]0 in the above equation (1)
[R] = – kt + [R]0
k = [latex]\frac{\left[R_0\right]-[R]}{t}[/latex]
This is the integrated rate equation for a zero order reaction.

e) Activation energy of reaction: The energy required to for an intermediate called activated complex (C) during a chemical reaction is called activation energy
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 18
Diagram showing plot of potential energy vs reaction co-ordinate

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 2.
Give two examples for each of zero order and first order reactions. Write the equations for the rate of a reaction in terms of concentration changes of reactants and products for the following reactions.
1) A(g) + B(g) → C(g) + D(g)
2) A(g) → B(g) + C(g) 3) A(g) + B(g) – C(g)
Answer:
Examples of zero order reaction :

  1. AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 6
  2. AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 7

Examples of first order reaction :
N2O5(g) → N2O4(g) + [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] O2(g)
SO2Cl2(g) → SO2(g) + Cl2(g)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 19

Question 3.
Discuss the effect of temperature on the rate of a reaction. Derive necessary equations in this context. [T.S. Mar. 15]
Answer:
Most of the chemical reactions are accelerated by increase of temperature.
For a chemical reaction with rise of temperature by 10°C the rate constant is nearly doubled
k = A.e-Ea/RT
The temperature dependence of the rate of reaction can be explained by Arrhenius equation.
k = A.e-Ea/RT
A = Arrhenius factor.
Ea = activation Energy
T = Temperature (°K)
R = gas constant
k = A.e-Ea/RT
In k = ln A – Ea/RT
2.303 log k = 2.303 log A – Ea/RT
T1, T2 are Temperatures
k1 is rate constant at temperature T1
k2 is rate constant at temperature T2
∴ 2.303 (log k2 – log k1) = [latex]\frac{-\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{a}}}{\mathrm{R}}\left(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~T}_2}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{~T}_1}\right)[/latex]
[latex]\log \frac{\mathrm{k}_2}{\mathrm{k}_1}=\frac{\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{a}}}{2.303 \mathrm{R}}\left[\frac{1}{\mathrm{~T}_1}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{~T}_2}\right][/latex]
The above equation describes the effect of temperature (T) on rate constant (k)

Question 4.
Give a detailed account of the collision theory of reaction rates of bimolecular gaseous reactions. [A.P. Mar. 17, 16]
Answer:
Collision theory of reaction rate bimolecular reactions salient features.

  • The reaction molecules are assumed to be hard spheres
  • The reaction is postulated to occur when molecules collide with each other.
  • The number of collisions per second per unit volume of the reaction mixture is known as collision frequency (Z).
  • For a bimolecular elementary reaction
    A + B → products
  • Rate = ZAB.e-Ea/RT; ZAB = collision frequency.
  • All collisions do not lead to product formation.
  • The collisions with Sufficient kinetic energy (Threshold eriergy) are responsible for product formation. These are called as effective collisions.
  • To account for effective collisions a factor p called to probability factor or steric factor is introduced.
    Rate = PZAB.e-Ea/RT
  • The proper orientation of reactant molecular lead to bond formation where as improper orientation makes them back and no product are formed.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 20

In this theory activation energy and proper orientation of the molecules to gather determine the creteria for an effective collision and hence the rate of a chemical reaction.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Problems

Numerical Data Based And Concept Oriented Questions

Question 1.
A reaction is 50% completed in 2 hours and 75% completed in 4 hours. What is the order of the reaction ? [T.S. Mar. 16]
Solution:
Given that a reaction is 50% completed in 2 hrs.
75% completed in 4 hrs.
From the data half life is independent of initial concentration so it is a first order reaction.

Question 2.
A reaction has a half – life of 10 minutes. Calculate the rate constant for the first order reaction. [T.S. Mar. 16]
Solution:
In case of fist order reaction t1/2 = [latex]\frac{0.693}{k}[/latex]
∴ k = [latex]\frac{0.693}{t_{1 / 2}}=\frac{0.693}{10}[/latex] = 0.0693 min-1

Question 3.
In a first order reaction, the concentration of the reactant is reduced from 0.6 mol/L to 0.2 mol/L in 5 min. Calculate the rate constant (k).
Solution:
a = 0.6mol L-1; a – x = 0.2 mol L-1; t = 5 min.
Since it is a first order reaction.
k = [latex]\frac{2.303}{t} \log _{10} \frac{a}{(a-x)}[/latex]
k = [latex]\frac{2.303}{t}[/latex] log [latex]\frac{0.6}{0.2}[/latex] = 0.2197 min-1.

Question 4.
The rate constant for a zero order reaction in A is 0.0030 mol L-1 s-1. How long it will take for the initial concentration of A to fall from 0.10 M to 0.075 M.
Solution:
In case of zero order reaction
k = [latex]\frac{1}{t}[/latex] [[A0] – [A]]
[A]0 = Initial concentration
[A] = concentration after time t
k = 0.0030 mol L-1s-1
[A]0 = 0.10 M
[A] = 0.075 M
0.0030 = [latex]\frac{1}{t}[/latex] [0.10 – 0.075]
t = [latex]\frac{0.025}{0.0030}[/latex] = 8.33 seconds.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 5.
A first order decomposition reaction takes 40 min. for 30% decomposition. Calculate it’s t1/2 value.
Solution:
Given t = 40 min, a = 100
a – x = 100 – 30 = 70
In case of first order reaction
k = [latex]\frac{2.303}{t} \log \frac{a}{(a-x)}[/latex]
k = [latex]\frac{2.303}{40} \log \frac{100}{70}[/latex] = 0.0576 [2.0000 – 1.8451]
= 0.0576 (0.1549) = 8.922 × 10-3
[latex]\mathrm{t}_{\frac{1}{2}}=\frac{0.693}{\mathrm{k}}=\frac{0.693}{8.922 \times 10^{-3}}[/latex] = 77.673 min.

Question 6.
Calculate the half-life of first order réaction whose rate constant is 200 s-1.
Solution:
Half – life period for first order reaction
[latex]\mathrm{t}_{\frac{1}{2}}=\frac{0.693}{\mathrm{k}}[/latex]
[latex]\mathrm{t}_{\frac{1}{2}}=\frac{0.693}{200 \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}[/latex] = 0.346 × 10-2s = 3.46 × 10-3s

Question 7.
The thermal decomposition of HCOOH is a first order reaction. The rate constant is 2.4 × 10-3 s-1 at a certain temperature. Calculate how long will it take for 3/4 of initial quantity of HCOOH to decompose. ‘
Solution:
Given reaction is a first order reaction.
[latex]\mathrm{t}_{\frac{1}{2}}=\frac{0.693}{\mathrm{k}}=\frac{0.693}{2.4 \times 10^{-3}}[/latex]
= 288.75 sec.
To convert into [latex]\frac{3}{4}[/latex] of the original, two half lifes are required.
Time to decompose = 2 × 288.75
= 577.5 sec.
= 5.775 × 102 sec.

Question 8.
The decomposition of a compound is found to follow first order rate law. If it takes 15 minutes for 20% of original material to react, calculate the rate constant.
Solution:
Given t = 15 min., a = 100
a – x = 100 – 20 = 80
k = [latex]\frac{2.303}{t} \log \frac{\mathrm{a}}{\mathrm{a}-\mathrm{x}}[/latex]
k = [latex]\frac{2.303}{15} \log \frac{100}{80}[/latex] = 0.1535 [2.0000 – 1.9031] = 0.1535 × 0.0969
k = 0.0148 min-1.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 9.
In a pseudo first order hydrolysis of ester in water, the following results are obtained
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 21
Calculate the average rate of reaction between the time interval 30 to 60 s.
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 22

Question 10.
The half-life for a first order reaction is 5 × 10-6s. What percentage of the initial reactant will react in 2 hours ?
Solution:
Given t1/2 = 5 × 10-6 sec.
k = [latex]\frac{0.693}{1_{1 / 2}}=\frac{0.693}{5 \times 10^{-6}}[/latex] = 0.1386 × 106 sec-1
k = 0.1386 × 106 sec-1 = 1.386 × 105 sec-1
Here a = 100, t = 2 hrs. = 2 × 60 × 60 sec, (a – x) = ?
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 23

Question 11.
H2O2(aq) decomposes to H2O(l) and O2(g) in a first order reaction w.r.t. H2O2. The rate constant is k = 1.06 × 10-3 min-1. How long it will take 15% of the sample to decompose?
Solution:
k = 1.06 × 10-3 min-1
a = 100 .
a – x = 100 – 15 = 85
k = [latex]\frac{2.303}{t} \log \frac{a}{a-x}[/latex]
1.06 x 10 = [latex]\frac{2.303}{t} \log \frac{100}{85}[/latex]
t = [latex]\frac{2.303}{1.06 \times 10^{-3}} \log \frac{100}{85}[/latex] = 153.4 min

Question 12.
Show that in the case of first order reaction, the time required for 99.9% completion of the reaction is 10 times that required for 50% completion. (log 2 = 0.30 10)
Solution:
t1/2 = [latex]\frac{0.693}{k}[/latex]
For 99.9% → a = 100
a – x = 100 – 99.9 = 0.1
k = [latex]\frac{2.303}{\mathrm{k}} \log \frac{100}{0.1}[/latex]
But k = [latex]\frac{0.693}{\mathrm{t}_{1 / 2}}=\frac{2.303}{0.693}[/latex] × t1/2 log 1000 = 3.33 × t1/2 × 3 = 9.99 × t1/2
t99.9% is 10 times t1/2

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 13.
The rate constant of a reaction is doubled when the temperature is raised from 298 K to 308 K. Calculate the activation energy.
Solution:
Ea = ? k2 = 2k1; T1 = 298 K; T2 = 308 K
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 24

Question 14.
The first order rate constant ‘k’ for the reaction C2H5I(g) → C2H4 (g) + HI(g) at 600 K is 1.60 × 10-5 s-1. The energy of activation is 209 kJ/mol. Calculate ‘k’ at 700 K.
Solution:
k1 = 1.60 × 10-5 s-1
k2 = ?
T1 = 600 K
T2 = 700 K
Ea = 209 kJ mol-1 = 209000 J mol-1
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 25

Question 15.
The activation energy for the reaction 2HI(g) → H2(g) + I2(g) at 581 K is 209.5 kJ/mol. Calculate the fraction of molecules having energy equal to or greater than activation energy. [R = 8.31 JK-1 mol-1] .
Solution:
Fraction of molecules [x] having energy equal to or more than activation energy may be calculated as fallows:
x – n/N = e-Ea/RT
In x = [latex]\frac{-\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{a}}}{\mathrm{RT}}[/latex] or log x = [latex]\frac{-\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{a}}}{2.303 \mathrm{RT}}[/latex]
or log x = -[latex]\frac{209.5 \times 10^3 \mathrm{~J} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}{2.303 \times\left[8.314 \mathrm{JK}^{-1} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}\right] \times 581 \mathrm{~K}}[/latex] = -18.8323
x = Antilog [-18.8324] = Antilog [latex]\overline{19} .1677[/latex] = 1.471 × 10-19
Fraction of molecules = 1.471 × 10-19

Question 16.
For the reaction R → P, the concentration of a reactant changes from 0.03M to 0.02M in 25 minutes. Calculate the average rate of reaction using units seconds.
Solution:
R→ P
0.03M to 0.02 M in 25 minutes.
0.03M – 0.02M in 25 × 60 sec.
Average rate [latex]\frac{0.03-0.02}{25 \times 60}=\frac{0.01}{25 \times 60}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{0.01}{1500}[/latex] = 6.66 × 10-6 ms-1

Question 17.
In a reaction 2A → Products, the concentration of A decreases from 0.5 mol L-1 to 0.4 mol L-1 in 10 minutes. Calculate the rate during this interval.
Solution:
2A → products
0.5 – 0.4 moI lit rate ∝ [A]2
rate = [latex]\frac{-1}{2} \frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex] [A] = [latex]\frac{1}{2}\left[\frac{(0.5-0.4)}{10}\right][/latex] = 0.5 × 10-2
rate = 5 × 10-3 mol Lit-1 min-1

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 18.
For a reaction, A + B → Product : the rate law is given by r = k [A]1/2 [B]2 What is the order of the reaction?
Solution:
A + B → product
r = k [A]1/2 [B]2
Rate of the reaction r = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] + 2 = 2.5

Question 19.
The conversion of molecules X to Y follows second order kinetics. If concentration of X is increased by three times, how will it affect the rate of formation of Y.
Solution:
x → y It is a second order reaction
r ∝ [x]2
If x = 1 r = 1
If x = 3 r = 32 = 9
The rate of formation of y increases by 9 times.

Question 20.
A first order reaction has a rate constant 1.15 × 10-3 s-1. How long will 5g of this reactant take to reduce to 3 g?
Solution:
Rate constant [k] = 1.15 × 10-3 s-1
Initial amount [R]0 = 5g; Final amount [R] = 3g
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 26

Question 21.
Time required to decompose SO2Cl2 to half of its initial amount Is 60 minutes. If the decomposition is a first order reaction, calculate the rate constant of the reaction.
Solution:
For the first order reaction
Rate constant (k) = [latex]\frac{0.693}{60 \mathrm{~min}}=\frac{0.693}{(60 \times 60) \mathrm{s}}[/latex] = 1.925 × 10-4 s-1
k = 1.925 × 10-4 s-1

Question 22.
From the rate expression for the following reactions, determine their order of reaction . and the dimensions of the rate constants.
i) 3NO(g) → N2O(g) Rate = k[NO]2
ii) H2O2 (aq) + 3I (aq) + 2H+ → 2H2O(l) + I3 Rate = k[H2O2] [I]
iii) CH3CHO(g) → CH4 (g) + CO(g) Rate = k[CH3CHO]3/2
iv) C2H5Cl(g) → C2H2 .(g) + HCl(g) Rate = k[C2H5Cl]
Solution:
i) Rate = k [NO]2
order of reaction = 2 .
units (dimensions) of rate constant
[k] = [latex]\frac{\text { Rate }}{[\mathrm{NO}]^2}=\frac{\mathrm{mol} \mathrm{L}^{-1} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}{\left(\mathrm{~mol} \mathrm{~L}^{-1}\right)^2}[/latex] = mol-1 L s-1

ii) Rate = k[H2O2] [I]
order of reaction = 1 + 1 = 2
Dimensions of k = [latex][/latex] = mol-1 L s-1

iii) Rate = k[CH3CHO]3/2
order of reaction = [latex]\frac{3}{2}[/latex]
Dimensions of k = [latex]\frac{\text { Rate }}{\left[\mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{CHO}\right]^{3 / 2}}=\frac{\mathrm{mol} \mathrm{L}^{-1} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}{\left(\mathrm{~mol} \mathrm{~L}^{-1}\right)^{3 / 2}}[/latex] = mol-1/2 L1/2 s-1

iv) Rate = k[C2H5Cl]
order of reaction = 1
Dimensions of k = [latex]\frac{\text { Rate }}{\mathrm{C}_2 \mathrm{H}_5 \mathrm{Cl}}=\frac{\mathrm{mol} \mathrm{L}^{-1} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}{\mathrm{~mol} \mathrm{~L}^{-1}}[/latex] = s-1

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 23.
For the reaction 2A + B → A, B, the rate = K[A] [B]2 with k = 2.0 × 10-6 v mol-2 L2 s-1. Calculate the initial rate of the reaction when [A] = 0.1 mol L-1, [B] = 0.2 mol L-1, Calculate the rate of reaction after [A] is reduced to 0.06 mol L-2.
Solution:
i) Case I:
Rate = k [A] [B]2
= [2.0 × 10-6 mol2 L-2 s-1] × (0.1 mol L-1) × (0.2 mol L-1)2
= 8.0 × mol L-1 s-1

ii) Case II:
Concentration of A at a particular time = 0.06 mol L-1
Amount of A reacted = (0.1 – 0.06) = 0.04 mol L-1
Amount of B reacted = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] × 0.04 mol L-1 = 0.02 mol L-1
Concentration of B at a particular time = [0.2 – 0.02] mol L-1 = 0.18 mol L-1.
Rate = k [A] [B]2
= [2.0 × 10-6 mol-2 L2 s-1] × [0.06 mol L-1] × (0.18 mol L-1)2
= 3.89 × 10-9 mol L-1 s-1.

Question 24.
The decomposition of NH3 on platinum surface is zero order reaction. What are the rates of production of N2 and H2 if k = 2.5 × 10-4 mol-1 Ls-1.
Solution:
For a zero order reaction
rate = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{dx}}{\mathrm{dt}}[/latex] = k.
dx = change in the concentration
dt = difference in time
k = rate constant
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 27
Rate of production of N2 = k = 2.5 × 10-14 mol L-1 s-1
Rate of production of H2 = 3 × 2.5 × 10-14 = 7.5 × 10-14 mol L-1 s-1

Question 25.
The rate expression for the decomposition of dimethyl ether in terms of partial pressures is given as Rate = k (pCH3 O CH3)3/2. If the pressure is measured in bar and time in minutes, then what are the units of rate and rate constant ?
Solution:
Unit of rate = bar min-1
unit of k = [latex]\frac{\text { Rate }}{\left[\left(\mathrm{PCH}_3 \mathrm{OCH}_3\right]^{3 / 2}\right.}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{\text { bar } \min ^{-1}}{[\mathrm{bar}]^{3 / 2}}[/latex] = bar-1/2 min-1

Question 26.
A reaction is second order with respect to a reactant. How is the rate of reaction is affected if the concentration of the reactant is
i) doubled
ii) reduced to half
Solution:
For a reaction A → products
Rate = k[A]2 = ka2
i) When concentration of A is doubled
i.e., [A] = 2a
Rate = k[2a]2 = 4ka2
Rate of reaction becomes 4 times

ii) When concentration of A is reduced to [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] i.e., [A] = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] a
Rate = k [[latex]\frac{a}{2}[/latex]]2 = [latex]\frac{1}{4}[/latex] ka2
Rate of reaction becomes [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] times i.e reduced to one fourth.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 27.
A reaction is first order in A and second order in B.

  1. Write the differential rate equation
  2. How is the rate affected on increasing the concentrations of B there times?
  3.  How is the rate affected when the concentrations of both A and B are doubled ?

Solution:

  1. Rate k [A] [B]2
  2. Rate = k [A] [3B]2 = 9k [A] [B]2 Rate of reaction becomes 9 times
  3. Rate = k [2A] [2B]2 = 8k [A] [B]2 Rate of reaction becomes 8 times

Question 28.
In a reaction between A and B, the initial rate of reaction (ro) was measured for different initial concentrations of A and B as given below:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 28
What is the order of the reaction with respect to A and B ?
Solution:
Rate law states that
Rate = k [A]x [B]y
(Rate)1 = k[0.20]x [0.30]y = 5.07 × 10-5 ………………. (i)
(Rate)2 = k[0.20]x [0.10]y = 5.07 × 10-5 …………….. (ii)
(Rate)3 = k[0.40]x [0.05]y = 1.43 × 10-4 …………… (iii)
Dividing equation (i) by equation (ii)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 29
x log 2 = log 2.82
x = 1.4957 = 1.5
∴ order with respect to A = 1.5
order with respect to B = 0.

Question 29.
The following results have been obtained during the kinetic studies of the reaction: 2A + B → C + D
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 30
Determine the rate law and rate constant for the reaction.
Solution:
Rate law may be expressed. as
Rate = k [A]x [B]y
[Rate]1 = 6.0 × 10-3 = k (0.1)x (0.1)y …………….. (i)
[Rate]2 = 7.2 × 10-2 = k (0.3)x (0.2)x …………….. (ii)
[Rate]3 = 2.88 × 10-1 = k (0.3)x (0.4)x ……………. (iii)
[Rate]4 = 2.40 × 10-2 = k (0.4)x (0.l)x …………….. (iv)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 31
∴ Rate law expression is given by Rate = k [A] [B]2
Rate constant k, can be determined by placing the values of A,B and rate of formation of D.
By taking the values from experimant II.
Rate k[A] [B]2
k = [latex]\frac{\text { Rate }}{[\mathrm{A}][\mathrm{B}]^2}=\frac{7.2 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{~mol} \mathrm{~L}^{-1} \mathrm{~min}^{-1}}{\left(0.3 \mathrm{molL}^{-1}\right)\left(0.2 \mathrm{molL}^{-1}\right)^2}[/latex] = 6.0 mol-2 L2 min-1
∴ k = 6.0 mol-2 L2 min-1

Question 30.
The rate constant for a first order reaction is 60 s-1. How much time will it take to reduce. the initial concentration of the reactant to its 1/ 16th value?
Solution:
For 1st order reaction
t = [latex]\frac{2.303}{k} \log \frac{a}{(a-x)}[/latex] …………….. (i)
Given (a – x) [latex]\frac{a}{16}[/latex], k = 60 s-1
Placing the values in eq. (i)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 32

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 31.
For a first order reaction, show that the time required for 99% completion is twice the time required for completion of 90% of reaction.
Solution:
Case I:
If a = 100; (a – x) = (100 – 99) = 1
For 99% completion of the reaction
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 33
It means that time required for 99% completion of the reaction is twice the time required to complete 90% of the reaction.

Question 32.
Here the decomposition of azoisopropane to hexane and nitrogen at 543 K, the following data are obtained.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 34
Calculate the rate constant.
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 35
Total pressure after time t,
i e., [pt] = [pi – p] + p + p = pi + p
Or p = pt – pi
a = pi [a – x] = pi – p on substituting the values of pi
[a – x] = pi – [pt – pi]
i. e., [a – x] = 2pi – pi
The decomposition reaction is of gaseous nature and the rate constant k can be calculate as :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 36
Average rate constant k = [latex]\frac{(2.17+2.24) \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}{2}[/latex]
k = 2.21 × 10-3 s-1

Question 33.
The following data were obtained during the first order thermal decomposition of SO2C2 at a constant volume.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 37
Calculate the rate of reaction when total pressure is 0.65 atm.
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 38
Total presstce after time t
i.e., pt = pi – p + p + p = pi + p
So, a = pi
a – x = pi – (pt – pi) pi – pt + pi = 2pi – pt
Substitutions of the value of a and (a – x) gives
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 39
b. Calculation of reaction rate when total pressure is 0.65 atm.
PSO2Cl2 = 0.5 – (0.65 – 0.50) = (1 – 0.65) = 0.35atm
k = 2.23 × 10-3 s-1
Rate = k × PSO2Cl2 = (2.23 × 10-3 s-1) × (0.35 atm)
Rate = 7.3 × 10-4 atm s-1

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 34.
The rate constant for the decomposition of hydrocarbons is 2.418 × 10-5 s-1 at 546 K. If the energy of activation is 179.9 kJ/mol. What will be the value of pre-exponential factor ?
Solution:
According to Arrhenius equation,
log k = log A – [latex]\frac{\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{a}}}{2.303 \mathrm{RT}}[/latex]
k = 2.418 × 10-5 s-1
Ea = 179.9 KJ mol-1 or 179900 J mol-1
R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1
T = 546K
log A = log k + [latex]\frac{\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{a}}}{2.303 \mathrm{RT}}[/latex]
= log (2.418 × 10-5 s-1) + [latex]\frac{179900 \mathrm{Jmol}^{-1}}{2.303 \times\left(8.314 \mathrm{Jk}^{-1} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}\right) \times 546 \mathrm{k}}[/latex]
= -4.6184 + 17.21 = 12.5916
A = Antilog 12.5916 = 3.9 × 1012s-1
A = 3.9 × 1012 s-1

Question 35.
Consider a certain reaction A → Products with k = 2.0 × 10-2s-1. Calculate the concentration of A remaining after 100 s If the initial concentration of A is 1.0 mol L-1.
Solution:
For the first order reaction
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 40

Question 36.
Sucrose decomposes in acid solution into glucose and fructose according to the first order rate law, with t[latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] = 3.00 hours. What fraction of sample of sucrose remains 8 after 8 hours?
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 41

Question 37.
The decomposition of hydrocarbon follows the equation K = (4.5 × 1011 s-1) e-28000K/T. Calculate Ea.
Solution:
According to Arrhenius equation
k = Ae-Ea/RT ………………. (i)
According to the available data
k = (4.5 × 10 s-1)e-28000k/T ………………….. (ii)
on comparing both equations
[latex]-\frac{E_{\mathrm{a}}}{\mathrm{RT}}=\frac{-28000 \mathrm{k}}{\mathrm{T}}[/latex]
Ea = (28000 k) × R
= (28000 k) × (8.314 K-1 J mol-1)
= 232792 Jk mol-1
Ea = 232.792 kJ-1 mol-1

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 38.
The rate constant for the first order decomposition of H2O2 is given by the following equation: log k = 14.34 – 1.25 × 104 K/T. Calculate Ea for this reaction and at what temperature will its half-life period be 256 minutes?
Solution:
a) Calculation of activation energy Ea
According to Arrhenius equation; k = Ae-Ea/RT
log k = log A – [latex]\frac{\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{a}}}{2.303 \mathrm{RT}}[/latex] …………………. (i)
log K = 14.34 – [latex]\frac{1.25 \times 10^4 \mathrm{~K}}{\mathrm{~T}}[/latex] …………………. (ii)
on comparing both equations.
[latex]\frac{\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{a}}}{2.303 \mathrm{RT}}=\frac{1.25 \times 10^4 \mathrm{~K}}{\mathrm{~T}}[/latex]
Ea = 1.25 × 104 K × 2.303 × 8.314 (JK-1 mol-1)
= 23.93 × 104 J mol-1 = 239.3 kJ mol-1

b) Calculation of required temperature
If t1/2 = 256 min. for 1st order reaction;
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 42

Question 39.
The decomposition of A into product has value of k as 4.5 × 103 s-1 at 10°C and energy of activation 60 kJ mol-1. At what temperature would k be 1.5 × 104 s-1?
Solution:
According to Arrhenius equation
[latex]\log \frac{\mathrm{k}_2}{\mathrm{k}_1}=\frac{\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{a}}}{2.303 \mathrm{R}} \times \frac{\mathrm{T}_2-\mathrm{T}_1}{\mathrm{~T}_1 \mathrm{~T}_2}[/latex]
k1 = 4.5 × 103 s-1
k2 = 1.5 × 104 s-1
T1 = 10°C = 283 K
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 43
T2 = 297.19 K = (297.19 – 273.0) = 24.19°C
Temperature = 24.19°C

Question 40.
The time required for 10% completion of a first order reaction at 298 K is equal to that required for its 25% completion at 308 K. If the value of A is 4 × 1010 s-1. calculate k at 318K andE .
Solution:
Calculation of activation energy (Ea)
For 1st order reaction :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 44
According to Arrhenius theory
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 45

b) Calculation of rate constant (k)
According to Arrhenius equation
log k = log A [latex]\frac{-\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{a}}}{2.303 \mathrm{RT}}[/latex]
log k = log (4 × 1010) – [latex]\frac{76640 \mathrm{~J} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}{2.303 \times\left(8.314 \mathrm{~J} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1} \mathrm{~K}^{-1}\right) \times(318 \mathrm{~K})}[/latex]
log k = 10.6021 – 12.5870 = – 1.9849
k = Antilog (-1.9849) = Antilog [latex](\overline{2} .0151)[/latex] = 1.035 × 10-2 s-1
Ea = 76.640 kJ mol-1
k = 1.035 × 10-2 s-1

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 41.
The rate of a reaction quadruples when the temperature changes from 293 K to 313K. Calculate the energy of activation of the reaction assuming that it does not change with temperature.
Solution:
According to Arrhenius equation
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 46

Textual Examples

Question 1.
From the concentrations of C4H9Cl (butyl chloride) at different times given below, calculate the average rate of the reaction :
C4H9Cl + H2O → C4H9OH + HCl
during different intervals of time.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 47
Solution:
We can determine the difference in concentration over different intervals of time and thus determine the average rate by dividing ∆ [R] by ∆t
Average rates of hydrolysis of butyl chloride
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 48

Question 2.
The decomposition of N2O5 in CCl4 at 318K has been studied by monitoring the concentration of N2O5 in the solution. Initially the concentration of N2O5 is 2.33 mol L-1 and after 184 minutes, it is reduced to 2.08 mol L-1. The reaction takes place according to the equation
2 N2O5 (g) → 4 NO2 (g) + O2 (g)
Calculate the average rate of this reaction in terms of hours, minutres and seconds. What is the rate of production of NO2 during this period?
Solution:
Average Rate = [latex]\frac{1}{2}\left\{-\frac{\Delta\left[\mathrm{N}_2 \mathrm{O}_5\right]}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}\right\}=-\frac{1}{2}\left[\frac{(2.08-2.33) \mathrm{mol} \mathrm{L}^{-1}}{184 \mathrm{~min}}\right][/latex]
= 6.79 × 10-4 mol L-1/min
= (6.79 × 10-4 mol L-1 min-1) × (60 min / 1h)
=4.07 × 10-2 mol L-1/h .
= 6.79 × 10-4 mol L-1 × 1mm / 60s = 1.13 × 10-5 mol L-1s-1
It may be remembered that
Rate = [latex]\frac{1}{4}\left\{\frac{\Delta\left[\mathrm{NO}_2\right]}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}\right\}[/latex]
[latex]\frac{\Delta\left[\mathrm{NO}_2\right]}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}[/latex] = 6.79 × 10-4 × 4 mol L-1 min-1
= 2.72 × 10-3 mol L-1 min-1

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 3.
Calculate the overall order of a reaction which has the rate expression
a) Rate = k [A]1/2 [B]3/2
b) Rate = k [A]3/2 [B]-1
Solution:
a) Rate = k [A]x [B]y
order = x + y
So order = 1/2 + 3/2 = 2, i.e., second order

b) order = 3/2 + (- 1) = 1/2, i.e., half order.
A balanced chemical equation never gives us a true picture of how a reaction takes place since rarely a reaction gets completed in one step. The reactions taking place in one step are called elementary reactions. If a sequence of elementary reactions (called mechanism), reactants give in the products, the reactions are called complex reactions. These may be consecutive reactions (e.g., oxidation of ethane to CO2 and H2O passes through a series of intermediate steps in which alcohol, aldehyde and acid are formed), reversible reactions and parallel reactions (e.g., nitration of phenol yields o-nitrophenol and p-nitrophenol).

Question 4.
Identify the reaction order from each of the following rate constants.

  1. k = 2.3 × 10-5 L mol-1 s-1
  2. k = 3 × 10-4 s-1

Solution:

  1. The unit of second order rate constant is L mol-1 s-1, therefore k = 2.3 × 10-5 L mol-1 s-1represents a second order reaction.
  2. The unit of a first order rate constant is s-1 therefore k = 3 × 10-4 s-1 represents a first order reaction.

Question 5.
The initial concentration of N2O5 in the following first order reaction
N2O5(g) → 2 NO2(g) + [latex]\frac{1}{2 \mathrm{O}_2}[/latex] (g) was 124 × 10-2 mol L-1 at 318 K. The concentration of N2O5 after 60 minutes was 0.20 × 10-2 mol L-1 . Calculate the rate constant of the reaction at 318 K.
Solution:
For a first order reaction
[latex]\log \frac{[\mathrm{R}]_1}{[\mathrm{R}]_2}=\frac{\mathrm{k}\left(\mathrm{t}_2-\mathrm{t}_1\right)}{2.303}[/latex]
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 49
k = 0.0304 min-1.

Question 6.
The following data were obtained during the first order thermal decomposition of N2O5 (g) at constant volume:
2N2O5 (g) → 22 O4 (g) + O2 (g)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 50
Calculate the rate constant.
Solution:
Let the pressure of N2O5 (g) decrease by 2x atm. As two moles of N2O5 decompose to give two moles of N2O4 (g) and one mole of O2 (g), the pressure of N2O4 (g) increases by 2x atm and that of O2 (g) increases by x atm.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 51

Question 7.
A first order reaction is found to have a rate constant, k = 5.5 × 10-14 s-1. Find the half¬life of the reaction.
Solution:
Half-life for a first order reaction is
t1/2 = [latex]\frac{0.693}{k}[/latex]
t1/2 = [latex]\frac{0.693}{5.5 \times 10^{-14} \mathrm{~S}^{-1}}[/latex] = 1.26 × 1013 s

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 8.
Show that in a first order reaction, time required for completion of 99.9% is 10 times of half-life (t1/2) of the reaction.
Solution:
When reaction is completed 99.9%, [R]n = [R]0 – 0.999 [R]0
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 52

Question 9.
Hydrolysis of methyl acetate in aqueous solution has been studied by titrating the liberated acetic acid against sodium hydroxide. The concentration of the ester at different times is given below.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 53
Show that it follows a pseudo first order reaction, as the concentration of water remains nearly constant (55 mol L-1), during the course of the reaction. What is the value of k’ in this equation ?
Rate = k’ [CH3 COOCH3] [H2O]
Solution:
For pseudo first order reaction, the reaction should be first order with respect to ester when [H2O] is constant. The rate constant k for pseudo first order reaction is
k = [latex]\frac{2.303}{t} \log \frac{C_0}{C}[/latex] where k = k’ [H2O]
From the above data we note
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 54
It can be seen that k’ [H2O] is constant and equal to 2.004 × 10-3 min-1 and hence, it is pseudo first order reaction. We can now determine k from
k’ [H2O] = 2.004 × 10-3 min-1
k'[55 mol L-1] = 2.004 × 10-3 min-1
k’ = 3.64 × 10-5 mol-1 L min-1

Question 10.
The rate constants of a reaction at 500 K and 700 K are 0.02s-1 and 0.07s-1 respectively. Calculate the values of Ea and A.
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 55

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 11.
The first order rate constant for the decomposition of ethyl iodide by the reaction.
C2H5I(g) → C2H4 (g) + HI(g) at 600K is 1.60 × 10-5 s-1. It is energy of activation is 209 kj/mol. Calculate the rate constant of the reaction at 700 K.
Solution:
We know that
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 56

Intext Questions

Question 1.
For the reaction, R → P, the concentration of a reactant changes from 0.03 M to 0.02 M in 25 min. Calculate the average rate of reaction using units of time both in minutes and seconds.
Solution:
For the reaction R → P
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics 57

Question 2.
In a reaction, 2A → products, concentration of A decreases from 0.5 mol L-1 to 0.4 to mol L-1 in 10 min. Calculate the rate during this interval.
Solution:
Rate of reaction = rate of disappearance of A
= [latex]-\frac{1}{2} \frac{\Delta[\mathrm{A}]}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}[/latex]
= [latex]-\frac{1}{2} \frac{(0.4-0.5) \mathrm{mol} \mathrm{L}^{-1}}{10 \mathrm{~min}}[/latex]
= 0.005 mol L-1 m-1

Question 3.
For a reaction, A + B → product; the rate law is given by, r = k[A]1/2 [B]2. What is the order of the reaction ?
Solution:
Order of reaction = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] + 2 = [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]
Order = [latex]\frac{5}{2}[/latex]

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(b) Chemical Kinetics

Question 4.
The conversion of molecules X to Y follows second order kinetics. If concentration of x is increased to three times how will it affect the rate of formation of y ?
Solution:
For the reaction x → y
Reaction rate (r) = k[x]2 …………….. (i)
If the concentration of x is increased three times, then
Reaction rate (r’) = k[3x]2 = kx [9x]2 ……….. (ii)
Dividing Eq. (ii) by Eq. (i) .
[latex]\frac{\mathrm{r}^{\prime}}{\mathrm{r}}=\frac{\mathrm{k} \times[9 \mathrm{x}]^2}{\mathrm{k} \times[\mathrm{x}]^2}=9[/latex]
It means that the rate of formation of y will increase by nine times.

Question 5.
What will be the effect of temperature on rate constant ?
Solution:
The rate constant for a reaction is nearly doubled with about 10° rise in temperature. The reason is that the number of effective collision becomes almost double. The exact dependence of the rate of reaction can be given by Arrhenius equation; k = Ae-Ea/RT. Where, A is called the frequency factor and Ea is the activation energy of the reaction.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 3(a) Electro Chemistry Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is a galvanic cell or a voltaic cell? Give one example. [T.S. Mar. 19]
Answer:
Galvanic cell: A device that converts chemical energy into electrical energy by the use of spontaneous redox reaction is called a Galvanic cell (or) voltaic cell.
Eg.: Daniell cell.

Question 2.
Write the Chemical reaction used in the construction of the Daniell cell together with the half-cell reactions.
Answer:
The chemical reactions used in the construction of the Daniell cell.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 1

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 3.
Name the two half-cell reactions that are taking place in the Daniell cell.
Answer:
The two half cell reactions that are takes place in the Daniell cell are oxidation and reduction.
Zn → Zn+2 + 2e (Oxidation)
Cu+2 + 2e → Cu (Reduction)

Question 4.
How is a galvanic cell represented on paper as per IUPAC convention ? Give one example.
Answer:
Representation of a Galvanic cell:
As per IUPAC convention

  • Oxidation half cell represented on the left side.
  • Reduction half cell represented on the right side.
  • Oxidation half cell and reduction half cell are connected by a salt bridge indicated by two vertical parallel lines.
    Eg.: Cu(s) | [latex]\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+2}[/latex] || [latex]\mathrm{Ag}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}[/latex] | Ag(s)

Question 5.
Write the cell reaction taking place in the cell
Cu(s) | [latex]\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+2}[/latex] || [latex]\mathrm{Ag}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}[/latex] | Ag(s)
Answer:
Given cell is Cu(s) | [latex]\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+2}[/latex] || [latex]\mathrm{Ag}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}[/latex] | Ag(s)
Cu → Cu+2 + 2e (Oxidation)
2Ag+ + 2e → 2Ag (Reduction)

Question 6.
What is standard hydrogen electrode ?
Answer:
The electrode whose potential is known as standard electrode (or) standard hydrogen electrode.

To determine the potential of a single electrode experimentally it combine with standard hydrogen electrode and the EMF of cell so constructed is measured with potentiometer.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 7.
Give a neat sketch of standard hydrogen electrode.
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 2
Standard Hydrogen Electrode (SHE)

Question 8.
What is Nernst equation ? Write the equation for an electrode with electrode reaction Mn+(aq) + ne ⇌ M(s).
Answer:
The electrode potential at any concentration measured with respect to standard hydrogen electrode is represented by Nernst equation.
Nernst equation is
E = E0 + [latex]\frac{\mathrm{RT}}{\mathrm{nF}}[/latex] ln[Mn+] [Metal Electrodes]
Given electrode reaction is [latex]\mathrm{M}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{\mathrm{n}+}[/latex] + ne ⇌ M(s)
For the above electrode reaction Nemst equation is
E(Mn+/M) = [latex]\mathrm{E}_{\left(\mathrm{M}^{\mathrm{n}+} / \mathrm{M}\right)}^0+\frac{\mathrm{RT}}{\mathrm{nF}} \ln \left[\mathrm{M}^{\mathrm{n}+}\right][/latex]
Here E(Mn+/M) = Electrode potential
E0E(Mn+/M) = Standard Electrode potential
R = gas constant = 8.314 J/k.mole
F = Faraday = 96487 c/mole
T = temperature
[Mn+] = concentration of species Mn+

Question 9.
A negative E0 indicates that the redox couple is _______________ reducing couple than H+/H2, couple, (powerful or weak)
Answer:
A negative E0 value indicates that the redox couple is powerful reducing couple than H+/H2 couple.

Question 10.
A positive E0 indicates that the redox couple is a weaker _____________ couple than H+/H2 couple. (oxidising or reducing)
Answer:
A positive E0 value indicates that the redox couple is as weaker reducing couple than H+/H2 couple.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 11.
Write the Nernst equation for the EMF of the cell .
Ni(s) |[latex]\mathrm{Ni}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}[/latex] || [latex]\mathrm{Ag}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}[/latex] | Ag
Answer:
Given cell is Ni(s) |[latex]\mathrm{Ni}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}[/latex] || [latex]\mathrm{Ag}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}[/latex] | Ag
Nernst equation for the cell is
Ecell = [latex]\mathrm{E}_{\text {cell }}^0+\frac{\mathrm{RT}}{\mathrm{nF}} \ln \frac{\left[\mathrm{Ag}^{+}\right]}{[\mathrm{Ni}]^{+2}}[/latex]

Question 12.
Write the cell reaction for which Ecell = [latex]\mathrm{E}_{\text {cell }}^0-\frac{\mathrm{RT}}{2 \mathrm{~F}} \ln \frac{\left[\mathrm{Mg}^{2+}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{Ag}^{+}\right]^2}[/latex]
Answer:
Given Ecell = [latex]\mathrm{E}_{\text {cell }}^0-\frac{\mathrm{RT}}{2 \mathrm{~F}} \ln \frac{\left[\mathrm{Mg}^{2+}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{Ag}^{+}\right]^2}[/latex]
The cell reaction is Mg(s)/[latex]\mathrm{Mg}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}[/latex] || [latex]\mathrm{Ag}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}[/latex] | Ag(s)
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 3

Question 13.
How is E0 cell related mathematically to the equilibrium constant Kc of the cell reaction?
Answer:
Relation between E0 cell and equilibrium constant KC of the cell reaction
[latex]\mathrm{E}_{\text {cell }}^0=\frac{2.303 \mathrm{RT}}{\mathrm{nF}}[/latex] log KC
n = number of electrons involved
F = Faraday 96500 C mol-1,
T = Temperature
R = gas constant

Question 14.
How is Gibbs energy (G) related to the cell emf (E) mathematically ?
Answer:
Relation between Gibb’s energy (G) and emf (E) mathematically
∆G0 = -nFE(cell)
∆G = change in Gibb’s energy
n = number of electrons involved
F = Faraday = 96500 C mol-1

Question 15.
Define conductivity of a material. Give its SI units.
Answer:
The reciprocal of specific resistance (or) resistivity is called conductivity.
It is represented by (κ)
(Or)
The conductance of one unit cube of a conductor is also called conductivity.
SI units : ohm-1 m-1 (or) Sm-1 S = Siemen

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 16.
What is cell constant of a conductivity cell ?
Answer:
Resistance R = ρ . [latex]\frac{l}{\mathrm{~A}}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{l}{\kappa \cdot \mathrm{A}}[/latex]
[latex]\frac{l}{\mathrm{~A}}[/latex] = cell constant
Cell constant G = [latex]\frac{l}{\mathrm{~A}}[/latex] = R × κ
The cell constant of a conductivity cell is the product of resistance and specific conductance.

Question 17.
Define molar conductivity ∧m and how is it related to conductivity (κ) ?
Answer:
Molar conductivity: The conductivity of a volume of solution containing one gram molecular weight of the electrolyte placed between two parallel electrodes separated by a distance of unit length of 1 meter is called molar conductivity (∧m).
Relation between conductivity and molar conductivity:
m = [latex]\frac{\kappa}{\mathrm{c}}[/latex];
∴ c = constant

Question 18.
Give the mathematical equation which gives the variation of molar conductivity with ∧m the molarity (c) of the solution ?
Answer:
The mathematical equation which gives the variation of molar conductivity ∧m with the molarity (c) of the solution is
m = [latex]\frac{\kappa}{1000\left(\text { lit } / \mathrm{cm}^3\right) \times \text { molarity (moles/lit) }}=\frac{\kappa \times 1000\left(\mathrm{~cm}^3 / \mathrm{lit}\right)}{\text { molarity (mole/lit) }}[/latex]

Question 19.
State Kohlrausch’s law of independent migration of ions.
Answer:
Kohlrausch’s law of independent migration of ions: The limiting molar conductivity of an electrolytes can be represented as the sum of the individual contributions of the anion and the cation of the electrolytes.
[latex]\lambda_{\mathrm{m}(\mathrm{AB})}^0=\lambda_{\mathrm{A}^{+}}^0+\lambda_{\mathrm{B}^{-}}^0[/latex]
[latex]\lambda_m^0[/latex] = Limiting molar conductivity
[latex]\lambda_A^0[/latex] = Limiting molar conductivity of cation
[latex]\lambda_B^0[/latex] = Limiting molar conductivity of anion

Question 20.
State Faraday’s first law of electrolysis. [A.P. Mar. 18, 16] [Mar. 14]
Answer:
The amount of chemical reaction which occurs at any electrode during electrolysis is proportional to the quantity of current passing through the electrolyte.
(Or)
The mass of the substance deposited at an electrode during the electrolysis of electrolyte is directly proportional to quantity of electricity passed through it.
m ∝ Q; m ∝ c × t
m = ect; m = [latex]\frac{\text { Ect }}{96,500}[/latex]
e = electrochemical equivalent
c = Current in amperes
t = time in seconds
E = Chemical equivalent

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 21.
State Faraday’s second law of electrolysis. [T.S. Mar. 18] [Mar. 14]
Answer:
The amounts of different substances liberated when the same quantity of electricity is passed through the electrolytic solution are proportional to their chemical equivalent weights.
m ∝ E

Qustion 22.
What are the products obtained at the platinum anode and the platinum cathode respectively in the electrolysis of fused or molten NaCl ?
Answer:
In the electrolysis of fused (or) molten NaCl with platinum anode and platinum cathode, sodium metal obtained at cathode and chlorine gas at anode
2 NaCl → 2 Na+ + 2Cl
2 Cl → Cl2 + 2e (anode)
2 Na+ + 2e → 2 Na (cathode)

Question 23.
Give the products obtained at the platinum electrodes (cathode and anode) when aqueous solution of K2SO4 is electrolysed.
Answer:
During the electrolysis of aq.K2SO4 using pt-anode and pt-cathode hydrogen gas liberated at cathode and oxygen gas at anode.
K2SO4 → 2K+ + [latex]\mathrm{SO}_4^{-2}[/latex]
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 4

Question 24.
Write the chemical equation corresponding to the oxidation of H2O(l) at the platinum anode.
Answer:
The chemical equation corresponding to the oxidation of H2O(l) at the platinum anode is
2H2O(l) → O2(g) + 4H+(aq) + 4e

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 25.
Give the chemical equation that represents the reduction of liquid water H2O(l)at the platinum cathode.
Answer:
The chemical equation that represents the reduction of liquid water H2O(l) at the platinum cathode is H2O(l) + e → [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex]H2(g) + OH

Question 26.
What is a primary battery ? Give one example. [A.P. Mar. 17]
Answer:
The batteries which after their use over a period of time, becomes dead and the cell reaction is completed and this cannot be reused again are called primary batteries.
Eg: Leclanche cell, dry cell.

Question 27.
Give one example for a secondary battery. Give the cell reaction.
Answer:
Lead storage battery is an example of secondary battery.
The cell reactions when the battery is in use are
Pb(s) + [latex]\mathrm{SO}_4^{-2} \text { (aq) }[/latex] → PbSO4(s) + 2e (Anode)
PbO2(s) + [latex]\mathrm{SO}_4^{-2} \text { (aq) }[/latex] → [latex]4 \mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}[/latex] + 2e → PbSO4(s) + 2 H2O(l) (Cathode)
Overall cell reaction is .
Pb(s) + PbO2(s) + 2H2SO4(aq) → 2PbSO4(s) + H2O(l)

Question 28.
Give the cell reaction of nickel-cadmium secondary battery.
Answer:
The cell reaction of nickel-cadmium secondary battery is
Cd(s) + 2Ni(OH)3(s) → CdO(s) + 2 Ni(OH)2(s) + H2O(l)

Question 29.
What is a fuel cell ? How is it different from a conventional galvanic cell ?
Answer:
A fuel cell is a galvanic cell in which the chemical energy of fuel-oxidant system is converted directly into electrical energy.

  • Conventional Galvanic cell converts chemical energy into electrical energy by spontaneous redox reactions.
  • Fuel cell convert energy of combustion of fuels like hydrogen, methane etc., into electrical energy. These cause less pollution.

Question 30.
Give the electrode reactions occurijig at the anode and at the cathode in H2, O2, fuel cell.
Answer:
At cathode : O2(g) + 2 H2, O2 + 4e → 4OH(aq)
At anode : 2H2(g) + 4 OH(aq) → 4H2O(l) + 4e
Overall reaction : 2H2(g) + O2(g) → 2H2O(l)

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 31.
What is metallic corrosion ? Give one example. [T.S. Mar. 17; A.P. Mar. 15]
Answer:
Metallic corrosion: The natural tendency of conversion of a metal into its mineral compound form i n interaction with the environment is known as metallic corrosion.
Eg : 1) Iron converts itself into its oxide [Rusting] (Fe2O3)
2) Silver converts itself into it’s sulphate
[tarnishing] [Ag2S]

Question 32.
Give the electro-chemical reaction that represents the corrosion or rusting of iron.
Answer:
Rusting of iron: Iron converts itself into its oxixe Fe2O3
The electrochemical reaction that represents the corrosion or rusting of iron is
Anode : 2 Fe(s) → 2 Fe2+ + 4e [latex]\mathrm{E}_{\left(\mathrm{Fe}^{2+} / \mathrm{Fe}\right)}^0[/latex] = -0.44V
Cathode : O2(g) + 4H+(aq) + 4e → 2H2O(l) [latex]\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{H}^{+} / \mathrm{O}_2 / \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}}^{\Theta}[/latex] = 1.23V
Overall reaction: 2 Fe(s) + O2(g) + 4H+(aq) → 2Fe+2aq + 2 H2O(l) [latex]\mathrm{E}_{\text {(cell) }}^{\Theta}[/latex] = 1.67 V

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What are galvanic cells ? Explain the working of a galvanic cell with a neat sketch taking Daniell cell as example. [T.S. & A.P. Mar. 18]
Answer:
Galvanic cell: A device which converts chemical energy into electrical energy by the use of spontaneous redox reaction is called Galvanic cell (or) voltaic cell.
Eg : Daniell cell.

Daniell cell: It is a special type of galvanic cell. It contains two half cells in the same vessel. The vessel is devided into two chambers. Left chamber is filled with ZnSO4 (aq) solution and Zn – rod is dipped into it. Right chamber is filled with aq. CuSO4 solution and a copper rod is dipped into it. Process diaphragm acts as Salt bridge. The two half cell’s are connected to external battery.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 5
Cell reactions :
Ion Zn/ZnSO4 half cell, oxidation, reaction occurs
Zn → Zn2+ + 2e
Ion Cu/CuSO4 half cell, reduction reaction occurs.
The net cell reaction is
Zn + Cu+2 ⇌ Zn+2 + Cu
Cell is represented as Zn / Zn+2 || Cu+2 / Cu

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 2.
Give the construction and working of a standard hydrogen electrode with a neat diagram.
Answer:
To determine the potential of a single electrode experimentally, it is combined with a standard hydrogen electrode (electrode whose potential is known) and the EMF of the cell. So constructed is measured with a potentiometer. Standard hydrogen electrode is constructed and is used as standard electrode or reference electrode. Standard Hydrogen Electrode (SHE) or Normal Hydrogen Electrode (NHE).

Pure hydrogen gas is bubbled into a solution of 1M HCl along a platinum electrode coated with platinum block. A platinum block electrode placed in the solution at atmospheric pressure.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 6
Generally the electrode is fitted into the tube. The tube will have two circular small holes. This tube is immersed in the acid solution such that one haf of the circular hole is exposed to air and another half in the solution.
The following equilibrium exists at the electrode.
[latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] H2(g) (1atm) ⇌ [latex]\mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}[/latex] (1M) + e

Question 3.
State and explain Nernst equation with the help of a metallic electrode and a non-metallic electrode.
Answer:
The electrode potential at any concentration measured with respect to standard hydrogen electro represented by Nernst equation.
Nernstst equation is
E = E0 + [latex]\frac{\mathrm{RT}}{\mathrm{nF}}[/latex] In [Mn+] [Metal Electrodes]
Given electrode reaction is
[latex]\mathrm{M}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{\mathrm{n}+}[/latex] + ne ⇌ M(s)
For the above electrode reaction Nernst equation is
E(Mn+ / M) = [latex]\mathrm{E}_{\left(\mathrm{M}^{\mathrm{n}+} / \mathrm{M}\right)}^0+\frac{\mathrm{RT}}{\mathrm{nF}} \ln \left[\mathrm{M}^{\mathrm{n}+}\right][/latex]
Here E(Mn+ / M) = Electrode potential
E0(Mn+ / M) = Standard Electrode potential
R = gas constant = 8.314 J/k.mole
F = Faraday = 96487 c/mole
T = temperature
[Mn+] = concentration of species Mn+
For non-metal electrodes :
E = E0 – [latex]\frac{\mathrm{RT}}{\mathrm{nF}}[/latex] ln C ; C = concentration
Example for metal electrode:
Given cell is Ni(s) | [latex]\mathrm{Ni}_{(a q)}^{2+}[/latex] || [latex\mathrm{Ag}_{(a q)}^{+}][/latex] | Ag
Nernst equation for the cell is
Ecell = [latex]\mathrm{E}_{\text {cell }}^0+\frac{\mathrm{RT}}{\mathrm{nF}} \ln \frac{\left[\mathrm{Ag}^{+}\right]}{[\mathrm{Ni}]^{+2}}[/latex]
Example for non-metal electrode: Pt, Cl2/Cl
E = E0 – [latex]\frac{\mathrm{RT}}{\mathrm{nF}}[/latex] log C
E = E0 – [latex]\frac{\mathrm{RT}}{\mathrm{F}}[/latex] log C

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 4.
Explain with a suitable example the relation between the Gibbs energy of chemical reaction (G) and the functioning of the electrochemical cell.
Answer:
Electrical work done in one second in an electrochemical cell is equal to the electrical potential multiplied by the total charge passing. If we want to obtain maximum work from a galvanic cell then the charge has to be passed reversibly. The reversible work done by a galvanic cell is equal to decrease in its Gibbs energy and therefore, if the emf is E and nF is the amount of charge passing and ∆rG = – nFE[cell]
It may be remembered that E[cell] is an intensive parameter but ∆rG is an extensive thermodynamic property and the value depends on n. Thus, if we write the reaction
Zn[s] + [latex]\mathrm{Cu}_{[\mathrm{aq}]}^{2+}[/latex] → [latex]\mathrm{Zn}_{\text {[aq] }}^{2+}[/latex] + Cu[s]
rG = -2FE[cell]
but when we write the reaction
2 Zn[S] + 2 [latex]\mathrm{Cu}_{[\mathrm{aq}]}^{2+}[/latex] → [latex]\mathrm{Zn}_{[\text {aq] }}^{2+}[/latex] + 2 Cu[s]
rG = -4FE[cell]
If the concentration of each of the reacting species is unity, then E[cell] = [latex]\mathrm{E}_{\text {[cell] }}^{\Theta}[/latex] and we have
rG -nF[latex]\mathrm{E}_{\text {[cell] }}^{\Theta}[/latex]
We can calculate equilibrium constant using the equation
rG = – RTln Kc

Question 5.
On what factors the electrical conductance of an aqueous solution of electrolyte depends?
Answer:
The electrical conductance of an aqueous solution of electrolyte depends on

  1. The nature of the electrolyte
  2. Size and solvation of the ions formed in the dissociation of the electrolyte.
  3. The nature and viscosity of the solvent.
  4. Concentration of the electrolyte
  5. Temperature

Question 6.
How is molar conductivity of an aqueous electrolyte solution measured experimentally ?
Answer:
Molar conductivity: The conductivity of a volume of solution containing one gram molecular weight of the electrolyte placed between two parallel electrodes separated by a distance of unit length of 1 meter is called molar conductivity (∧m)
Relation between conductivity and molar conductivity:
m = [latex]\frac{\kappa}{\mathrm{c}}[/latex];
∴ c = constant .
The conductance of a solution measured in a conductivity cell.
By using the conductivity cells
Resistance (R) = [latex]\frac{l}{\kappa \times A}[/latex]
l = distance between electrodes; A = Area of cross section; K = conductivity
G* = [latex]\frac{l}{\mathrm{~A}}[/latex] = cell constant
-4 Cell constant is measured by measuring the resistance of the cell containing a solution whose conductivity is known.
-4 Cell constant determined is used for measuring the resistance (or) conductivity.
∴ molar conductivity ∧(m) = [latex]\frac{\kappa}{\mathrm{c}}[/latex]
(m) = [latex]\frac{\kappa\left(\mathrm{Scm}^{-1}\right)}{1000\left(\mathrm{~L}^{-3}\right) \text { molarity (moles/lit) }}[/latex]

Question 7.
Explain the variation of molar conductivity with the change in the concentration of the electrolyte. Give reasons.
Answer:
Molar conductivity of a solution at a given concentration is the conductance of the volume of solution containing one mole of electrolyte kept between two electrodes with area of cross section A and distance of unit length.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 7
Molar conductivity ∧m = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{\kappa A}}{l}[/latex]
m = κ × V (∵ l = 1, A = V)
V = Volume containing 1 mole of electrolyte
Molar conductivity increase with decrease in concentration of electrolyte (or) increase in dilution. This is due to total volume V of solution containing one mole of electrolyte also increases.

When concentration approaches to zero, the molar conductivity is known as limiting molar conductivity and it is represented by
For strong electrolytes molar conductivity is given by [latex]\wedge_m^0[/latex]
m = [latex]\wedge_m^0[/latex] – Ac1/2
For weak electrolytes limiting’ molar conductivity is given by
λAB+ = λA+ + λB (Kohlrausch law)

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 8.
State and explain Kohlrausch’s law of independent migration of ions. [T.S. Mar. 16; A.P. Mar. 15]
Answer:
Kohlrausch’s law of independent migration of ions: The limiting molar conductivity of an electrolytes can be represented as the sum of the individual contributions of the anion and the cation of the electrolytes.
[latex]\lambda_{\mathrm{m}(\mathrm{AB})}^0=\lambda_{\mathrm{A}^{+}}^0+\lambda_{\mathrm{B}^{-}}^0[/latex]
[latex]\lambda_{\mathrm{m}}^0[/latex] = Limiting molar conductivity
[latex]\lambda_{\mathrm{A}^{+}}^0[/latex] = Limiting molar conductivity of cation
[latex]\lambda_{\mathrm{B}^{-}}^0[/latex] = Limiting molar conductivity of anion

Applications:

  1. Kohlrausch’s law is used in the calculation of the limiting molar conductivity of weak electrolytes.
    Eg : λCH3COOH = λCH3COONa + λHCl – λNaCl
    = λCH3COO + λNa+ + λH+
  2. This law is used in the calculation of degree of dissociation of a weak electrolyte.
  3. This law is used in the calculation of solubility of sparingly soluble salts like AgCl, BaSO4 etc.

Question 9.
What is electrolysis ? Give Faraday’s first law of electrolysis. [A.P. & T.S. Mar. 15]
Answer:
Electrolysis : The decomposition of a chemical compound in the molten state or in the solution state into its constituent elements under the influence of an applied EMF is called electrolysis.
The amount of chemical reaction which occurs at any electrode during electrolysis is proportional to the quantity of current passing through the electrolyte.
(Or)
The mass of the substance deposited at an electrode during the electrolysis of electrolyte is directly proportional to quantity of electricity passed through it.
m ∝ Q; m ∝ c × t
m = ect; m = [latex]\frac{\text { Ect }}{96,500}[/latex]
e = electrochemical equivalent
t = time in seconds
c = Current in amperes
E = Chemical equivalent

Question 10.
What are the products obtained at the cathode and anode during the electrolysis of the following when platinum electrodes are used in the electrolysis
a) Molten KCl
b) Aq. CuSO4 solution
c) Aq. K2SO4 solution
Answer:
a) During the electrolysis of molten KCl using platinum electrodes. Potassium is obtained at cathode and chlorine at anode.
2 KCl → 2K+ + 2Cl
2 Cl → Cl2 + 2e (anode)
2K+ + 2e → 2K (cathode)

b) During the electrolysis of aq.CuS04 solution using platinum electrodes, O2 gas liberated at anode and Cu deposited at cathode.
2 CuSO4 → 2 Cu+2 + 2 SO-24
2 Cu+2 + 4e → 2 Cu (cathode)
2H2O – 4e → O2 + 4H+ (anode)

c) During the electrolysis of aq.k2SO4 using pt-anode and pt-cathode hydrogen gas liberated at cathode and oxygen gas at anode.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 8

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 11.
What are primary and secondary batteries ? Give one example for each.
Answer:
The batteries which after their use over a period of time’ becomes dead and the cell reaction is completed and this cannot be reused again are called primary batteries.
Eg : Leclanche cell, dry cell.

Secondary battery: A secondary battery is the battery in which after it’s use can be recharged and can be used again.
A good secondary battery undergoes large no. of discharging and charging cycles.
Lead storage battery is an example of secondary battery. ,
The cell reactions when the battery is in use are
Pb(s) + [latex]\mathrm{SO}_4^{-2}(\mathrm{aq})[/latex] → PbSO4(s) + 2e (Anode)
PbO2(s) + [latex]\mathrm{SO}_4^{-2}(\mathrm{aq})[/latex] → [latex]4 \mathrm{H}_{\text {(aq) }}^{+}[/latex] + 2e → PbSO4(s) + 2 H2O(l) (Cathode)
Overall cell reaction is
Pb(s) + PbO2(s) + 2H2SO4(aq) → 2PbSO4(aq) + 2H2O(l)

Question 12.
What are the fuel cells ? How are they different from galvanic cells ? Give the construction of H2, O2 fuel cell? [T.S. Mar. 17]
Answer:
A fuel cell is a galvanic cell in which the chemical energy of fuel-oxidant system is converted directly into electrical energy.

  • Conventional Galvanic cell converts chemical energy into electrical energy by spontaneous redox reactions.
  • Fuel cell convert energy of combustion of fuels like hydrogen, methane etc., into electrical energy. These cause less pollution.

H2 – O2 fuel cell: In this cell, hydrogen and oxygen are bubbled through porous carbon electrodes into Cone. NaOH solution. Electrodes are embedded with suitable catalysts. The electrode reactions are:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 9
Overall reaction : 2H2(g) + O2(g) → 2 H2O(l)
The cell functions as long as the reacting gases are in supply. The heat of combustion is directly converted into electrical energy.

Question 13.
What is metallic corrosion ? Explain it with respect to iron corrosion.
Answer:
Metallic corrosion: The natural tendency of conversion of a metal into its mineral compound form on interaction with the environment is known as metallic corrosion.
Eg.: 1) Iron converts itself into its oxide [Rusting] (Fe2O3)
2) Silver converts itself into it’s sulphate [tarnishing] [Ag2S]
Rusting of iron : Iron converts it self into its oxixe Fe2O3
The electrochemical reaction that represents the corrosion or rusting-of iron is
Anode : 2 Fe(s) → 2 Fe2+ + 4e [latex]\mathrm{E}_{\left(\mathrm{Fe}^{2+} / \mathrm{Fe}\right)}^0[/latex] = -0.44 V
Cathode : O2(g) + [latex]4 \mathrm{H}_{\text {(aq) }}^{+}[/latex] + 4e → 22O(l) [latex\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{H}^{+} / \mathrm{O}_2 / \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}}^{\ominus}][/latex] = 1.23 V
Overall reaction : 2 Fe(s) + O2(g) + [latex]4 \mathrm{H}_{\text {(aq) }}^{+}[/latex] → [latex]2 \mathrm{Fe}_{\mathrm{aq}}^{+2}[/latex] + 2 H2O(l) [latex]\mathrm{E}_{(\text {cell) }}^{\Theta}[/latex] = 1.67 V

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
What are electro chemical cells ? How are they constructed ? Explain the working of the different types of galvanic cells ?
Answer:
Electrochemical cell is a device which makes use of a spontaneous redox reaction for the generation of electrical energy.
Eg : Galvanic cell, Daniell cell etc.
Galvanic cell: A device which converts chemical energy into electrical energy by the use of spontaneous redox reaction is called Galvanic cell (or) voltaic cell.
Eg : Daniell cell.

Daniell cell: It is a special type of galvanic cell. It contains two half cells in the same vessel.
The vessel is devided into two chambers. Left chamber is filled with ZnSO4 (aq) solution and Zn – rod is dipped into it, Right chamber is filled with aq. CuSO4 solution and a copper rod is dipped into it. Process diaphragm acts as Salt bridge. The two half cell’s are connected to external battery.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 10
Cell reactions :
Ion Zn/ZnSO4 half cell, oxidation, reaction occurs
Zn → Zn2+ + 2e
Ion Cu/CuSO4 half cell, reduction reaction occurs.
Cu+2 + 2e → Cu
The net cell reaction is
Zn + Cu+2 ⇌ Zn+2 + Cu
Cell is represented as Zn / Zn+2 // Cu2+ / Cu

  • The two vertical lines (||) represents a salt bridge.
  • It is U shaped tube filled with KCl and agar agar gel salt bridge maintains the electrical neutrality and flow of current.

The batteries which after their use over a period of time, becomes dead and the cell reaction is completed and this cannot be reused again are called primary batteries.
Eg : Leclanche cell, dry cell.

Secondary battery: A secondary battery is the battery in which after it’s use can be recharged and can be used again.
A good secondary battery undergoes large no. of discharging and charging cycles.
Lead storage battery is an example of secondaiy battery.
The cell reactions when the battery is in use are
Pb(s) + [latex]\mathrm{SO}_4^{-2}(\mathrm{aq})[/latex] → PbSO4(s) + 2e (Anode)
PbO2(s) + [latex]\mathrm{SO}_4^{-2}(\mathrm{aq})[/latex] → [latex]4 \mathrm{H}_{\text {(aq) }}^{+}[/latex] + 2e → PbSO4(s) + 2 H2O(l) (Cathode)
Overall cell reaction is
Pb(s) + PbO2(s) + 2H2SO4(aq) → 2PbSO4(aq) + 2H2O(l)
In batteries also the principle involved same as in the galvanic cell.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 2.
What is electrical conductace of a solution? How ¡s it measured experimentally?
Answer:
The reciprocal of resistance (R) is known as conductance (c)
[latex]\frac{l}{\mathrm{R}}=\kappa \times \frac{1}{l / \mathrm{A}}[/latex]
c = [latex]\kappa \times \frac{1}{l / \mathrm{A}}[/latex]
The conductance or the current conducting capacity of an electrolytic solution can be expressed as .

  1. Specific conductance (κ),
  2. Molar conductivity (∧m)

1. Specific conductance : The conductance of the solution enclosed between two parallel electrodes of unit area of cross section separated by unit distance is called specific conductance (κ).

2. Molar conductivity (∧m) : The conductivity of a volume of solution containing one gram molecular weight of the electrolyte placed between two parallel electrodes separated by a distance of unit length of 1 meter is called molar conductivity (∧m)
Relation between conductivity and molar conductivity :
m = [latex]\frac{\kappa}{\mathrm{c}}[/latex]; ∴ c = constant
Measurement of electrical conductance :

  • The resistance of a metallic wire can be measured with a Wheatstone bridge.
  •  In measuring the resistance of an electrolytic solution two problems are identified.
    1. On passing direct current (DC) through the solution changes the composition of the solution due to electrolysis.
    2. A solution cannot be connected to the measuring bridge like a metallic wire.
  • First problem solved by using AC instead of DC. .
  • Second problem solved by using specially designed vessel called conductivity cell.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 11
    By using above cells,
    Resistance R = [latex]\frac{l}{\kappa \times \mathrm{A}}[/latex]
    l = distance between electrodes; A = Area of cross section; κ = conductivity
    [latex]\frac{l}{\mathrm{~A}}[/latex] = cell constant = G*
    ∴ G* = [latex]\frac{l}{\mathrm{~A}}[/latex] = R × κ
    The cell constant (G*) is determined by measuring the resistance of the cell containing a solution whose conductivity is already known
  • Cell constant once determined, used for measuring the resistance (or) conductivity.
  • The set up for the measurement of the resistance is shown in following figure.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 12

Question 3.
Give the applications of Kohlrausch’s law of independent migration of ions. [T.S. Mar. 16]
Answer:
Kohlrausch’s law of independent migration of ions: The limiting molar conductivity of an electrolytes can be represented as the sum of the individual contributions of the anion and the cation of the electrolytes.
[latex]\lambda_{\mathrm{m}(\mathrm{AB})}^0=\lambda_{\mathrm{A}^{+}}^0+\lambda_{\mathrm{B}^{-}}^0[/latex]
[latex]\lambda_{\mathrm{m}}^0[/latex] = Limiting molar conductivity
[latex]\lambda_{\mathrm{A}^{+}}^0[/latex] = Limiting molar conductivity of cation
[latex]\lambda_{\mathrm{B}^{-}}^0[/latex] = Limiting molar conductivity of anion

Applications:
1) Calculation of limiting molar conductance at infinite dilution (∧) of weak electrolytes :
Limiting molar conductance of weak electrolytes at infinite dilution- cannot be obtained graphically by extrapolation method. However the application of Kohlrausch’s law enables indirect evaluations in such cases.

Eg: Limiting molar conductance of acetic acid at infinite dilution can be calculated from the limiting molar conductances at infinite dilution of hydrochloric acid, sodium chloride and sodium acetate, as illustrated below:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 13

2) Calculation of degree of dissociation of a weak electrolyte :
Degree of dissociation (α) = [latex]\frac{\lambda_{\mathrm{v}}}{\lambda_{\infty}}[/latex]
Where λv = Limiting molar conductivity at a given concentration or dilution.
λ = Limiting molar conductivity of given electrolyte at infinite dilution.

3) Calculation of the solubility (s) of sparingly soluble salts like AgCl, BaSO4 etc.
S = [latex]\frac{\kappa \times 1000}{\wedge_{\infty}}[/latex]
where K = specific conductance
= Limiting molar conductance at infinite dilution.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 4.
Give the different types of batteries and explain the construction and working of each type of battery. [A.P. Mar. 19]
Answer:
The batteries which after their use over a period of time, becomes dead and the cell reaction is completed and this cannot be reused again are called primary batteries.
Eg.: Leclanche cell, dry cell.

Secondary battery:
A secondary battery is the battery in which after it’s use can be recharged and can be used again.
A good secondary battery undergoes large no. of discharging and charging cycles.
Lead storage battery is an example of secondary battery.
The cell reactions when the battery is in use are
Pb(s) + [latex]\mathrm{SO}_4^{-2}(\mathrm{aq})[/latex] → PbSO4(s) + 2e (Anode)
PbO2(s) + [latex]\mathrm{SO}_4^{-2}(\mathrm{aq})[/latex] → [latex]4 \mathrm{H}_{\text {(aq) }}^{+}[/latex] + 2e → PbSO4(s) + 2 H2O(l) (Cathode)
Overall cell reaction is
Pb(s) + PbO2(s) + 2H2SO4(aq) → 2PbSO4(aq) + 2H2O(l)

Construction and working of primary batteries :

Dry cell:

  1. This is a modification of Leclanche cell. The liquid state electrolytes (in Leclanche cell) are replaced by paste electrolytes.
  2. A cylindrical ‘Zn’ vessel is covered with a cardboard. This is sealed with pitch. Zn vessel acts as negative electrode. A carbon rod is introduced at the centre of the Zn vessel. This carbon rod acts as positive electrode.
  3. Carbon rod is surrounded by a paste of (C + MnO2). The remaining space is filled with (NH4Cl + ZnCl2 paste. The two pastes are separated by a porous sheet.
  4. These cells are easy to handle and used in radios, watches, torch lights etc. The cell potential is approximately 1.5 V
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 14
  5. Electrode reactions:
    Cathode : MnO2 + [latex]\mathrm{NH}_4^{+}[/latex] + eΘ → MnO (OH) + NH3
    Anode : Zn + 2MnO2 + 2H2O → Zn2+ + 2OHΘ + 2MnO (OH)
    Some of the secondary reactions are
    2 NH4Cl + 2OHΘ → 2NH3 + 2Cl + 2H2O
    Zn2+ + 2NH3 + 2Cl → [Zn (NH3)2] Cl2

Secondary batteries – construction and working : A secondary cell after its use can be recharged and can be used again. A good secondary cell undergoes a large number of discharging and charging cycles. The most important secondary cell in use is the lead storage battery (fig.(b)). This is commonly used in automobiles and invertors. It consists of a lead anode and a grid of lead packed with lead dioxide (PbO2) as cathode. A 38% solution of sulphuric acid is used as electrolyte.
The cell reactions when the battery is in use (discharging) are :
Anode : Pb(s) + [latex]\mathrm{SO}_4^{-2}(\mathrm{aq})[/latex] → PbSO4(s) + 2e
Cathode: PbO2(s) + [latex]\mathrm{SO}_4^{-2}(\mathrm{aq})[/latex] → [latex]4 \mathrm{H}_{\text {(aq) }}^{+}[/latex] + 2e → PbSO4(s) + 2 H2O(l)
i.e., overall cell reaction consisting of cathode and anode reactions is
Pb(s) + PbO2(s) + 2H2SO4(aq) → 2PbSO4(aq) + 2H2O(l)
These reactions occur during discharge i.e., during use of the battery.
On charging the discharged battery the above reaction is reversed and PbSO4 (s) on anode and cathode is converted into Pb and PbO2, respectively.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 15

Problems

Question 1.
The standard potentials of some electrodes are as follows. Arrange the metals in an increasing order of their reducing power.
1) K+/K = -2.93 V
2) Ag+/Ag = 0.8OEV
3) Cu2+/Cu = 0.34 V
4) Mg2+/Mg = -2.37 V
5) Cr3+/Cr = – 0.74V
6) Fe2+/Fe = —0.44 V
Solution:
Given
E0 of cells K+/K = —2.93
Mg+2/Mg = -2.37 V
Ag+/Ag = 0.80 V
Cr+3/Cr = -0.74 V
Cu+2/Cu = 0.34 V
Fe+2/Fe = -0.44 V
Lower the reduction potential values indicates high reducing power and high value indicates the high oxidising power.
So, increasing order of the given cells reducing power is
Ag < Cu < Fe < Cr < Mg < K.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 2.
Calculate the emf of the cell at 25°C
Cr | Cr3+ (0.1 M) || Fe2+ (0.01M) | Fe, given that [latex]\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{Cr}^{3+} / \mathrm{Cr}}^0[/latex] = – 0.74V and [latex]\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{Fe}^{2+} / \mathrm{Fe}}^0[/latex] = 0.44 V.
Solution:
Given cell is
Cr | [latex]\mathrm{Cr}_{(0.1 \mathrm{M})}^{+3}[/latex] || [latex]\mathrm{Fe}_{(0.01 \mathrm{M})}^{+2}[/latex] | Fe
E0 of Cr+3/Cr = -0.74 V
E0 of Fe+2/Fe = -0.44 V
ECr+3/Cr = E0 + [latex]\frac{0.059}{3}[/latex] log10 [Cr+3]
= -0.74 + [latex]\frac{0.059}{3}[/latex] log 0.1
= -0.76 V
EFe+2/Fe = -0.44 + [latex]\frac{0.059}{2}[/latex] log 0.01
= -0.44 – 0.059 = – 0.499 V
EMF of cell = ERHS – ELHS
= (- 0.499) – (-0.76) = 0.26 1 V .

Question 3.
Calculate the potential of a Zn – Zn2+ electrode in which the molarity of Zn2+ is 0.001 M. Given that [latex]\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{Zn}^{2+} / \mathrm{Zn}}^0[/latex] = – 0.76 V
R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1; F = 96500 C mol-1.
Solution:
Given electrode Zn | Zn+2(0.001m) [latex]\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{Zn}^{+2} / \mathrm{Zn}}^0[/latex] = -0.76V
Nemst equation is
E = E0 + [latex]\frac{2.303 \mathrm{RT}}{\mathrm{nF}}[/latex] log [Mn+]
Given R = 8.314 J/K. mole
F = 96500 c/mole
E = E0 + [latex]\frac{0.059}{\mathrm{n}}[/latex] log C
= -0.76 + [latex]\frac{0.059}{2}[/latex] log 0.001
= -0.76 – [latex]\frac{0.059}{2}[/latex] × 3
= – 0.76 – 0.0295 × 3
= -0.76 – 0.0885
= -0.8485 V

Question 4.
Determine ∆G0 for the button cell used in the watches. The cell reaction is
Zn(s) + Ag2O(s) + H2O(l)→ [latex]\mathrm{Zn}_{(a q)}^{2+}[/latex] + 2 Ag(s) + 2 [latex]\mathrm{OH}_{(a q)}^{-}[/latex]
[latex]\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{Ag}^+ / \mathrm{Ag}}^0[/latex] = + 0.80 V; [latex]\mathbf{E}_{\mathrm{Zn}^{2+} / \mathrm{Zn}}^0[/latex] = – 0.76 V.
Solution:
Given E0 of Ag+/Ag = 0.80 V
E0 of Zn+2/Zn = – 0.76 V
Cell representation Zn/Zn+2|| Ag+ / Ag
EMF = ERHS – ELHS = 0.80 – (-0.76) = 1.56 V
∆G = -nFE0 = -2 × 96500 × 1.56 = -301.08 kJ/mole

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 5.
Calculate the emf of the cell consisting the following half cells
Al/Al3+(0.001 M), Ni/Ni2+ (0.50 M). Given that [latex]\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{Ni}^{2+} / \mathrm{Ni}}^0[/latex] = – 0.25 V [latex]\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{Al}^{3+} / \mathrm{Al}}^0[/latex] = – 1.66 v (log 8 × 10-6 = – 5.0969).
Solution:
Given E0 of Al+3/Al =-1.66 V
E0 of Ni+2/Ni = – 0.25 V
Cell representation Al/[latex]\mathrm{Al}_{(0.001 \mathrm{M})}^{+3}[/latex] || [latex]\mathrm{Ni}_{(0.50 \mathrm{M})}^{+2}[/latex] | Ni
Nemst equation is
EAl+3/Al = [latex]\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{Al}^{+3} / \mathrm{A} l}^0[/latex] + [latex]\frac{0.059}{n}[/latex] log [Al+3]
= -1.66 + [latex]\frac{0.059}{3}[/latex] log 0.001 = – 1.66 – 0.059 = – 1.719V
ENi+2/Ni = [latex]\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{Ni}^{+2} / \mathrm{Ni}}^0+\frac{0.059}{\mathrm{n}}[/latex] log [Ni+2]
= -0.25 + [latex]\frac{0.059}{2}[/latex] log [0.5]
= -0.25 – 0.0295 × 0.3010 = -0.25 – 0.0088795 = -0.25888
EMF of cell = ERHS – ELHS
= -0.25888 – (-1.719) = 1.46012 V

Question 6.
Determine the values of Kc for the following reaction
Ni(s) + 2 [latex]\mathrm{Ag}_{\text {(aq) }}^{+}[/latex] → [latex]\mathrm{Ni}_{\text {(aq) }}^{2+}[/latex] + 2 Ag(s) E0 = 1.05 V.
Solution:
Given
Ni(s) + 2 [latex]\mathrm{Ag}_{\text {(aq) }}^{+}[/latex] → [latex]\mathrm{Ni}_{\text {(aq) }}^{2+}[/latex] + 2 Ag(s)
E0 = 1.05 V.
Nernst Equation is E = E0 – [latex]\frac{0.059}{\mathrm{n}}[/latex] log Kc
at equilibrium E = 0
E0 = [latex]\frac{0.059}{\mathrm{n}}[/latex] log Kc
1.05 = [latex]\frac{0.059}{2}[/latex] log Kc
log Kc = [latex]\frac{2.1}{0.059}[/latex] = 35.59
Kc = 3.42 × 1035

Question 7.
Calculate the potential of the half-cell containing 0.1 M
K2Cr2O7(aq), 0.2 M [latex]\mathrm{Cr}_{\mathrm{aq}}^{3+}[/latex] and 1.0 × 10-4 M [latex]\mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}[/latex]. The half-reaction [latex]\mathrm{Cr}_2 \mathrm{O}_{7(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}+14 \mathrm{H}_{\text {(aq) }}^{+}+6 \mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow 2 \mathrm{Cr}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+7 \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}_{(l)}[/latex] (E0 of [latex]\mathrm{Cr}_2 \mathrm{O}_7^{2-} / \mathrm{Cr}^{3+}[/latex] = 1.33 V)
Solution:
Given half reaction
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 16

Question 8.
Calculate K for the reaction at 298 K
[latex]\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{s})}[/latex]
[latex]\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{Zn}^{2+/ Z n}}^0[/latex] = -0.76 V; [latex]\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{Cu}^{2+} / \mathrm{Cu}}^0[/latex] = + 0.34 V.
Solution:
Given [latex]\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{s})}[/latex]
E0 of Zn+2/Zn = -0.76 V
E0 of Cu+2/Cu = -0.34 V
E0 of cell = ERHS – ELHS = 0.34 – (- 0.76) = 1.1 V
∆G0 = – RTlnKc = – 2.303 RT log Kc
-212300 = -2.303 × 8.314 × 298 × log Kc
log Kc = [latex]\frac{212300}{2.303 \times 8.314 \times 298}[/latex] = 37.207
Kc = 1.6 × 1037

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 9.
Calculate the emf of the cell at 298 K
Sn(s) | Sn2+ (0.05 M) || [latex]\mathrm{H}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}[/latex] (0.02 M) | H2 1 atm. Pt
Given that [latex]\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{Sn}^{2+} / \mathrm{Sn}}^0[/latex] = -0.144 V
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 17

Question 10.
Calculate the concentration of silver ions in the cell constructed by using 0.1 M concentration of Cu2+ and Ag+ ions. Cu and Ag metals are used as electrodes. The cell potential is 0.422 V.
[[latex]\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{Ag}^{2+} / \mathrm{Ag}}^0[/latex] = 0.80 V; [latex]\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{Cu}^{2+} / \mathrm{Cu}}^0[/latex] = +0.34 V]
Solution:
Given E0 of Ag+/Ag = 0.80 V .
E0 of Cu+2/Cu = 0.34 V
E0 of cell = ERHS – ELHS = 0.80 – 0.34 = 0.46 V
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 18
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 19

Question 11.
Calculate the emf of the cell with the cell reaction
Ni(s) + 2 Ag+ (0.002M) → Ni2+ (0.160 M) + 2 Ag(s) ; [latex]\mathrm{E}_{\text {cell }}^0[/latex] = 1.05 V.
Solution:
From the given cell reaction and Nernst equation
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 20

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 12.
Cu2+ + 2e ⇌ Cu; E0 = +0.34 V
Ag+ + e ⇌ Ag; E0 = + 0.80 V
For what concentration of Ag+ ions will the emf of the cell be zero at 25°C. The concentration of Cu2+ is 0.1 M. (log 3.919 = 0.593).
Solution:
Cell is Cu|Cu+2 | |Ag+|Ag
E0 of cell = ERHS – ELHS = 0.80 – 0.34 = 0.46 V
Nernst equation is E = E0 – [latex]\frac{0.059}{2} \log \frac{\left[\mathrm{Cu}^{+2}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{Ag}^{+}\right]^2}[/latex]
EMF of cell = 0
E0 = [latex]\frac{0.059}{2} \log \frac{0.1}{\left[\mathrm{Ag}^{+}\right]^2}[/latex]
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 21

Question 13.
The conductivity of 0.20 M solution of KCl at 298 K is 0.0248 S cm-1. Calculate molar conductance.
Solution:
Conductivity (K) = 0.0248 S cm-1 = 0.0248 ohm-1 cm-1
Molar concentration [c] = 0.20 mol L-1
= [latex]\frac{[0.2 \mathrm{~mol}]}{\left[1000 \mathrm{~cm}^3\right]}[/latex] = 2.0 × 10-4 mol cm-3
Molar conductivity [∧m] = [latex]\frac{\kappa}{\mathrm{c}}=\frac{\left[0.0248 \mathrm{ohm}^{-1} \mathrm{~cm}^{-1}\right]}{\left[2.0 \times 10^{-4} \mathrm{~mol} \mathrm{~cm}^{-3}\right]}[/latex]
= 124 ohm-1 mol-1 cm2 or 1245 mol-1 cm2
Molar conductivity = 124 mol-1 cm2

Question 14.
Calculate the degree of dissociation (α) of CH3COOH at 298 K.
Given that [latex]\wedge_{\mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{COOH}}^{\infty}[/latex] = 11.75 cm2 mol-1
[latex]\wedge_{\mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{COO}^{-}}^0[/latex] = 40.95 cm2 mol-1
[latex]\wedge_{\mathrm{H}^{+}}^0[/latex] = 349.15 cm2 mol-1
Solution:
Given that [latex]\wedge_{\mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{COOH}}^{\infty}[/latex] = 11.75 cm2 mol-1
[latex]\wedge_{\mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{COO}^{-}}^{\infty}[/latex] = 40.95 cm2 mol-1
[latex]\wedge_{\mathrm{H}^{+}}^{\infty}[/latex] = 349.15 cm2 mol-1
[latex]\wedge_{\mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{COOH}}^{\infty}[/latex] = [latex]\wedge_{\mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{COO}^{-}}^{\infty}[/latex] + [latex]\wedge_{\mathrm{H}^{+}}^{\infty}[/latex] = 40.95 + 349.15 = 390.1
Degree of dissociation (α) = [latex]\frac{\lambda^\alpha}{\lambda^{\infty}}=\frac{11.75}{390: 1}[/latex] = 0.03 = 3 × 10-2
∴ α = 3× 10-2

Textual Examples

Question 1.
Represent the cell in which the following reaction takes place Mg(s) + 2Ag+ (0.0001M) → Mg2+ (0.130M) + 2 Ag(s)
Calculate its E(cell) if [latex]\mathrm{E}_{(\text {cell) }}^{\Theta}[/latex] = 3.17 V
Solution:
The cell is represented as Mg |Mg2+ (0.130M) || Ag+(0.0001M) | Ag
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 22

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 2.
Calculate the equilibrium constant of the reaction:
Cu(s) + 2 [latex]{Ag}_{\text {(aq) }}^{+}[/latex] → [latex]\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}[/latex] + 2 Ag(s) ; [latex]\mathrm{E}_{(\text {cell) }}^{\Theta}[/latex] = 0.46 V
Solution:
[latex]\mathrm{E}_{(\text {cell) }}^{\Theta}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{0.059V}{2}[/latex] log Kc = 0.46 V or
l0g Kc = [latex]\frac{0.46 \mathrm{~V} \times 2}{0.059 \mathrm{~V}}[/latex] = 156
Kc = 3.92 × 1015

Question 3.
The standard emf of Daniell cell is 1.1V. Calculate the standard Gibbs energy for the cell reactions:
Zn(s) + [latex]\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}[/latex] → [latex]\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}[/latex] + Cu(s)
Solution:
rGΘ = -nF[latex]\mathrm{E}_{(\text {cell) }}^{\Theta}[/latex]
n in the above equation is 2, F = 96487 C mol-1 and [latex]\mathrm{E}_{(\text {cell) }}^{\Theta}[/latex] = 1.1 V
Therefore ∆rGΘ = -2 × 1.1V × 96487 C mol-1
= – 21227 J mol-1 =-212.27 kJ mol-1

Question 4.
Resistance of a conductivity cell filled with 0.1 mol L-1 KCl solution is 100 Ω. If .the resistance of the same cell when filled with 0.02 mol L-1 KCl solution is 520 Ω, calculate the conductivity and molar conductivity of 0.02 mol L-1 KCl solution. The conductivity of 0.1 mol L-1 KCl solution is 1.29 S/m.
Solution:
The cell constant is given by the equation :
Cell constant = G* = conductivity × resistance
= 1.29 S/m 100 Ω = 129 m-1 = 1.29 cm-1
Conductivity of 0.02 mol L-1 KCl solution = cell constant / resistance
= [latex]\frac{\mathrm{G}^*}{\mathrm{R}}=\frac{129 \mathrm{~m}^{-1}}{520 \Omega}[/latex] = 0.248 S m-1
Concentration = 0.02 mol L-1
= 1000 × 0.02 mol m-3 = 20 mol m-3
Molar conductivity = ∧m = [latex]\frac{\kappa}{\mathrm{c}}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{248 \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{Sm}^{-1}}{20 \mathrm{~mol} \mathrm{~m}^{-3}}[/latex] = 124 × 10-4 Sm2 mol-1
Alternatively, κ = [latex]\frac{1.29 \mathrm{~cm}^{-1}}{520 \Omega}[/latex] = 0.248 × 10-2 S cm-1
and ∧m = κ × 1000 cm3L-1 molarity-1
= [latex]\frac{0.248 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{~S} \mathrm{~cm}^{-1} \times 1000 \mathrm{~cm}^3 \mathrm{~L}^{-1}}{0.02 \mathrm{~mol} \mathrm{~L}^{-1}}[/latex]
= 124 S cm2 mol-1

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 5.
The electrical resistance of a column 0.05 mol L-1 NaOH solution of diameter 1 cm and length 50 cm is 5.55 × 103 ohm. Calculate its resistivity, conductivity and molar conductivity.
Answer:
A = πr2 = 31.4 × 0.52 cm2 = 0.785 cm2 = 0.785 × 10-4 m2
l = 50 cm = 0.5 m
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 23

Question 6.
Calculate [latex]\wedge_m^0[/latex] for CaCl2 and MgSO4 from the data given in Table 3.4.
Solution:
We know from Kohlrausch law that
[latex]\wedge_{\mathrm{m}\left(\mathrm{CaCl}_2\right)}^0=\wedge_{\mathrm{Ca}^{2+}}^0+2 \lambda_{\mathrm{Cl}}^0[/latex] = 119.0 S cm2 mol -1 + 2(76.3) S cm2 mol-1
= (119.0 + 152.6) Scm2 mol-1
= 271.6 S cm2 mol-1
[latex]\wedge_{\mathrm{m}\left(\mathrm{MgSO}_4\right)}^0=\lambda_{\mathrm{Mg}^{2+}}^0+\lambda_{\mathrm{SO}_4^{2-}}^0[/latex] =106.0 S cm2 mol-1 + 160.0 S cm2 mol-1
= 266 S cm2 mol-1

Question 7.
[latex]\wedge_m^0[/latex] for NaCl, HCl and NaAc are 126.4,425.9 and 91.0 S cm2 mol-1 respectively. Calculate ∧0 for HAc.
Solution:
[latex]\wedge_{\mathrm{m}(\mathrm{HAc})}^0=\lambda_{\mathrm{H}^{+}}^0+\lambda_{\mathrm{Ac}^0}^0=\lambda_{\mathrm{H}^{+}}^0+\lambda_{\mathrm{Cl}^{-}}^0+\lambda_{\mathrm{Na}^{+}}^0-\lambda_{\mathrm{Cl}^{-}}^0-\lambda_{\mathrm{Na}^{+}}^0[/latex]
= [latex]\wedge_{\mathrm{m}(\mathrm{HCl})}^0+\wedge_{\mathrm{m}(\mathrm{NaAc})}^0-\wedge_{\mathrm{m}(\mathrm{NaCl})}^0[/latex]
= (425.9 + 91.0 – 126.4) S cm2 mol-1
= 390.5 S cm2 mol-1

Question 8.
The conductivity of 0.001028 mol L-1 acetic acid is 4.95 × 10-5 S cm-1. Calculate its dissociation constant if [latex]\wedge_m^0[/latex] for acetic acid is 390.5 S cm2 mol-1.
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 24

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 9.
A solution of CuSO4 is electrolysed for 10 minutes with a current of 1.5 amperes. What is the mass of eopper deposited at the cathode ? [A.P. & T.S. Mar. 15] [Mar. 15]
Solution:
t = 600 s charge = current × time = 1.5A × 600 s = 900 C
According to the reaction :
[latex]\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}[/latex] + 2e = Cu(s)
We require 2F or 2 × 96487 C to deposit 1 mol or 63 g of Cu.
For 900 C, the mass of Cu deposited
= (63 g mol-1 × 900 C) / (2 × 96487 C mol-1) = 0.2938 g

Intext Questions

Question 1.
How would you determine the standard electrode potential of the system Mg2+/Mg ?
Solution:
E° value of Mg2+/Mg electrode is determined by setting up an electrochemical cell. For this purpose, a Mg electrode is dipped in 1 M MgSO4 solution, which acts as one half cell i.e., oxidation half-cell.

In the same way, the standard hydrogen electrode acts as the other half-cell i.e., reduction half cell. The deflection of voltmeter placed in the cell circuit is towards the Mg electrode which indicates the direction of flow of current.
The cell may be represented as : Mg | Mg2+ (1M) || H+ (M) | H2 (1 atm). Pt The reading as given by voltmeter gives [latex]\mathrm{E}_{\text {cell }}^0[/latex]
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 25

Question 2.
Can you store copper sulphate solutions In a zinc pot?
Solution:
No, zinc pot cannot store copper sulphate solutions because the standard electrode potential (E0) value of zinc is less than that of copper. So, zinc is stronger reducing agent then copper.
[latex]\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}[/latex] + 2e → Zn(s); E0 = -0.76 V
[latex]\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}[/latex] + 2e → Cu(s); E0 = – 0.34 V
So, zinc will loss electrons to Cu2+ ions and redox reaction will occur as follows.
Zn(s) + [latex]\mathrm{Cu}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}[/latex] → [latex]\mathrm{Zn}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}[/latex] + Cu(s)

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 3.
Consult the table on standard electrode potentials and suggest three substances that can oxidise ferrous ions under suitable conditions.
Solution:
Fe2+ (ferrous) ions gets oxidised to Fe3+ (ferric) ion as follows
Fe2+ → Fe3+ + e [latex]\mathrm{E}_{0 \mathrm{x}}^0[/latex] = -0.77V
Only those substances can oxidise Fe2+ ions to Fe3+ ions which can accept electrons released during oxidation or are placed above iron in electrochemical series. Three such substances are: Cl2(g), Br2(g) and F2(g).

Question 4.
Calculate the potential of hydrogen electrode placed in a solution of pH 10.
Solution:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 26

Question 5.
The cell in which the following cell reaction occurs,
[latex]2 \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+2 \mathrm{I}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \longrightarrow 2 \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+}+\mathrm{I}_{2(\mathrm{~s})}[/latex] has [latex]\mathrm{E}_{\text {cell }}^0[/latex] = 0.236 V at 298 K. Calculate the standard Gibbs energy and the equilibrium constant of the cell reaction.
Solution:
Two half reactions for the given redox reaction may be written as :
[latex]2 \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+2 \mathrm{e}^{-} \longrightarrow 2 \mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{2+} ; 2 \mathrm{I}^{-} \longrightarrow \mathrm{I}_2+2 \mathrm{e}^{-}[/latex]
2 moles of electrons are involved in the reaction, so n = 2
rG0 = – nF[latex]\mathrm{E}_{\text {cell }}^0[/latex] = (-2 mol) × (96500 mol-1) (0.236 V)
= -45548 CV = -45548 J
rG0 = – 45.55 kJ
log Kc = [latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{G}^0}{2.303 \mathrm{RT}}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{(-45.55 \mathrm{~kJ})}{2.303 \times\left(8.314 \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{kJK}^{-1}\right) \times(298 \mathrm{~K})}[/latex] = 7.983
Kc = Antilog (7.983) = 9.616 × 107
Kc = 9.616 × 107

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 7.
Why does the conductivity of a solution decrease with dilution ?
Solution:
The conductivity of a solution is related with the number of ions present per unit volume of the solution. When the solution is diluted, the number of ions decreases. Hence, conductivity or specific conductance of the solution also decreases.

Question 8.
Suggest a way to determine the [latex]\wedge_{\mathrm{m}}^0[/latex] value of water.
Solution:
The molar conductance of water at infinite dilution can be obtained from the knowledge of molar conductances at inifite dilution of sodium hydroxide, hydrochloric acid and sodium chloride (all strong electrolytes). This is in accordance with Kohlrausch’s law.
[latex]\wedge_{\mathrm{m}\left(\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\right)}^0=\wedge_{\mathrm{m}(\mathrm{NaOH})}^0+\wedge_{\mathrm{m}(\mathrm{HCl})}^0-\wedge_{\mathrm{m}(\mathrm{NaCl})}^0[/latex]

Question 9.
The molar conductivity of 0.025 mol L-1 methanoic acid is 46.1 S cm2 mol-1. Calculate its degree of dissociation and dissociation constant.
Given, λ0(H+) = 349.6 S cm-1 mol-1 and λ0 (HCOO) = 54.6 S cm2 mol-1
Solution:
Step I: Calculation of degree of dissociation (a) of HCOOH
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 27
= [latex]\frac{\left(3.249 \times 10^{-4} \mathrm{~mol} \mathrm{~L}^{-1}\right)}{(0.886)}[/latex]
= 3.67 × 10-4 mol L-1
α = 0.114
Ka = 3.67 × 10-4 mol L-1

Question 10.
If a current of 0.5 ampere flows through a metallic wire for 2h, then how many electrons would flow through the wire ?
Solution:
Quantity of charge (Q) passed = Current (C) × Time (t)
= (0.5 A) × (2 × 60 × 60 s)
= (3600) Ampere sec = 3600 C ,
Number of electrons flowing through the wire on passing charge of one Faraday (96500 C) = 6.022 × 1023
Number of electrons flowing through the wire on passing a charge of 3600 C
= [latex]\frac{6.022 \times 10^{23} \times(3600 \mathrm{C})}{(96500 \mathrm{C})}[/latex]
= 2.246 × 1022
Number of electrons = 2.246 × 1022

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 11.
Suggest a list to metals that are extracted electrolytically.
Solution:
Those metals which are highly reactive and have large negative E0 values can be exerted electrolytically. This type of metals are powerful reducing agents.
Eg: Sodium, Potassium, Calcium, Magnesium etc.

Question 12.
Consider the reaction,
[latex]\mathrm{Cr}_2 \mathrm{O}_7^{2-}[/latex] + 14H+ + 6e → 2Cr3+ + 7H2O
What is the quantity of electricity in coulombs nefeded to reduce 1 mole of [latex]\mathrm{Cr}_2 \mathrm{O}_7^{2-}[/latex] ?
Solution:
1 mole [latex]\mathrm{Cr}_2 \mathrm{O}_7^{2-}[/latex] require 6 Faraday electricity (6 F)
= 6 × 96500 C = 5.79 × 105 C
Quantity of electricity = 5.79 × 105 Coulomb

Question 13.
Write the chemistry of recharging the lead storage battery, highlighting all the materials that are involved during recharging.
Solution:
When lead storage battery is recharged, electrical energy is supplied to the cell from the external source : i.e., the cell operates as an electrolytic cell during recharging. All the chemical reactions, which take place during the use of battery, are reversed at this time.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 28

Question 14.
Suggest two materials other than hydrogen that can be used as fuels in fuel cells.
Solution:
Methane (CH4) and methanol (CH3OH)

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 15.
Explain how rusting of iron is envisaged as setting up of an electrochemical cell.
Solution:
In corrosion, a metal is oxidised by loss of electrons to oxygen with the formation of oxides. So, an electrochemical cell is set up.
Eg: Rusting of iron involves the following steps :
i) The water layer present on the surface of iron dissolves acidic oxides from air like CO2 and forms acid to produce H+ ions.
H2O + CO2 H2CO3 ⇌ 2H+ + [latex]\mathrm{CO}_3^{2-}[/latex]

ii) In the presence of H+ ions, iron starts losing electrons at some spot to form ferrous ions. This spot behaves as anode.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 29

iii) The electrons released at anode move to another spot, where H+ ions and the dissolved oxygen gain these electrons. This spot becomes a cathode.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 30

iv) Overall reaction, i.e., redox reaction is :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 31
v) Ferrous ions are further oxidised by the atmospheric oxygen to ferric ions which combine with water molecules to form hydrated ferric oxide, Fe2O3. xH2O. (Rust).
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 32

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 2nd Lesson Solutions Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 2nd Lesson Solutions

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define the term solution.
Answer:
Solution : Solution is a homogeneous mixture of two (or) more components whose composition may be varied with certain limits.

Question 2.
Define molarity. [T.S. Mar.17] [Mar. 11]
Answer:
Molarity : The number of moles of solute dissolved in one litre of solution is called molarity.
Molarity (M) = [latex]\frac{\text { Moles of solute }}{\text { Volume (in litres) }}[/latex]
M = [latex]\frac{\text { Weight }}{\text { Gram mol wt }} \times \frac{1000}{V(\mathrm{ml} l)}[/latex]
Units: moles / litre.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 3.
Define molality [A.P. Mar. 15] [May 11]
Answer:
Molality: The number of moles of solute present in one kilogram of solvent is called molality.
Molality (M) = [latex]\frac{\text { Moles of solute }}{\text { Mass of solvent (kgs) }}[/latex]
m = [latex]\frac{\text { Weight }}{\text { Gram mol wt }} \times \frac{1000}{\mathrm{G}(\mathrm{gms})}[/latex]

Question 4.
Give an example of a solid solution in which the solute is solid.
Answer:
Example of a solid solution in which the solute is solid, is copper dissolved in gold.

Question 5.
Define mole fraction. . [T.S. Mar. 18] [Mar. 14]
Answer:
Mole fraction : The ratio of number of moles of the one component of the solution to the total number of moles of all the components of the solution is called mole fraction.
Mole fraction of solute Xs = [latex]\frac{\mathbf{n}_{\mathrm{S}}}{\mathbf{n}_{0}+\mathbf{n}_{\mathrm{s}}}[/latex]
Mole fraction of solvent X0 = [latex]\frac{\mathbf{n}_{\mathrm{S}}}{\mathbf{n}_{0}+\mathbf{n}_{\mathrm{s}}}[/latex]
[ns =number of moles of solute]
[n0 = number of moles of solvent]
It has no units.

Question 6.
Define mass percentage solution.
Answer:
The mass percentage of a component of a solution is defined as the
mass % = AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 1 × 100

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 7.
What is ppm of a solution ?
Answer:
ppm – parts per million : It is a convenient method of expressing concentration when a solute is present in trace quantities. Parts per million is defined as the
ppm = AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 2 × 106

Question 8.
What role do the molecular interactions play in a solution of alcohol and water ?
Answer:
In a solution of alcohol and water the molecular interactions present are hydrogen bondings. When these components are mixed then new hydrogen bonds develop between alcohol and water. The formed forces are weaker. Due to the decrease of magnitude of attractive forces, the solution shows positive deviation from Raoult’s law. This leads to increase of vapour pressure of solution and decrease in its boiling point.

Question 9.
State Raoult’s law. [A.P. & T.S. Mar. 18; 16; A.P. Mar. 17] [Mar. 14]
Answer:
Raoult’s law for volatile solute: For a solution of volatile liquids, the partial vapour pressure of each component of the solution is directly proportional to its mole fraction present in solution.

Raoult’s law for non-volatile solute : The relative lowering of vapour pressure of dilute solution containing non-volatile solute is equal to the mole fraction of solute.

Question 10.
State Henry’s law.
Answer:
At constant temperature, the solubility of a gas in a liquid is directly proportional to the partial pressure of the gas present above the surface of liquid. .
(Or)
The partial pressure of the gas in vapour phase is proportional to the mole fraction of the gas in the solution.
P = KH × x KH = Henry’s constant
P = Partial pressure
x = Mole fraction of gas

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 11.
What is Ebullioscopic constant ?
Answer:
Ebullioscopic constant : The elevation of boiling point observed in one molal solution containing non-volatile solute is called Ebullioscopic constant (or) molal elevation constant.

Question 12.
What is Cryoscopic constant ?
Answer:
Cryoscopic constant : The depression in freezing point observed in one molal solution containing non-volatile solute is called cryoscopic constant (or) molal depression constant.

Question 13.
Define osmotic pressure. [A.P. Mar. 18; 16]
Answer:
Osmotic pressure : The pressure required to prevent the in flow of solvent molecules into the solution when these are. separated by semi-permeable membrane.

Question 14.
What are isotonic solutions ? [T.S. Mar. 19; 16; A.P. Mar. 17, 15]
Answer:
Isotonic solutions : Solutions having same osmotic pressure at a given temperature are called isotonic solutions.
e.g.: Blood is isotonic with 0.9% [latex]\left(\frac{\mathrm{W}}{\mathrm{V}}\right)[/latex] NaCl [Saline]

Question 15.
Amongst the following compounds, identify which are insoluble, partially soluble and highly soluble in water, (i) phenol (ii) toluene (iii) formic acid (iv) ethylene glycol (v) chloroform (vi) pentanol.
Answer:

  1. Phenol is partially soluble in water.
  2. Toluene is insoluble in water.
  3. Formic acid is highly soluble in water.
  4. Ethylene glycol is highly soluble in water.
  5. Chloroform is insoluble in water.
  6. Pentanol is partially soluble in water.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 16.
Calculate the mass percentage of aspirin (C9H8O4) in acetonitrile (CH3CN) when 6.5 gm of C9H8O4 is dissolved in 450g of CH3CN.
Answer:
Given
The Mass of aspirin = 6.5 gms
Mass of acetonitrile = 450 gms
Mass of solution = 6.5 + 450
= 456.5 gms
Mass % = [latex]\frac{6.5}{456.5}[/latex] × 100 = 1.424 %

Question 17.
Calculate the amount of benzoic acid (C6H5COOH) required for preparing 250 ml of 0.15 M solution in methanol.
Answer:
Given
Molarity = 0.15 M
Volume V = 250 ml
Molecular weight of benzoic acid (C6H5COOH) = 122
Molarity (M) = [latex]\frac{\text { Weight }}{\text { GMw }} \times \frac{1000}{V(\mathrm{~m} l)}[/latex]
0.15 = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{W}}{122} \times \frac{1000}{250}[/latex]
W = [latex]\frac{122 \times 0.15}{4}[/latex] = 4.575 gms

Question 18.
The depression in freezing point of water observed for the same amount of acetic acid, dichloro-acetic acid and trichloro acetic acid increases in the order given above. Explain briefly.
Answer:
Given acids are CH3COOH, CHCl2COOH, CCl3 COOH.
The depression in freezing point of a solute in water depends upon the number of ions (or) particles in aqueous solution.
The given three acids are arranged in the order of their acidic strengths (increasing order)
CH3COOH < CHCl2COOH < CCl3COOH
Due to the presence of three chlorine atoms CCl3COOH is more acidic than CHCl2 COOH and followed by CH3COOH.
∴ The order of depression in freezing point is
CH3COOH < CHCl2COOH < CCl3COOH

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 19.
What is Van’t Hoffs factor ‘i’ and how is it related to ‘a’ in the case of a binary electrolyte (1:1)?
Answer:
Van’t Hoffs factor (i) : “It is defined as the ratio of the observed value of colligative property to the theoretical value of colligative property”.
i = AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 3
Solute dissociation or ionization process : If a solute on ionization gives ‘n’ ions and ‘a’ is degree of ionization at the given concentration, we will have [1 + (n – 1) α] particles.
(1 – α) ⇌ nα
Total 1 – α + nα = [1 + (n – 1) α]
∴ i = [latex]\frac{[1+(n-1) \alpha]}{1}[/latex]
α = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{i}-1}{\mathrm{n}-1}[/latex]
αionization = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{i}-1}{\mathrm{n}-1}[/latex]
Solute association process :
If ‘n’A molecules combine to give An, we have
nA ⇌ An
If ‘α’ is degree of association at the given concentration.
1 – α = [latex]\frac{\alpha}{n}[/latex]
= 1 – α + [latex]\frac{\alpha}{n}[/latex]
i = [latex]\frac{1-\alpha+\frac{\alpha}{n}}{1}[/latex]
(or) α = [latex]\frac{1-\mathrm{i}}{1-\frac{1}{n}}[/latex]
α dissociation = [latex]\frac{1-\mathrm{i}}{1-\frac{1}{n}}[/latex]

Question 20.
What is relative lowering of vapour pressure ? [A.P. Mar. 19]
Answer:
Relating lowering of vapour pressure: The ratio of lowering of vapour pressure of a solution containing non-volatile solute to the vapour pressure of pure solvent is called relative lowering of vapour pressure.
R.L.V.P. = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{P}_{0}-\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{S}}}{\mathrm{P}_{0}}[/latex]
P0 – PS = lowering of vapour pressure
P0 = Vapour pressure of pure solvent

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 21.
Calculate the mole fraction of H2SO4 in a solution containing 98% H2SO4 by mass. [A.P. Mar. 17]
Answer:
Given a Solution containing – 98% H2SO4 by mass.
It means 98 gms of H2SO4 and 2 gms of H2O mixed to form a solution.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 4

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
How many types of solutions are formed? Give an example for each type of solution.
Answer:
Solutions are classified into three types on the basis of the solvent present in that solution.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 5

Question 2.
Define mass percentage, volume percentage and mass to volume percentage solutions.
Answer:
i) Mass percentage : The mass percentage of a component of a solution is defined as the
mass % = AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 6 × 10
ii) Volume percentage [latex]\left(\frac{\mathbf{v}}{\mathbf{V}}\right)[/latex] : It is defined as the volume % of a component
= AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 7 × 100
iii) Mass to volume percentage [latex]\left(\frac{\mathbf{w}}{\mathbf{V}}\right)[/latex] : It is defined as the mass of solute dissolved in 100 ml of the solution.
It is commonly used in medicine and pharmacy.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 3.
Concentrated nitric acid used in the laboratory work is 68% nitric acid by mass in aqueous solution. What should be the molarity of such a sample of the acid if the density of the solution is 1.504g mL-1?
Answer:
Given 68% HNO3 by mass that means
68gms mass of HNO3 present in 100 gms of solution.
Molecular weight of HNO3 = 63
Number of moles of HNO3 = [latex]\frac{\text { weight }}{\text { GMW }}=\frac{68}{63}[/latex] = 1.079
Given density of the solution = 1.504 gm/ml
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 8

Question 4.
A solution of glucose in water is labelled as 10% w/w. What would be the molarity of the solution?
Answer:
Given 10% [latex]\left(\frac{\mathrm{W}}{\mathrm{w}}\right)[/latex] glucose in water solution
Weight of glucose = 10 gms
GMW of glucose (C6H12O6) = 180
Weight of water = 100 – 10 = 90 gms.
Molarity (m) = [latex]\frac{\text { Weight }}{\text { GMW }} \times \frac{1000}{\text { W (gms) }}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{10}{180} \times \frac{1000}{90}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{100}{18 \times 9}[/latex]
= 0.617 moles / kg
Molarity = [latex]\frac{\text { Weight }}{\text { GMW }} \times \frac{1000}{V(\mathrm{~m} l)}[/latex]
Weight of solution = 100 gms
Assuming that Density of solution = 1.2 gm/ml
Volume = [latex]\frac{100}{1.2}[/latex] = 83.33 ml
Molarity (M) = [latex]\frac{10}{180} \times \frac{1000}{83.33}[/latex] ml
= [latex]\frac{1000}{18 \times 83.33}[/latex] = 0.67 M

Question 5.
A solution of sucrose in water is labelled as 20% w/w. What would be the mole fraction of each component in the solution ?
Answer:
20% [latex]\left(\frac{\mathrm{W}}{\mathrm{w}}\right)[/latex] Sucrose in water solution means
20 gms of Sucrose and 80 gms of water.
Number of moles of sucrose (ns) = [latex]\frac{20}{342}[/latex] = 0.0584
Number of moles of water (n0) = [latex]\frac{80}{18}[/latex] = 4.444
Mole fraction of sucrose Xs = [latex]\frac{n_{s}}{n_{0}+n_{s}}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{0.0584}{4.444+0.0584}[/latex] + [latex]\frac{0.0584}{4.50284}[/latex] = 0.01296
Mole fraction of water X0 = [latex]\frac{n_{s}}{n_{0}+n_{s}}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{4.444}{4.50284}[/latex] = 0.9869
(Or)
Xs + X0 = 1
X0 = 1 – Xs = 1 – 0.01296 = 0987

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 6.
How many ml of 0.1 M HCl is required to react completely with 1.0 g mixture of Na2CO3 and NaHCO3 containing equal-molar amounts of both?
Answer:
Given 1gm mixture of Na2CO3 and NaHCO3
Let the mass of Na2CO3 = a gms
Mass of NaHCO3 = (1 – a) gms
Number of moles of Na2CO3 = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{wt}}{\text { GMW }}=\frac{\mathrm{a}}{106}[/latex]
Number of moles of NaHCO3 = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{wt}}{\mathrm{GMW}}=\frac{1-\mathrm{a}}{84}[/latex]
Given that the mixture contains Equi molar amounts of Na2CO3 and NaHCO2
∴ [latex]\frac{a}{106}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{1-a}{84}[/latex]
84 a =106 – 106 a
190 a = 106
a = 0.558gms
∴ Weight of Na2CO3 = 0.558 gms
Weight of NaHCO3 = 1 – 0.558 = 0.442gms
Na2CO3 + 2 HCl → 2 NaCl + H2O + CO2
106 gms – 73 gms
0.558 g – ? [latex]\frac{73 \times 0.558}{106}[/latex] = 0.384 gms
NaHCO3 + HCl → NaCl + H2O + CO2
84 gms — 36.5 gins
0.442gms — ?
= [latex]\frac{36.5 \times 0.442}{84}[/latex] = 0.1928
∴ The weight of HC1 required = 0.384 + 0.192 = 0.576 gms
Molarity (M) = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{Wt}}{\text { GMWt }} \times \frac{1000}{\mathrm{~V}(\mathrm{~m} l)}[/latex]
0.1 = [latex]\frac{0.576}{36.5} \times \frac{1000}{V}[/latex]
V = [latex]\frac{0.576 \times 1000}{36.5 \times 0.1}=\frac{576}{3.65}[/latex] = 157.80 ml

Question 7.
A solution is obtained by mixing 300g of 25% solution and 400g of 40% solution by mass. Calculate the mass percentage of the resulting solution.
Answer:
Given a solution is obtained by mixing 300 gms of 25% solution and 400 gms of 40% solution by mass.
Weight of solute in 1st solution = 300 × [latex]\frac{25}{100}[/latex] = 75 gms
Weight of solute in 2nd solution = 400 × [latex]\frac{40}{100}[/latex] = 160 gms
Total weight of solute = 75 + 160 = 235 gms
Total weight of solution = 300 + 400 = 700 gms
Mass % of solute in resulting solution = [latex]\frac{235}{700}[/latex] × 100 = 33.5%

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 8.
An antifreeze solution is prepared from 222.6g of ethylene glycol [(C2H6O2)] and 200g of water (solvent). Calculate the molality of the solution.
Solution:
Weight of Ethylene glycol = 222.6 gms .
G.mol wt =62
Weight of solvent = 200 gms
Molality (m) = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{Wt}}{\mathrm{GMWt}} \times \frac{1000}{\mathrm{a}(\mathrm{gms})}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{222.6}{62} \times \frac{1000}{200}=\frac{222.6}{62 \times 0.2}[/latex] = 17.95 m
Molarity (M) = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{Wt}}{\mathrm{GMWt}} \times \frac{1000}{\mathrm{~V}(\mathrm{~m} l)}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{222.6}{62} \times \frac{1000}{394.2}[/latex] = 9.1 M
Mass of solution = 200 + 222.6
= 422.6 gms
Volume = [latex]\frac{\text { Weight }}{\text { Density }}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{422.6}{1.072}[/latex] = 394.2 ml

Question 9.
Why do gases always tend to be less soluble in liquids as the temperature is raised?
Answer:
Gas dissolved in a liquid is an exothermic reaction (H <O).
According to Lechatelier’s principle,

  • If the reaction is exothermic the solubility of gas, decrease with increases in temperature.
  • So gases always tend to be less soluble in liquids to as the temperature is raised.

Question 10.
What is meant by positive deviations from Raoults law and how is the sign of ∆mix H related to positive deviation from Raoult’s law?
Answer:

  • When the vapour pressure of a solution is higher than the predicted value by Raoult’s law, it is called positive deviation.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 9
  • In this case inter molecular interactions between solute and solvent particles (1 and 2) are weaker than those between solute and solvent particles (1 and 2) are weaker than those between solute and solute (1 – 1) and solvent – solvent (2 – 2)
  • Hence the molecules of 1 or 2 will escape more easily from the surface of solution than in their pure state.
    ∴ The vapour pressure of the solution will be higher.
  • The vapour pressure diagram showing positive deviation as follows.
    Eg. : Ethyl alcohol and water, Acetone and benzene.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 11.
What is meant by negative deviation from Raoult’s law and how is the sign of ∆mixH related to negative deviation from Raoult’s law?
Answer:

  • When the vapour pressure of a solution is lower than the predicted value by Raoult’s law, it is called negative deviation.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 10
  • In case of negative deviation the inter molecular attractive forces between 1 – 1 and 2 – 2 are weaker than those between 1 -2.
  • It leads to decrease in vapour pressure resulting in negative deviation.
  • The vapour pressure diagram showing negative deviation as follows.
  • Eg.: HNO3 and water, HCl and water.

Question 12.
The vapour pressure of water is 12.3 k Pa at 300 K. Calculate the vapour pressure of 1 molal solution of a non-volatile solute in it.
Answer:
Given molality of solution = 1 m
Vapour pressure of water P0 = 12.3 kPa
Number of moles of water = [latex]\frac{100}{18}[/latex]
= 55.55 (n0)
Mole fraction of solute (Xs) = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{s}}}{\mathrm{n}_{0}+\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{s}}}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{1}{55.55+1}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{1}{56.55}[/latex] = 0.0177
Mole fraction of water (X0) = 1 – Xs
= 1 – 0.0177 = 0.9823
Vapour pressure of solution (Ps) = P0X0
= 12.3 × 0.9823 = 12.08 kPa

Question 13.
Calculate the mass of a non-volatile solute (molar mass 40g mol-1) which should be dissolved in 114g Octane to reduce its vapour pressure to 80%. [T.S. Mar. 16]
Answer:
Raoult’s law formula
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 11
Given vapour pressure reduced to 80%, when non-volatile solute is dissolved in octane.
P0 = 1 atm
Ps = 0.8 atm
W = 114 gms
M = 114 gm/mole
w = ? ; m = 40
[latex]\frac{\mathrm{P}_{0}-\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{s}}}{\mathrm{P}_{0}}=\frac{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{s}}}{\mathrm{n}_{0}}=\frac{\mathrm{w}}{\mathrm{m}} \times \frac{\mathrm{M}}{\mathrm{W}}[/latex]
[latex]\frac{1-0.8}{1}=\frac{w}{40} \times \frac{114}{114}[/latex]
w = 8 gms

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 14.
A 5% solution (by mass) of cane sugar in water has freezing point of 271K. Calculate the freezing point of 5% glucose in water If freezing point of water is 273.15 K.
Answer:
Given 5% solution of cane sugar
w = 5gms; W = 95gms
m = 342; ∆Tf = 273.15 – 271 = 2.15
∆Tf = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{f}} \times \mathrm{w}}{\mathrm{m} \times \mathrm{W}}[/latex]
2.15 =[latex]\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{f}} \times 5}{342 \times 95}[/latex] ……………… (1)
5% solution of glucose
w = 5gms; W = 95gms
m = 180, ∆Tf = ?
∆Tf = [latex]\frac{K_{f} \times 5}{180 \times 95}[/latex] ………………… (2)
Dividing equation (2) by Equation (1)
[latex]\frac{\Delta \mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{f}}}{2.15}=\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{f}} \times 5}{180 \times 95} \times \frac{342 \times 95}{\mathrm{~K}_{\mathrm{f}} \times 5}[/latex]
∆Tf = [latex]\frac{342 \times 2.15}{180}[/latex] = 4.085 K
∴ The freezing point temperature for 5% glucose solution
= 273.15 – 4.085 = 269.07 K

Question 15.
If the osmotic pressure of glucose solution is 1.52 bar at 300 K. What would be its concentration if R = 0.083L bar mol-1 K-1 ?
Answer:
π = CRT
R = 0.0836.bar. mole-1 K-1
T = 300 K
π = 1.52 bar
C = [latex]\frac{\pi}{\mathrm{RT}}=\frac{1.52}{0.083 \times 300}=\frac{1.52}{24.9}[/latex] = 0.061 M

Question 16.
Vapour pressure of of water at 293K is 17.535 mm Hg. Calculate the vapour pressure of the solution at 293K when 25g of glucose is dissolved in 450g of water? [A.P. Mar.19]
Answer:
Raoult1s law formula
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 12

Question 17.
How is molar mass related to the elevation in boiling point of a solution?
Answer:
The expression for elevation of boiling point is
∆Tb = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{b}} \times 1000 \times \mathrm{w}}{\mathrm{m} \times \mathrm{w}}[/latex] = Kb = molal elevation constant
w = Weight of solute
W = Weight of solvent
m = molar mass of solute
Molar mass of solute m = [latex]\frac{K_{\mathrm{b}} \times 1000 \times \mathrm{w}}{\Delta \mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{b}} \times \mathrm{w}}[/latex]
∴ Molar mass of solute (m) and elevation of boiling point (∆Tb) are inversely related.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 18.
What is an ideal solution ?
Answer:
A solution of two or mote components which obeys Raoult’s law at all concentrations and at all temperatures is called ideal Solution. In ideal solution there should not be any association between solute and solvent, (i.e.) no chemical interaction between solute and solvent of solution.
Ex : The following mixtures form ideal solutions.

  • Benzene + Toluene
  • n – hexane + n – heptane
  • ethyl bromide + ethyl iodide

Question 19
What is relative lowering of vapour pressure ? How is it useful to determine the molar mass of a solute ? [T.S. Mar. 15]
Answer:
Raoult’s law for volatile solute: For a solution of volatile liquids, the partial vapour pressure of each component of the solution is directly proportional to its mole fraction present in solution.

Raoult’s law for non-volatile solute : The relative lowering of vapour pressure of dilute solution containing non-volatile solute is equal to the mole fraction of solute.

Relative lowering of vapour pressure [latex]\frac{\mathrm{P}_{0}-\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{s}}}{\mathrm{P}_{0}}[/latex] = Xs (mole fraction of solute)
[latex]\frac{\mathrm{P}_{0}-\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{s}}}{\mathrm{P}_{0}}=\frac{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{s}}}{\mathrm{n}_{0}+\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{s}}}[/latex]
For very much dilute solutions ns < < < …………… n0
∴ [latex]\frac{\mathrm{P}_{0}-\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{s}}}{\mathrm{P}_{0}}=\frac{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{s}}}{\mathrm{n}_{0}}=\frac{\mathrm{w}}{\mathrm{m}} \times \frac{\mathrm{M}}{\mathrm{W}}[/latex]
W = Weight of solute
w = Weight of solvent
m = Molar mass of solute
M = Molar mass of solvent
Molar mass of solute m = [latex]\frac{W \times M}{W} \times \frac{P_{0}}{P_{0}-P_{s}}[/latex]

Question 20.
How is molar mass related to the depression in freezing point of a solution ?
Answer:
The expression for depression in Freezing point is
∆Tf = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{f}} \times 1000 \times \mathrm{w}}{\mathrm{m} \times \mathrm{W}}[/latex]
Kf = molal depression constant
W = Weight of solvent
w = Weight of solute
m = molar mass of solute
Molar mass of solute (m) = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{f}} \times 1000 \times \mathrm{w}}{\Delta \mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{f}} \times \mathrm{W}}[/latex]
∴ Molar mass ôf solute (m) and depression in freezing point (∆Tf) are inversely related.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
An aqueous solution of 2% non volatile solute exerts a pressure of 1.004 bar at the normal boiling point of the solvent. What is the molecular mass of the solute ?
Answer:
Relative lowering of vapour pressure = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{P}_{0}-\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{s}}}{\mathrm{P}_{0}}=\frac{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{s}}}{\mathrm{n}_{0}}[/latex]
P0 = 1.013 bar, Ps = 1.004 bar
w = 2gms
W = 98gms
M = 18
m = ?
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 13

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 2.
Heptane and Octane form an ideal solution. At 373 K the vapour pressure of the two liquid components are 105.2 kPa and 46.8 kPa respectively. What will be the vapour pressure of a mixture of 26.0 g heptane and 35g of octane?
Answer:
Number of moles of octane n0 = [latex]\frac{\text { Weight }}{\text { GMwt }}=\frac{35}{114}[/latex] = 0.307
Number of moles of heptane ns = [latex]\frac{\text { Weight }}{\text { GMwt }}=\frac{26}{100}[/latex] = 0.26
no 0.307
Mole fraction of octane X0 = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{n}_{0}}{\mathrm{n}_{0}+\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{s}}}=\frac{0.307}{0.307+0.26}[/latex] = 0.541
Mole fraction of heptane Xs = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{s}}}{\mathrm{n}_{0}+\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{s}}}=\frac{0.26}{0.307+0.26}[/latex] = 0.459
Given vapour pressure of heptane P1 = 105.2 kPa
vapour pressure of Octane P2 = 46.8 kPa
26 gms of heptane and 35 gms of octane are mixed.
In that mixture
The vapour pressure of heptane (P11) = P1 × Xs
= 105.2 × 0.459 = 48.28 kPa
The vapour pressure of Octane (P22) = P2 × X0
= 46.8 × 0.541
= 25.32 kPa
Total pressure of the mixture (P) = P11 + P22
= 25.32 + 48.28
= 73.6 kPa

Question 3.
A solution containing 30g of non-volatile solute exactly in 90g of water has a vapour pressure of 2.8 kPa at 298 K. Further 18g of water is then added to the solution and the new vapour pressure becomes 2.9 kPa at 298 K. Calculate (i) The molar mass of the solute and (ii) Vapour pressure of water at 298 K.
Answer:
Calculation of molar mass of solute
Case – I:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 14
Case – II :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 15
Calculation of vapour pressure of water :
According to Raoult’s law
PA = [latex]\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{A}}^{0} \mathrm{X}_{\mathrm{A}}[/latex]
2.8 = [latex]P_{A}^{0} \times \frac{M}{6+M}[/latex]
M = 23
2.8 = [latex]\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{A}}^{0} \times \frac{23}{6+23}[/latex]
[latex]\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}=\frac{2.8 \times 29}{23}=\frac{81.2}{23}[/latex] = 3.53 k.pa

Question 4.
Two elements A and B from compounds having formula AB2 and AB4. When dissolved in 20g of Benzene (C6H6), 1g of AB2 lowers the freezing point by 2.3 K whereas 1.0g of AB4 lowers it by 1.3 K. The molar depression constant for benzene is 5.1 K kg mol-1. Calculate atomic masses of A and B.
Answer:
Calculation of molecular masses of compounds AB2 and AB4
For AB2 compounds
m = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{f}} \times 1000 \times \mathrm{W}}{\Delta \mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{f}} \times \mathrm{W}}=\frac{5.1 \times 1000 \times 1}{2.3 \times 20}[/latex] = 110.87 gms/mole
For AB4 compound
m = [latex]\frac{5.1 \times 1000 \times 1}{1: 3 \times 20}[/latex] = 196.15 gms/mole
Calculation of the atomic masses of elements
Atomic mass of element A = x
Atomic mass of element B = y
Molecular mass of AB2 = x + 2y
Molecular mass of AB4 = x + 4y
a + 2b = 110.87 ……………….. (1)
a + 4b = 196.15 ………………. (2)
Equation (2) – Eqiation (1)
x + 4y – x – 2y
196.15 – 110.87
2y = 85.28
y = 42.64
x + 2y = 110.87
x + 85.28 = 110.87
x = 25.59
Atomic mass of element A = 25.59 u
B = 42.64 u

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 5.
Calculate the depression in the freezing point of water when 10g of CH3CH2CHClCOOH is added to 250g of water. Ka = 1.4 × 10-3, Kf = 1.86 K kg mol-1.
Answer:
Calculation of degree of dissociation :
Mass of solute = 10 gms
Molar mass of solute (CH3 – CH2 – CH – Cl – COOH) = 122.5 g/mole
Molality = [latex]\frac{10}{122.5} \times \frac{1000}{250}[/latex] = 0.326 m
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 16
Calculation of depression in freezing point
∆Tf = i × Kf × m = 1.065 × 1.86 × 0.326 = 0.65 K

Question 6.
19.5g of CH2FCOOH is dissolved in 500g of water. The depression In freezing point of water observed is 1.0°C. Calculate the Van’t Hoff factor and dissociation constant of fluoroacetic acid.
Answer:
Calculation of Vant Hoff factor of acid:
∆Tf = 1°C
Kf = 1.86 K kg/mole-1
∆Tf = i Kf m
m = [latex]\frac{19.5}{78} \times \frac{1000}{500}[/latex] = 0.5 m
i = [latex]\frac{1}{1.86 \times 0.5}[/latex] = 1.0753
Calculation of degree of dissociation of the acid :
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 17

Question 7.
100 g of liquid A(molar mass 140g mol-1) was dissolved in 1000 g of liquid B(molar mass 180g mol-1). The vapour pressure of pure liquid B was found to be 500 torr. Calculate the vapour pressure of pure liquid A and its vapour pressure in the solution if the total vapour pressure of the solution is 475 torr.
Answer:
Calculation of vapour pressure of pure liquid A ([latex]\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}[/latex])
Number of moles of liquid A
nA = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{w}}{\mathrm{m}}=\frac{100}{140}[/latex] = 0.7143
Number of moles of liquid B
nB = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{w}}{\mathrm{m}}=\frac{1000}{180}[/latex] = 5.5556
Mole fraction of A
XA = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{A}}}{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{A}}+\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{B}}}=\frac{0.7143}{0.7143+5.5556}=\frac{0.7143}{6.2699}[/latex]
= 0.1139
Mole fraction of B (XB) = 1 – 0.1139 = 0.8861
Vapour pressure of liquid ([latex]\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{B}}^{0}[/latex]) = 500 torr
Total vapour pressure of solution (P) = 475 torr
According to Raoult’s law
P = P[latex]\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}[/latex] XA + P[latex]\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{B}}^{0}[/latex] XB
475 = P[latex]\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}[/latex] (0.1139) + 500(0.8861)
475 = P[latex]\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}[/latex] (0.1139) + 443.05
[latex]\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}[/latex] = [latex]\frac{475-443.05}{0.1139}=\frac{31.95}{0.1139}[/latex] = 280.5 torr
Calculation of vapour pressure of A in the solution (PA)
PA = P[latex]\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}[/latex] XA = 280.5 × 0.1139
PA = 32 torr.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 8.
Determine the amount of CaCl2 (i = 2.47) dissolved in 2.5 litre of water such that its osmotic pressure is 0.75 atm at 27°C.
Answer:
Varit Hoffs equation
Osmotic pressure (π) = i CRT
i = 2.47 .
V = 2.5 lit
R = 0.0821 lit. atm.k-1. mol-1
T = 27 + 273 = 300 K
π = 0.75 atm
π = i([latex]\frac{n_{B}}{V}[/latex])RT
nB = [latex]\frac{\pi \mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{iRT}}=\frac{0.75 \times 2.5}{2.47 \times 0.0821 \times 300}[/latex] = 0.0308
The amount of CaCl2 dissolved = nB × mB
= 0.0308 × 111 = 3.42 gms

Question 9.
Determine the osmotic pressure of a solution prepared by dissolving 25 mg of K2SO4 in two litre of water at 25°C assuming that it is completely dissociated.
Answer:
The amount of K2SO4 dissolved = 25 mg
Volume = 2 lit; T = 25°C = 298 K
Molecular weight of K2SO4 = 174 gms / mole
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 18
Total ions produced on dissociation = 3
i = 3
π = i CRT = [latex]\mathrm{i}\left(\frac{\mathrm{n}}{\mathrm{V}}\right) \mathrm{RT}=\mathrm{i}\left(\frac{\mathrm{w}}{\mathrm{m}}\right) \times \frac{\mathrm{RT}}{\mathrm{V}}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{3 \times 0.025 \times 0.0821 \times 298}{174 \times 2}[/latex] = 5.27 × 10-3 atm.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 10.
Benzene and Toluene form ideal solution over the entire range of composition. The vapour pressure of pure benzene and toluene at 300 K are 50.71 mm of Hg and 32.06 mm of Hg respectively. Calculate the mole fraction of benzene in vapour phase if 80g of benzene is mixed with 100g of toluene.
Answer:
Molecular weight of benzene (C6H6) = 78
Molecular weight of Toluene (C7H8) = 92
nC6H6 = [latex]\frac{80}{78}[/latex] = 1.026
nC7H8= [latex]\frac{100}{92}[/latex] = 1.087
XC6H6 = [latex]\frac{1.026}{1.026+1.087}=\frac{1.026}{2.113}[/latex] = 0.4855
XC7H8 = 1 – 0.4855 = 0.5145
According to Raoult’s law
Partial pressure of benzene in solution
PC6H6 = PC6H6 × XC6H6
= 50.71 × 0.4855 = 24.61 mm
Partial pressure of Toluene in solution
PGH8 = AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 19 × XC7H8 = 32.06 × 0.5145 = 16.49 mm
Total vapour pressure of solution (P) = 24.61 + 16.49 = 41.1 mm
Mole fraction of benzene in vapour phase is
= [latex]\frac{\mathrm{X}_{\mathrm{C}_{6} \mathrm{H}_{6}} \times \mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{C}_{6} \mathrm{H}_{6}}^{0}}{\mathrm{P}_{\text {total }}}=\frac{0.4855 \times 50.71}{41.1}=\frac{24.61}{41.1}[/latex] = 0.5987

Textual Examples

Question 1.
Calculate the mole fraction of ethylene glycol (C2H6O2) In a solution containing 20% of C2H6O2 by mass.
Solution:
Assume that we have 100g of solution (one can start with any amount of solution because the results obtained will be the same). Solution will contain 20g of ethylene glycol and 80g of water.
Molar mass of C2H6O2 = 12 × 2 + 1 × 6 + 16 × 2 = 62 g mol-1
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 20

Question 2.
Calculate the molarity of a solution containing 5g of NaOH in 500 mL solution. [T.S Mar.17]
Solution:
Moles of NaOH = [latex]\frac{5 \mathrm{~g}}{40 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}[/latex] = 0.125 mol
Volume of the solution in litres = 450 mL / 1000 mL L-1
Using equation
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 21
= 0.278 mol L-1 = 0.278 mol dm-3

Question 3.
Calculate molality of 2.5 of ethanoic acid (CH3COOH) In 75g of benzene. [T.S. Mar. 15]
Solution:
Molar mass of C2H4O2: 12 × 2 + 1 × 4 + 16 × 2 = 60g mol-1
Moles of C2H4O2 = [latex]\frac{2.5 \mathrm{~g}}{60 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}[/latex] = 0.0417 mol
Mass of benzene in kg = 75g/1000 g kg-1 = 75 × 10-3 kg
Molality of C2H4O2 = [latex]\frac{\text { Moles of } \mathrm{C}_{2} \mathrm{H}_{4} \mathrm{O}_{2}}{\mathrm{~kg} \text { of benzene }}=\frac{0.0417 \times \mathrm{mol} \times 1000 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~kg}^{-1}}{75 \mathrm{~g}}[/latex]
= 0.556 mol kg-1

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 4.
If N2 gas is bubbled through water at 293 K, how many mililmoles of N2 gas would dissolve in 1 litre of water ? Assume that N2 exerts a partial pressure of 0.987 bar. Given that Henrys law constant for N2 at 293 K is 76.48 k bar.
Solution:
The solubiity of gas is related to the mole fraction in aqueous solution.
The mole fraction of the gas in the solution is calculated by applying Henrys law. Thus:
x (nitrogen) = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{p} \text { (nitrogen) }}{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{H}}}=\frac{0.987 \mathrm{bar}}{76.480 \mathrm{bar}}[/latex] = 1.29 × 10-5
As 1 Litre of water contains 55.5 mol of it, therefore if n represents number of moles of N2 in solution.
x(Nitrogen) = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{n} \mathrm{mol}}{\mathrm{n} \mathrm{mol}+55.5 \mathrm{~mol}}=\frac{\mathrm{n}}{55.5}[/latex] = 1.29 × 10-5
(n in denominator is neglected as it is << 55.5)
Thus n = 1.29 × 10-5 55.5 mol 7.16 × 10-4 mol
= [latex]\frac{7.16 \times 10^{-4} \mathrm{~mol} \times 1000 \mathrm{mmol}}{1 \mathrm{~mol}}[/latex] = 0.716 m mol

Question 5.
Vapour pressure of chloroform (CHCl3) and dichloromethane (CH2Cl2) at 298 K are 200 mm Hg and 415 mm Hg respectively. (i) Calculate the vapour pressure of the solution prepared by mixing 25.5 g of CHCl3 and 40 g of CH2Cl2 at 298 K and (ii) mole fractions of each component in vapour phase.
Solution:
i) Molar mass of CH2Cl2 = 12 × 1 + 1 × 2 + 35.5 × 2 = 85 g mol-1
Molar mass of CHCl3 = 12 × 1 + 1 × 1 +35.5 × 3 = 119.5 g mol-1
Moles of CH2Cl2 = [latex]\frac{40 \mathrm{~g}}{85 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}[/latex] = 0.47 mol
Moles of CHCl3 = [latex]\frac{25.5 \mathrm{~g}}{119.5 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}[/latex] = 0.2 13 mol
Total number of moles = 0.47 + 0.2 13 = 0.683 mol
XCH2Cl2 = [latex]\frac{0.47 \mathrm{~mol}}{0.683 \mathrm{~mol}}[/latex] = 0.688
XCHCl3 = 1.00 – 0.688 = 0.3 12
Using equation :
ptotal = [latex]\mathrm{p}_{1}^{0}+\left(\mathrm{p}_{2}^{0}-\mathrm{p}_{1}^{0}\right)[/latex] x2 = 200 + (415 – 200) × 0.688
= 200 + 147.9 = 347.9mm Hg

ii) Using the relation, y1 = p1/ptotal we can calculate the mole fraction of the components in gas phase (y1)
PCH2Cl2 = 0.688 × 415 mm Hg = 285.5 mm Hg
PCHCl3 = 0.3 12 × 200 mm Hg = 62.4 mm Hg
yCH2Cl2 = 285.5 mm Hg/347.9 mm Hg = 0.82
yCHCl3 = 62.4 mm Hg/347.9 mm Hg = 0.18

Note : Since CH2Cl2 is a more volatile component than CHCl3, [[latex]\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{CH}_{2} \mathrm{Cl}_{2}}^{0}[/latex] = 415 mm Hg and
[latex]\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{CHCl}_{3}}^{0}[/latex] = 200 mm Hg] and the vapour phase is also richer in CH2Cl2 [yCH2Cl2 = 0.82 and yCHCl3 = 0.18], it may thus be concluded that at equilibrium, vapour phase will be always rich in the component which is more volatile.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 6.
The vapour pressure of pure benzene at a certain temperature is 0.850 bar. A non-volatile, non-electrolyte solid weighing 0.5g when added to 39.0 g of benzene (molar mass 78 g mol-1), vapour pressure of the solution, then, is 0.845 bar. What is the molar mass of the solid substance ? [A.P. Mar. 18; 16]
Solution:
The various quantities known to us are as follows.
[latex]\mathrm{p}_{1}^{0}[/latex] = 0.850 bar
P = 0.845bar
M1 = 78 g mol-1
w2 = 0.5 g
w1 = 39 g
Substituting these values in equation [latex]\frac{\mathrm{P}^{0}-\mathrm{P}}{\mathrm{P}_{1}^{0}}=\frac{\mathrm{w}_{2} \times \mathrm{M}_{1}}{\mathrm{M}_{2} \times \mathrm{w}_{1}}[/latex] we get
[latex]\frac{0.850 \mathrm{bar}-0.845 \mathrm{bar}}{0.850 \mathrm{bar}}=\frac{0.5 \mathrm{~g} \times 78 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}{\mathrm{M}_{2} \times 39 \mathrm{~g}}[/latex]
Therefore, M2 = 170 g mol-1.

Question 7.
18g of glucose, C6H12O6, is dissolved in 1 kg of water in a saucepan. At what temperature will water boil at 1.013 bar ? Kb for water is 0.52 K kg mol-1.
Solution:
Moles of glucose = 18g/180 g mol-1 = 0.1 mol
Number of kilograms of solvent = 1 kg
Thus molality of glucose solution = 0.1 mol kg-1
For water, change in boiling point
∆Tb = Kb × m = 0.52 K kg mol-1 × 0.1 mol kg-1 = 0.052 K .
Since water boils at 373.15 K at 1.013 bar pressure, therefore, the boiling point of solution will be 373.15 + 0.052 = 373.202 K.

Question 8.
The boiling point of benzene is 353.23 K. When 1.80 g of a non-volatile solute was dissolved in 90 g of benzene, the boiling point is raised to 354.11 K. Calculate the molar mass of the solute. Kb for benzene is 2.53 K kg mol-1.
Solution:
The elevation of (∆Tb) in.the boiling point = 354.11 K – 353.23 K. = 0.88 K
Substituting these values in expression we get, M2 = [latex]\frac{1000 \times \mathrm{w}_{2} \times \mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{b}}}{\Delta \mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{b}} \times \mathrm{w}_{1}}[/latex]
M2 = [latex]\frac{2.53 \mathrm{~K} \mathrm{~kg} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1} \times 1.8 \mathrm{~g} \times 1000 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~kg}^{-1}}{0.88 \mathrm{~K} \times 90 \mathrm{~g}}[/latex]
Therefore, molar mass of the solute, M2 = 58 g mol-1.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 9.
45 g of ethylene glycol (C2H6O2) is mixed with 600 g of water. Calculate (a) the freezing point depression and (b) the freezing point of the solution.
Solution:
Depression in freezing point is related to the molality, therefore, the molality of the solution with respect to ethylene glycol = [latex]\frac{\text { moles of ethylene glycol }}{\text { mass of water in kilogram }}[/latex]
Moles of ethylene glycol = [latex]\frac{45 \mathrm{~g}}{62 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}[/latex] = 0.73 mol
Mass of water in kg = [latex]\frac{600 \mathrm{~g}}{1000 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~kg}^{-1}}[/latex] = 0.6 kg
Hence molality of ethylene glycol = [latex]\frac{0.73 \mathrm{~mol}}{0.60 \mathrm{~kg}}[/latex] = 1.2 mol kg-1
Therefore freezing point depression,
∆Tf = 1.86 K kg mol-1 × 1.2 mol kg-1 = 2.2 K
Freezing point of the aqueous solution 273.15 K – 2.2 K = 270.95 K

Question 10.
1.00 g of a non-electrolyte solute dissolved in 50g of benzene lowered the freezing point of benzene by 0.40 K. The freezing point depression constant of benzene is 5.12 K kg mol-1. Find the molar mass of the solute.
Solution:
Substituting the values of various terms involved in equation
M2 = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{f}} \times \mathrm{w}_{2} \times 1000}{\Delta \mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{f}} \times \mathrm{w}_{1}}[/latex] we get
M2 = [latex]\frac{5.12 \mathrm{~K} \mathrm{~kg} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1} \times 1.00 \mathrm{~g} \times 1000 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~kg}^{-1}}{0.40 \times 50 \mathrm{~g}}[/latex] = 256 g mol-1
Thus, molar mass of the solute = 256 g mol-1

Question 11.
200 cm3 of an aqueous solution of a protein contains 1.26 g of the protein. The osmotiç pressure of such a solution at 300 K is found to be 2.57 × 10-3 bar. Calculate the molar mass of the protein.
Solution:
The various quantities known to us are as follows : π = 2.57 × 10-3 bar.
V = 200 cm3 = 0.200 litre
T = 300K
R = 0.083 L bar mol-1 K-1
Substituting these values in equation,
we get M2 = [latex]\frac{w_{2} R T}{\pi V}[/latex]
M2 = [latex]\frac{1.26 \mathrm{~g} \times 0.083 \mathrm{~L} \mathrm{bar} \mathrm{K}^{-1} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1} \times 300 \mathrm{~K}}{2.57 \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{bar} \times 0.200 \mathrm{~L}}[/latex]
= 61.022 g mol-1

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 12.
2 g of benzoic acid (C6H5COOH) dissolved in 25g of benzene shows a depression in freezing point equal to 1.62 K. Molal depression constant for benzene is 4.9 K kg mol-1. What is the percentage association of acid if it forms dimer in solution ?
Solution:
The given quantities are :
w2 = 2g; Kf = 4.9 K kg mol-1; w1 = 25 g
∆Tf = 1.62 K
Substituting these values, in equation, we get:
M2 = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{f}} \times \mathrm{w}_{2} \times 1000}{\Delta \mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{f}} \times \mathrm{w}_{1}}[/latex]
M2 = [latex]\frac{4.9 \mathrm{~K} \mathrm{~kg} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1} \times 2 \mathrm{~g} \times 1000 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~kg}^{-1}}{25 \mathrm{~g} \times 1.62 \mathrm{~K}}[/latex] = 241.98 g mol-1
Thus, experimental molar mass of benzoic acid in benzene is = 241.98 g mol-1
Now consider the following equilibrium for the acid :
2 C6H5COOH ⇌ (C6H5COOH)2
If x represents the degree of association of the solute then we would have (1 – x) mol of benzoic acid left in unassociated form and correspondingly [latex]\frac{x}{2}[/latex] as associated moles of benzoic acid at equilibrium.
Therefore, total number of particles at equilibrium is :
1 – x + [latex]\frac{x}{2}[/latex] = 1 – [latex]\frac{x}{2}[/latex].
Thus, total number of moles of particles at equilibrium equals van’t Hoff factor i.
But i = [latex]\frac{\text { Normal molar mass }}{\text { Abnormal molar mass }}=\frac{122 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}{241.98 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}[/latex]
or = [latex]\frac{x}{2}[/latex] = 1 – [latex]\frac{122}{241.98}[/latex] = 1 – 0.504 = 0.496
or x = 2 × 0.496 = 0.992
Therefore, degree of association of benzoic acid in benzene is 99.2%.

Question 13.
0.6 mL of acetic acid (CH3COOH), having density 1.06 g mL-1, is dissolved in 1 litre of water. The depression in freezing point observed for this strength of acid was 0.0205°C. Calculate the van’t Hoff factor and the dissociation constant of acid.
Answer:
Number of moles of acetic acid = [latex]\frac{0.6 \mathrm{~mL} \times 1.06 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mL}^{-1}}{60 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}[/latex]
= 0.0106 mol = n
Molality = [latex]\frac{0.0106 \times \mathrm{mol}}{1000 \mathrm{~mL} \times 1 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mL}^{-1}}[/latex] = 0.0106 mol kg-1
Using equation ∆Tf = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{f}} \times \mathrm{w}_{2} \times 1000}{\mathrm{M}_{2} \times \mathrm{w}_{1}}[/latex]
∆Tf = 1.86 K kg mol-1 × 0.0106 mol kg-1 = 0.0197 K
van’t Hoff factor (i) = [latex]\frac{\text { Observed freezing point }}{\text { Calculated freezing point }}=\frac{0.0205 \mathrm{~K}}{0.0197 \mathrm{~K}}[/latex] = 1.041
Acetic acid is a weak electrolyte and will dissociate into two ions: acetate and hydrogen ions per molecule of acetic acid. If x is the degree of dissociation of acetic acid, then we would have n (1 — X) moles of undissociated acetic acid, mc moles of CH3COO and nx moles of H+ ions.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 22

Intext Questions

Question 1.
Calculate the mass percentage of benzene (C6H6) and carbon tetrachlodie (CCl4) if 22g of benzene is dissolved in 122g of carbon tetrachioride.
Then, calculate the mass percentage from the formula
Mass % = AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 23 × 100
Solution:
Mass of benzene = 22g; Mass of CCl4 = 122g
Mass of solution = 22 + 122 = 144g
Mass % of benzene = [latex]\frac{22}{144}[/latex] × 100 = 15.28%
Mass of CCl4 = 100 – 15.28 = 84.72%
Note: Mass percent of CCl4 can also be calculated by using the formula as:
Mass % of CCCl4 = [latex]\frac{122}{144}[/latex] × 100 = 84.72%

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 2.
Calculate the mole fraction of benzene in solution containing 30% by mass in carbon tetrachloride.
• Then calculate the mole fraction by using the formula
Mole fraction of a component = [latex]\frac{\text { Number of moles of the component }}{\text { Total number of moles of all components }}[/latex]
xA = [latex]\frac{\mathbf{n}_{\mathbf{A}}}{\mathbf{n}_{\mathbf{A}}+\mathbf{n}_{\mathbf{B}}}[/latex]
Solution:
For 100 g of the solution
Mass of benzene = 30 g
Mass of carbon tetrachioride = 100 – 30 = 70g
Molar mass of benzene (C6H6) (12 × 6) + (6 × 1) = 72 + 6 = 78 g mol-1
Moles of benzene, nC6H6 = [latex]\frac{\text { Mass }}{\text { Molar mass }}=\frac{30}{78}[/latex] = 0385 mol
Molar mass of carbon tetrachioride (CCl4) = 12 + (35.5 × 4)
= 12 + 142.0 = 154 g mol-1
Moles of CCl4,nCCl4 = [latex]\frac{70 \mathrm{~g}}{\left(154 \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}\right)}[/latex] = (154 mol-1)
Mole fraction of benzene, XC6H6 = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{C}_{6} \mathrm{H}_{6}}}{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{C}_{6} \mathrm{H}_{6}}+\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{CC}_{4}}}=\frac{0.385 \mathrm{~mol}}{(0.385+0.454) \mathrm{mol}}[/latex] = 0.459

Question 3.
Calculate the molarity of each of the following solution:
a) 30g of CO(NH3)2. 6H2O in 4.3 L of solution.
b) 30 mL of 0.5 MH2SO4 diluted to 500 mL.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 24
So, first find molar mass by adding atomic masses of different elements, then find moles of solute and then molarity.
b)Use molarity equation for dilution.
M1V1
(Before dilution)
M2V2
(After dilution)
Solution:
a) Molar mass of CO(NO3)2. 6H2O = (58.7) + 2(14 + 48) + (6 × 18) g mol-1
= 58.7 + 124 + 108 = 290.7 = 291g mol-1
Mole of CO(NO3)2 6 H2O = [latex]\frac{30 \mathrm{~g}}{291 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}[/latex] = 0.103
Volume of solution = 4.3 L
Molarity (M) = [latex]\frac{0.103 \mathrm{~mol}}{4.3 \mathrm{~L}}[/latex] = 0.024 mol L-1 = 0.024 M

b) Volume of undiluted H2SO4 solution (V1) = 30 mL
Molarity of undiluted H2SO4 solution (M1) = 0.5 M
Volume of diluted H2SO4 solution (V2) = 500 mL
We know that M1V1 = M2V2
∴ M2 = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{M}_{1} \mathrm{~V}_{1}}{\mathrm{~V}_{2}}=\frac{(0.5 \mathrm{M})(30 \mathrm{~mL})}{500 \mathrm{~mL}}[/latex] = 0.03 M

Question 4.
Calculate the mass of urea (NH2CONH2) required in making 2.5 kg of 0.25 molar aqueous solution.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 25
So, find the molar mass of solute by adding atomic masses of different element present in it and mass by using the formula,
Molality = AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 26
Mass of solvent in kg
Solution:
Molality of the solution = 0.25 m = 0.25 mol kg-1
Molar mass of urea (NH2CONH2) = (14 × 2) + (1 × 4) + 12 + 16
= 60 g mol-1
Mass of solvent (water) = 2.5 kg
Molality = AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 26
(0.25 mol kg-1) = [latex]\frac{\text { Mass of urea }}{\left(60 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}\right) \times(2.5 \mathrm{~kg})}[/latex]
Mass of urea = (0.25 mol kg-1) × (60 g mol-1) × (2.5 kg) = 37.5 g

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 5.
Calculate a) molality b) molarity and c) mole fraction of KI if the density of 20% (mass / mass) aqueous Kl is 1.202 g mL-1.
• As density and % by mass is given, so find the mass of solute and solvent (as x % solution contains x g solute in (100 – x) g solvent).
Find volume of the solution, by using,
Volume = [latex]\frac{\text { Mass }}{\text { Density }}[/latex]
Recall the formulae of molality, molarity and mole fraction, to calculate them.
Molality = AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 27
Solution:
a) Molality
Weight of KI in 100 g of water = 20 g
Weight of water in the solution = 100 – 20 = 80 g = 0.08 kg
Molar mass of KI = 39 + 127 = 166 g mol-1
Molarity of the solution (m) = [latex]\frac{\text { Number of moles of KI }}{\text { Mass of water in } \mathrm{kg}}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{(20 \mathrm{~g}) /\left(166 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}\right)}{(0.08 \mathrm{~kg})}[/latex] = 1.506 mol kg-1 = 1.506 m

b) Molarity
Weight of the solution = 100 g
Density of the solution = 1.202g m-1
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 28

c) Mole fraction of KI
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 29

Question 6.
H2S, a toxic gas with rotten egg like smell, is used for the qualitative analysis. If the solubility of H2S in water at STP is 0.195m, calculate Henry’s law constant.
Solution:
a) Calculation of mole fraction of H2S 0.195 m means that 0.195 mole of H2S are dissolves in 1000 g of water.
Number of moles of water in 1000g, (nH2O) = [latex]\frac{(1000 \mathrm{~g})}{\left(18 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}\right)}[/latex] = 55.55 mol
Mole fraction H2S (xH2S) = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{~s}}}{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{~s}}+\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}}}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{(0.195 \mathrm{~mol})}{(0.195+55.55) \mathrm{mol}}=\frac{(0.195 \mathrm{~mol})}{(55.745 \mathrm{~mol})}[/latex] = 0.0035

b) Calculation of Henry’s law constant:
According to Henry’s law
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 30

Question 7.
Henrys law constant for CO2 in water is 1.67 × 108 Pa at 298 K. Calculate the quantity of CO2 in 500 mL of soda water when packed under 2.5 atm CO2 pressure at’298 K.
Solution:
Step I : Calculation of number of moles of CO2
According to Henrys law,
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 31
nCO2 = xCO2 × (27.78 mol) (1.52 10-3) × (27.78 mol) = 0.0422 mol
Note: nCO2 is considered negligible due to its little solubility in water.
Step II : Calculation of mass of dissolved CO2 in water
Mass of CO2 = No. of moles CO2 × Molar mass of CO2
= (0.0422 mol) × (44 g mol-1) = 1.857 g

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 8.
The vapour pressure of pure liquids A and B are 450 and 700 mm Hg respectively, at 350 K. Find out the composition of the liquid mixture if total vapour pressure is 600 mm Hg. Also find the composition of the vapour phase.
. Apply Raoults law pT = [latex]\mathbf{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^{0} \mathbf{x}_{\mathrm{A}}+\mathbf{p}_{\mathrm{B}}^{0} \mathbf{x}_{\mathrm{B}}=\mathbf{p}_{\mathrm{B}}^{0} \mathbf{x}_{\mathrm{A}}+\mathbf{p}_{\mathrm{B}}^{0}\left(1-\mathbf{x}_{\mathrm{A}}\right)[/latex] to calculate mole fraction of A(xA) and B(xB).
In vapour phase, partial pressure are used instead of number of moles.
Solution:
Step I: ComposItion In liquid phase
Vapour pressure of pure liquid A ([latex]p_{A}^{0}[/latex]) = 450 mm
Vapour pressure of pure liquid B ([latex]p_{B}^{0}[/latex]) = 700 mm
Total vapour pressure of the solution (p) = 600 mm
According to Raoult’s law,
p = [latex]\mathbf{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^{0} \mathbf{x}_{\mathrm{A}}+\mathbf{p}_{\mathrm{B}}^{0} \mathbf{x}_{\mathrm{B}}=\mathbf{p}_{\mathrm{B}}^{0} \mathbf{x}_{\mathrm{A}}+\mathbf{p}_{\mathrm{B}}^{0}\left(1-\mathbf{x}_{\mathrm{A}}\right)[/latex]
(600 mm) = 450 mm × xA + 700 mm (1 – xA)
=700 mm + xA + (450 – 700)mm
= 700 – xA (250 mm)
xA = [latex]\frac{(600-700)}{-(250 \mathrm{~mm})}[/latex] = 0.40
Mole fraction of A(xA) = 0.40
Molefraction of B(xB) = 1 – 0.40 = 0.60

Step II: Composition in vapour phase
PA = [latex]\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^{0} \mathrm{x}_{\mathrm{A}}[/latex] = (450 mm) × 0.40 = 180 mm
PB = [latex]\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{B}}^{0} \mathrm{x}_{\mathrm{B}}[/latex] = (700 mm) × 0.60 = 420 mm
Mole fraction of A in vapour phase = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{A}}}{\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{A}}+\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{B}}}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{(180) \mathrm{mm}}{(180+420) \mathrm{mm}}[/latex] = 0.30
Mole fraction of B in vapour phase = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{A}}+\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{B}}}=\frac{(420) \mathrm{mm}}{(180+420) \mathrm{mm}}[/latex] = 0.70

Question 9.
Vapour pressure of pure water at 298 K Is 23.8 mm Hg. 50g urea (NH2CONH2) is dissolved in 850 g of water. Calculate the vapour pressure of water for this solution and Its relative lowering.
Consider Raoult’s law and formula for relative lowering in vapour pressure,
[latex]\frac{\mathbf{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}-\mathbf{p}_{\mathrm{s}}}{\mathbf{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}}=\frac{\mathbf{n}_{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathbf{n}_{\mathrm{A}}}=\frac{\mathbf{W}_{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathbf{M}_{\mathrm{B}}} \times \frac{\mathbf{M}_{\mathrm{A}}}{\mathbf{W}_{\mathrm{A}}}[/latex]
Where, [latex]\frac{\mathbf{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}-\mathbf{p}_{\mathrm{s}}}{\mathbf{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}}[/latex] is called relative lowering in vapour pressure.
Solution:
Step I : Calculation of vapour pressure of water for this solution.
According to Raoult’s law,
[latex]\frac{\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}-\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{s}}}{\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}}=\frac{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{A}}}=\frac{\mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{B}} / \mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{A}} / \mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{A}}}=\frac{\mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{B}}} \times \frac{\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{A}}}{\mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{A}}}[/latex] ………………. (1)
(Pure water) [latex]\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}[/latex] = 23.8 mm;
WB (urea) = 50 g; WA (water) = 850 g
MB (urea) = 60 g mol-1; MA (water) = 180 g mol-1
Placing the values in eq. (i)
[latex]\frac{\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}-\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{s}}}{\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}}=\frac{(50 \mathrm{~g}) \times\left(18 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}\right)}{\left(60 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}\right) \times(850 \mathrm{~g})}=0.01762[/latex]
[latex]\frac{23.8-\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{s}}}{238}[/latex] = 0.01762; 23.8 – ps = 0.4194
ps = 23.3806 ≈ 23.38 mm Hg

Step II : Calculation of relative lowering of vapour pressure
Relative lowering in vapour pressure = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}-\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{s}}}{\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}}=\frac{(23.8-23.38) \mathrm{mm}}{(23.8 \mathrm{~mm})}[/latex] = 0.0176

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 10.
Boiling point of water 750 mm Hg is 99.63°C. How much sucrose is to be added to 500 g of water such that it boils at 100°C.
[Kb for water is 0.52 K kg mol-1]
i) Since boiling point is changing, apply the formula for elevation In boiling point,
∆Tb = Kbm
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 32
iii) Find ∆Tb as ∆Tb = Tb = Tb – [latex]T_{b}^{0}[/latex]
Tb = Boiling point of solution
Tb = Boiling point of pure solvent
Solution:
Mass of water (WA) = 500 g = 0.5 kg
Elevation in boiling point (∆Tb) = 100°C – 99.63°C = 037°C = 0.37 K
Molal elevation constant (Kb) = 0.52 K kg mol-1
Molar mass sucrose C12H22O11
(MB) = (12 × 12) + (22 × 1) + (16 × 11)
= 342 g mol-1
WB = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{B}} \times \Delta \mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{B}} \times \mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{A}}}{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{b}}}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{\left(342 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}\right) \times(0.37 \mathrm{~K}) \times(0.5 \mathrm{~kg})}{\left(0.52 \mathrm{~K} \mathrm{~kg} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}\right)}[/latex] = 121.7 g

Question 11.
Calculate the mass of ascorbic acid (Vitamin C, C6H8O6) to be dissolved in 75g of acetic acid to lower its melting point by 1.5°C. Kf = 3.9 K kg mol-1.
. Since, lowering of melting point is given apply the formula for lowering of melting point, i.e.,
∆Tf = Kf.m
∆Tf = [latex]\frac{\mathbf{K}_{f} \cdot \mathbf{W}_{\mathbf{B}}}{\mathbf{M}_{\mathbf{B}} \times \mathbf{W}_{\mathbf{A}}}[/latex] or WB = [latex]\frac{\Delta \mathbf{T}_{\mathrm{f}^{*}} \mathbf{M}_{\mathrm{B}} \cdot \mathbf{W}_{\mathrm{A}}}{\mathbf{K}_{\mathrm{f}}}[/latex]
Solution:
Mass of ascorbic acid (WA) = 75 g = 0.075 kg
Depression in melting point (∆Tf) = 1.5° C = 1.5 K
Molar mass of ascorbic acid (MB) = (12 × 6) + (8 × 1) + (16 × 6) = 176 g mol-1
Molal depression constant (Kf) = 3.9 K kg mol-1
WB = [latex]\frac{\left(176 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}\right) \times(1.5 \mathrm{~K}) \times(0.075 \mathrm{~kg})}{\left(3.9 \mathrm{~K} \mathrm{~kg} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}\right)}[/latex] = 5.08 g

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 12.
Calculate the osmotic pressure in Pascals exerted by a solution prepared by dissolving 1.0 g of polymer of molar mass 1,85,000 in 450 mL of water at 37°C.
Use the formula for osmotic pressure (π) = CRT and C = [latex]\frac{\mathbf{n}}{\mathbf{V}}[/latex] and n = [latex]\frac{\mathbf{W}_{\mathbf{B}}}{\mathbf{M}_{\mathbf{B}}}[/latex]
Solution:
Mass of polymer (WB) = 1.0 g
Molar mass of polymer (MB) = 185000 g mol-1
Volume of solution (V) = 450 mL = 0.450 L
Temperature (T) = 37 + 273 = 310 K
Solution constant (R) = 8.314 × 103 Pa L K-1 mol-1
Osmotic pressure (π) = CRT
= [latex]\frac{\mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{B}} \times \mathrm{R} \times \mathrm{T}}{\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{B}} \times \mathrm{V}}[/latex]
π = [latex]\frac{(1.0 \mathrm{~g}) \times\left(8.314 \times 10^{3} \mathrm{~Pa} \mathrm{~L} \mathrm{~K}^{-1} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}\right) \times(310 \mathrm{~K})}{\left(185000 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}\right) \times(0.450 \mathrm{~L})}[/latex]
= 30.96 Pa

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 1st Lesson Solid State Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 1st Lesson Solid State

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define the term amorphous.
Answer:
An amorphous (no form) solid is a compound which does not have an orderly arrangement of particles. In amorphous solids, the constituent particles, atoms, and molecules have short-range order only.
E.g.: Glass, rubber, plastics, etc.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 2.
What makes a glass different from quartz?
Answer:

  • Glass is an amorphous solid in which the constituent particles have only a short range order.
  • Quartz is a crystalline form of silica in which constituent particles have long range order.

Question 3.
Classify the following solids as ionic, metallic, molecular, covalent network or amorphous.
i) Si
ii) I2
iii) P4
iv) Rb
v) SiC
vi) LiBr
vii) Ammonium .Phosphate (NH4)3 PO4
viii) Plastic
ix) graphite
x) Tetra phosphorous decoxide
xi) brass
Answer:
i) Si – Covalent network solid
ii) I2 – Molecular solid with covalent bonds
iii) P4 – Molecular solid with covalent bonds ,
iv) Rb – Metallic solid
v) SiC – Giant molecular Network Solid with covalent bonds
vi) LiBr – Ionic solids
vii) Ammonium Phsophate (NH4)3 PO4 – Ionic Solids
viii) Plastic – Amorphous solid
ix) Graphite – Hexagonal network solid with covalent bonds (giant molecule)
x) Tetra phosphorous decoxide (P4O6) – Molecular solid with covalent bonds.
xi) Brass – Metallic solid

Question 4.
What is meant by the term coordination number ?
Answer:
The number of nearest neighbouring particles of a particle is defined as the co-ordination number.
(Or)
The number of nearest oppositely charged ions surrounding a particular ion is also called as co-ordination number.
E.g.: Co-ordination no. of Na+ in NaCl lattice is ‘6’.

Question 5.
What is the co-ordination number of atoms in a cubic close – pack structure ?
Answer:
The co-ordination number of atoms in a cubic close pack structure is ’12’.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 6.
What is the co-ordination number of atoms in a body – centered cubic structure ?
Answer:
The co-ordination number of atoms in a body – centered cubic structure is ‘8’.

Question 7.
Stability of a crystal is reflected in the magnitude of its melting point. Comment.
Answer:
Stability of a crystal is reflected in the magnitude of its melting point.
Explanation :

  • The stability of a crystal mainly depends upon the magnitude of forces of attraction between the constituent particles.
  • As the attractive forces between the constituent particles increases stability of the crystal aslo increases.
  • As the stability of crystal increases melting point of solid will be higher.

Question 8.
How are the intermolecular forces amonj the molecules affect the melting point ?
Answer:

  • As the intermolecular forces between constituent particles of solid increases, stability of the compound increases.
  • As the stability of crystal increases belting point of solid also increases (high).

Question 9.
How do you distinguish between hexagonal close – packing and cubic close – packing structures ?
Answer:
Hexagonal close packing : The spheres of the 3rd layer are exactly aligned with those of first layer. This pattern of spheres is repeated in alternate layers. Tetrahedral voids of the 2nd layer may be covered by the spheres of 3rd layer. This structure is called hexagonal close packed (hep) structure.
Cubic close packing : The spheres of 3rd layer cover the octahedral voids of 2nd layer. But the spheres of 4th layers are aligned with those of first layer. This structure is called cubic close packing.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 10.
How do you distinguish between crystal lattice and unit cell ?
Answer:
Crystal lattice : A regular arrangement of the constituent particles of a crystal in the three dimensional space is called crystal lattice.
Unit cell: The simple unit of crystal lattice which when repeated again and again gives the entire crystal of a given substance is called unit cell.

Question 11.
How many lattice points are there in one unit cell of face centered cubic lattice ?
Answer:
In face centered cubic unit cell.
The number of comer atoms per unit cell.
= 8 comer atoms × [latex]\frac{1}{8}[/latex] atom per unit cell = 8 × [latex]\frac{1}{8}[/latex] =1 atom
Number of face centered atoms per unit cell
= 6 face centered atoms × [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] atom per unit cell
= 6 × [latex]\frac{1}{8}[/latex] = 3 atoms
∴ Total no. of lattice points = 1 + 3 = 4.

Question 12.
How many lattice points are there in one unit cell of face – centered tetragonal lattice ?
Answer:
In face centered tetragonal unit cell
Number of face centered atoms per unit cell
= 6 face centered atoms × [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] atom per unit cell
= 6 × [latex]\frac{1}{2}[/latex] = 3 atoms
∴ Total no. of lattice points = 1 + 3 = 4.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 13.
How many lattice points are there in one unit cell of body centered cubic lattice ?
Answer:
In body – centered cubic unit cell
The number of comer atoms per unit cell
= 8 comers × [latex]\frac{1}{8}[/latex] per comer atom
= 8 × [latex]\frac{1}{8}[/latex] = 1 atom
Number of atoms at body center = 1 × 1 = 1 atom
∴ Total no. of lattice points = 1 + 1 = 2.

Question 14.
What is a semi conductor ?
Answer:
The solids which are having moderate conductivity between insulators and conductors are called semi conductors.
These have the conductivity range from 10-6 to 104 Ohm-1 m-1.
By doping process the conductivity of semi conductors increases.
E.g. : Si, Ge crystal.

Question 15.
What is Schottky defect ?
Answer:
Schottky defect:

  1. It is a point defect in which an atom or ion is missing from its normal site in the lattice”.
  2.  In order to maintain electrical neutrality, the number of missing cations and anions are equal.
  3. This sort of defect occurs mainly in highly ionic compounds, where cationic and anionic sizes are similar.
    In such compounds the co-ordination number in high.
    Ex.: NaCl, CsCl etc.
  4. Illustration:
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 1
  5. This defect decreases the density of the substance.

Question 16.
What is Frenkel defect ?
Answer:
Frenkel defect:

  1. “It is a point defect in which an atom or ion is shifted from its normal lattice position”. The ion or the atom now occupies an interstitial position in the lattice.
  2. This type of a defect is favoured by a large difference in sizes between the cation and anion. In these compounds co-ordination number is low.
    E.g.: Ag – halides, ZnS etc.
  3. Illustration:
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 2
  4. Frenkel defect do not change the density of the solids significantly.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 17.
What is interstitial defect ?
Answer:

  • Some of the constituent particles of solid compound occupy an interstitial site, the crystal is said to have interstitial defect.
  • This defect shown by ionic solid, non-ionic solids which are maintaining electrical neutrality.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 3

Question 18.
What are f – centers ?
Answer:

  • f – centers are the anionic sites occupied by unpaired electrons.
  • These impart colour to cyrstals. This colour is due to the excitation of electrons when they absorb energy from the visible light.
  • f – centres are formed by heating alkyl halide with excess of alkali metal.
    E.g.: NaCl crystals heated in presence of Na – vapour yellow colour is produced due to f – centres.

Question 19.
Explain Ferromagnetism with suitable example.
Answer:
Ferromagnetic Substances : Some substances containing more number of unpaired electrons are very strongly attracted by the external magrietic field. In Ferromagnetic substances the Magnetic moments in individual atoms are all alligned in the same direction. Such substances are called Ferromagnetic Substances. In ferromagnetic substances the field strength B > > > H.
E.g. : Fe, Co and Ni.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 20.
Explain paramagnetism with suitable example.
Answer:
Paramagnetic Substances : If the magnetic lines of forces are drawn into the substance the field (B) in the substances is greater than the applied field (H) i.e., B > H. Such a substance is called paramagnetic substance. Paramagnetic substance moves from a weaker part of the field to a stronger part of the field. Paramagnetic substances are weakly attracted in a external Magnetic field. They exhibit paramagnetism due to the presence of unpaired electrons.
E.g. : Cr+3, Sc+2, K3 [Fe (CN)6].

Question 21.
Explain Ferrimagnetisms with suitable example.
Answer:
Ferrimagnetism is observed when the magnetic moments of the domains in the substance are aligned in parallel and anti parallel directions in unequal numbers.

  • These are weakly attracted by magnetic field as compared to ferromagnetic substances.
  • These lose ferrimagnetism on heating and becomes paramagnetic.

Question 22.
Explain Antiferromagnetism with suitable example.
Answer:
Substances like Mno showing anti-ferromagnetism having domain structure similar to ferromagnetic substance, but their domains are oppositely oriented and cancel out each others magnetic moment.

Question 23.
Why X – rays are needed to probe the crystal structure ?
Answer:
According to the principles of optics, the wavelength of light used to observe an object must be no greater than the twice the length of the object it self. It is impossible to see atom s using even the finest optical microscope. To see the atoms we must use light with a wavelength of approximately 10-10 m. X – rays are present with in this region of electromagnetic spectrum. So X – rays are used to probe crystal structure.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Explain similarities and differences between metallic and ionic crystals.
Ans:
Similarities between ionic and metallic crystals :

  • Both ionic and metallic crystals have electrostatic force of attraction.
  • The bond present in ionic crystals and metallic crystals is non-directional.

Differences between ionic and metallic crystals :

Ionic Crystals

  1. In ionic crystals electrostatic force is in between oppositely charged ions.
  2. These are good conductors of electricity.
  3. Ionic bond in ionic crystals is strong.

Metallic Crystals

  1. In metallic crystals electrostatic force is in between the valency electrons.
  2. These are goods conductors of electricity  in solid state.
  3.  Metallic bond in metallic crystals is weak (or) strong.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 2.
Explain why ionic solids are hard and brittle.
Answer:
In ionic solids the formation of solid compound is due to the arrangements of cations and anions bound by strong coloumbic force i.e., electro static force. So ionic solids are hard and brittle in nature. These have high melting and boiling points.

Question 3.
Calculate the efficiency of packing in case of a metal of simple cubic crystal.
Answer:
Packing efficiency in case of metal of simple cubic crystal:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 4
The edge length of the cube
a = 2r. (r = radius of particle)
Volume of the cubic unit cell = a3 = (2r)3
= 8r3
∵ A simple cubic unit cell contains only one atom
The volume of space occupied = [latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex] πr3
∴ Packing efficiency
= [latex]\frac{\text { Volume of one atom }}{\text { Volume of cubic unit cell }}[/latex] × 100
= [latex]\frac{4 / 3 \pi r^{3}}{8 r^{3}}[/latex] × 100 = [latex]\frac{\pi}{6}[/latex] × 100 = 52.36%.

Question 4.
Calculate the efficiency of packing in case of a metal of body centered cubic crystal.
Answer:
Packing efficiency in case of a metal of body centred cubic crystal:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 5
in B.C.C. Crystal
[latex]\sqrt{3}[/latex]a = 4r
a = [latex]\frac{4 \mathrm{r}}{\sqrt{3}}[/latex]
In this structure total no. of atoms is ‘2’ and their volume = 2 × ([latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex]) πr3
Volume of the cube = a3 = ([latex]\frac{4}{\sqrt{3}}[/latex]r)3
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 6

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 5.
Calculate the efficiency of the packing incase of face – centered cubic crystal.
Answer:
Packing efficiency of face centered cubic crystal:
In fcc lattice assume that atoms are touching each other. Here unit cell edge length
a = 2[latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex] r
Each unit cell as effectively four spheres.
Total volume of four spheres = 4 × ([latex]\frac{4}{3}[/latex]) πr3
Volume of cube = a3 = (2[latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex]r)3
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 7

Question 6.
A cubic solid is made of two elements P and Q. Atoms of Q are at the corners of the cube and P at the body – centre. What is the formula of the compound ? What are the coordination numbers of P and Q?
Answer:
The contribution of atoms Q present at 8 corners of the cube = [latex]\frac{1}{8}[/latex] × 8 = 1
The contribution of atoms P present at the body centre = 1
Therefore ratio of P and Q = 1 : 1
So, the formula of the compound is PQ.
Co-ordination number of atoms P and Q = 8.

Question 7.
If the radius of the octahedral void is ‘r and radius of the atoms in close packing is ‘R’, derive relation between r and R.
Answer:
Derivation of relation between r and R:
Octahedral void is shown in the following diagram as a shaded circle.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 8
∴ ∆ ABC is a right angled triangle.
∴ We apply pythagoras theorem.
AC2 = AB2 + BC2
(2R)2 = (R + r)2 + (R + r)2 = 2 (R + r)2
4R2 = 2 (R + r)2
2R2 = (R + r)2
([latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex] R)P = (R + r)2
[latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex] R = R + r
r = [latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex] R – R
r = ([latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex] – 1)R
r = (1.414- 1) R
r = 0.414 R.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 8.
Describe the two main types of semiconductors and contrast their conduction mechanism. [A.P. Mar. 19]
Answer:
The solids which are having moderate conductivity between insulators and conductors are called semi conductors.
These have the conductivity range from 10-6 to 104 Ohm-1m-1.
By doping process the conductivity of semi conductors increases. E.g.: Si, Ge, crystal.
Semi conductors are Of two types. They are :
1. Intrinsic semi-conductors : In case of semi-conductors, the gap between the valence band and conduction band is small. Therefore, some electrons may jump to conduction band and show some conductivity. Electrical conductivity of semi-conductors increases with rise in “temperature”, since more electrons can jump to the conduction band. Substances like silicon and germanium show this type of behaviour and are called intrinsic semi-conductors.

2. Extrinsic semi – conductors : Their conductivity is due to the presence of impurities.
They are formed by “doping”. ,
Doping: Conductivity of semi-conductors is too low to be of pratical use. Their conductivity is increased by adding an appropriate amount of suitable impurity. This process is called “doping”.
Doping can be done with an impurity which is electron rich or electron deficient.

Extrinsic semi-conductors are of two types.
a) n-type semi-conductors : It is obtained by adding trace amount of V group element (P, As, Sb) to pure Si or Ge by doping.
When P, As, Sb (Or) Bi is added to Si or Ge some of the Si or Ge in the crystal are replaced by P or As atoms and four out of five electrons of P or As atom will be used for bonding with Si or Ge atoms while the fifth electron serve to conduct electricity.

b) p-type semi-conductors : It is obtained by doping with impurity atoms containing less electrons i.e., III group elements (B, Al, Ga or In).
When B or Al is added to pure Si or Ge some of the Si or Ge in the crystal are replaced by B or AZ atoms and four out of three electrons of B or Al atom will be used for bonding with “Si” or Ge atoms while the fourth valence electron is missing is called electron hole (or) electron vacancy. This vacancy on an atom in the structure migrates from one atom to another. Hence it facilitates the electrical conductivity.

Question 9.
Classify each of the following as either a p – type or a n – type semiconductor.
1. Ge doped with In
2. Si doped with B.
Answer:
Both (1) and (2) come under “p – type semiconductors”.
Reason: In both the cases dopants (i.e.,) Indium in case – (1) and Boron in case – (2) belong to III (or) 13th group. Si (or) Ge doped with III group element is known as p-type semi- conductor.
Explanation : Doping the silicon or germanium element with III or 13th group element like “B”, Al, Ga or “In” results in the substitution of some silicon atoms in its structure by the dopant. The dopant has only three valency electrons. The fourth valency electron is required. It is left as a vacant place on the atom. It is known as an ‘electron vacancy’ (or) a ‘hole’. The electron vacancy on ah atom in the structure migrates from one atom to another. Hence it facilitates the electrical conductivity. Si (or) Ge, doped with elements that create a hole in the structure, is known as p- type semi-conductor.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 10.
Analysis shows that nickel oxide has the formula Ni0.980, 1.00, what fractions of nickel exist as Ni2+ and Ni3+ ions ?
Answer:
In pure nickel oxide (NiO) the ratio of Ni and O atoms = 1 : 1
Let x be the no. of Ni (II) atoms replaced by Ni (III) atoms in the oxide
∴ Number of Ni (II) atoms present = 0.98 – x
Total charge on Ni atoms = charge on oxygen atom (∵ the oxide is neutral)
2 (0.98 – x) + 3x = 2
1.96 – 2x + 3x = 2
x = 2 – 1.96 = 0.04
No. of Ni (iii) atoms
% of Ni (III) atoms in Nickel oxide = AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 9 × 100
= [latex]\frac{0.04}{0.98}[/latex] × 4.01%
% of Ni (II) atoms in nickel oxide = 100 – 4.01 = 95.99%

Question 11.
Gold (atomic radius = 0.144 nm) crystallizes in a face centered unit cell. What is the length of a side of the unit cell ?
Answer:
In a fee unit cell .
The edge length a = 2[latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex] r
Given r = 0.144 nm
= 2 × 1.414 × 0.144 = 0.407 nm.

Question 12.
In terms of band theory, what is the difference between a conductor and an insulator ?
Answer:
In case of metals (conductors) the atomic orbitals forms molecular orbitals which are close in energy to each other as to form a band called valency band. If this band is partially filled (or) it overlaps with a higher energy unoccupied band called conduction band. Then electrons can flow easily under an applied electric field and the metal shows conductivity.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 10
In case of insulators the gap between filled valence band and the next higher un occupied band is large, electrons cannot jump to it and such a substance has very small conductivity.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 13.
In terms of band theory, what is the difference between a conductor and a semiconductor?
Answer:
In case of metals (conductors) the atomic orbitals forms molecular orbitals which are close in energy to each other as to form a band called valency band. If this band is partially filled (or) it overlaps with a higher energy unoccupied band called conduction band. Then electrons can flow easily under an applied electric field and the metal shows conductivity.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 11
In case of semi conductors, the gap between the valence band and conduction band is small. So some of electrons may jump to conduction band and show some conductivity.

Question 14.
If NaCl is doped with 1 × 10-3 mol percent of SrCl2, what is the concentration of cation vacancies ?
Answer:
The addition of SrCl2 to NaCl , each Sr+2 ion replaces two Na+ ions and occupies only one lattice point in place of Na+. Due to this one cation vacancy arised.
The number of moles of cation vacancies in 100 moles of NaCl = 1 × 10-3
The number of moles of cation vacancies in 1 moles NaCl = [latex]\frac{1 \times 10^{-3}}{100}[/latex] = 10-5 mole
Total number of cation vacancies = 10-5 × 6.023 × 1023 = 6.023 × 1018.

Question 15.
Derive Bragg’s equation. [T.S. Mar. 19, 16, 15; A.P. Mar. 17, 16, 15] [Mar. 14]
Answer:
Derivation of Bragg’s equation : When X-rays are incident on the crystal or plane, they are diffracted from the lattice points (lattice points may be atoms or ions or molecules). In the crystal the lattice points are arranged in regular pattern. When the waves are diffracted from these points, the waves may be constructive or destructive interference.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 12
The 1st and 2nd waves reach the crystal surface. They undergo constructive interference. Then from the figure 1st and 2nd rays are parallel waves. So, they travel the same distance till the wave form AD. The second crystal plane
ray travels more than the first by an extra distance (DB + BC) after crossing the grating for it to interfere with the first ray in a constructive manner. Then only they can be in the same phase with one another. If the two waves are to be in phase, the path difference between the two ways must be equal to the wavelength Q.) or integral multiple of it (nλ, where n = 1, 2, 3 )
(i.e.,) nλ = (DB + BC) [where n = order of diffraction]
DB = BC = d sin θ [θ = angle of incident beam,]
(DB + BC) = 2d sin θ [d = distance between the planes]
nλ = 2d sin θ
This relation is known as Bragg’s equation.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
How do you determine the atomic mass of an unknown metal If you know Its density and dimension of its unit cell? Explain.
Answer:
Let the, Atomic weight of crystalline substance = M
Avogadros number = N0
No. of atoms present per unit cell = Z
Density of unit cell or of the substance = ρ
Unit cell length = a
So, volume of the unit cell = a3 (= V)
∴ Then, mass corresponding to each lattice point = M/N0
∴ Mass of ‘Z lattice points = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{ZM}}{\mathrm{N}_{0}}[/latex]
∴ Density (p) of unit cell = [latex]\frac{\text { mass }}{\text { volume }}=\frac{\frac{\mathrm{Z} \cdot \mathrm{M}}{\mathrm{N}_{0}}}{\mathrm{a}^{3}}=\frac{\mathrm{ZM}}{\mathrm{N}_{0} \mathrm{a}^{3}}[/latex]
Atomic weight M = [latex]\frac{\rho \times \mathrm{a}^{3} \mathrm{~N}_{0}}{\mathrm{Z}}[/latex]

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 2.
Silver crystallizes in FCC lattice. If edge of the cell is 4.07 × 10-8 and density is 10.5 g. cm-3. Calculate the atomic mass of silver.
Answer:
Given data
d = 10.5 g/cm3
a = 4.07 × 10-8 cm
Z = 4 atoms
NA = 6.023 × 1023
Formula M = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{d} \times \mathrm{a}^{3} \times \mathrm{N}_{\mathrm{A}}}{\mathrm{Z}}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{10.5 \times\left(4.07 \times 10^{-8}\right)^{3} \times 6.023 \times 10^{23}}{4}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{10.5 \cdot \times 67.767 \times 10^{-24} \times 6.023 \times 10^{23}}{4}[/latex]
= 107.09 gm/mole.

Question 3.
Niobium crystallizes in body – centered cubic structure. If density is 8.55 g cm-3, calculate atomic radius of niobium using its atomic mass 93 U.
Answer:
Radius of unit cell in bcc structure = [latex]\frac{\sqrt{3}}{4}[/latex] a
First we have to calculate edge length of unit cell ‘a’
Given Atomic mass of Niobium = 93 g/mole
No. of particles in bcc type unit cell (Z) = 2
mass of unit cell = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{ZM}}{\mathrm{N}_{\mathrm{A}}}=\frac{2 \times 93}{6.023 \times 10^{23}}[/latex] = 30.89 × 1023 gms
Given Density (d) = 8.55 gm/cm3
Volume of unit cell (a3) = [latex]\frac{\text { mass }}{\text { density }}=\frac{30.89 \times 10^{23}}{8.55}[/latex]
= 36.16 × 10-24 cm3.
Edge length of unit cell (a) = (36.13 × 10-24)1/3
= 3.31 × 10-8 cm
radius of Unit cell (r) = [latex]\frac{\sqrt{3}}{4}[/latex] a
= [latex]\frac{\sqrt{3} \times 3.31 \times 10^{-8}}{4}[/latex]
= 1.43 × 10-8 cm = 143 pm.

Question 4.
Copper crystallizes into a FCC lattice with edge length 3.61 × 10-8 cm. Show that the calculated density is in agreement with its measured value of 8.92 g.cm-3.
Answer:
Density d = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{ZM}}{\mathrm{a}^{3} \times \mathrm{N}_{\mathrm{A}}}[/latex]
Given edge length 3.61 × 10-8 cm
For FCC lattice of copper, Z = 4
Atomic mass of copper M = 63.5 gms/mole
d = [latex]\frac{4 \times 63.5}{\left(3.61 \times 10^{-8}\right)^{3} \times 6.023 \times 10^{23}}[/latex]
= 8.97 g/cm3
The calculated value is approximately in agreement with the measured value 8.92 g/cm3.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 5.
Ferric oxide crystallizes in a hexagonal close – packed array of oxide ions with two of every three octahedral holes occupied by ferric ions. Derive the formula of ferric oxide.
Answer:
Given ferric oxide crystallises in a hexagonal close packed array of oxide ions with two out of every three octahedral,holes occupied by ferric ions.
In hexagonal close – packed arrangement there is one octahedral hole for each atom. If the number of oxide ions (O-2) per unit cell is one, then the number of Fe+3 ions = 2/ 3 × octahedral holes.
= 2/3 × 1 = 2/3
The formula of the compound = Fe2/3 O1 (or) Fe2 O3.

Question 6.
Aluminium crystallizes in a cubic close packed structure. Its metallic radius is 125 pm.
i) What is the length of the side of the unit cell.
ii) how many unit cells are there in 1.00 cm3 of aluminium.
Answer:
i) Given radius = 125 pm
For a fcc lattice unit cell r = [latex]\frac{a}{2 \sqrt{2}}[/latex]
a = 2[latex]\sqrt{2}[/latex] × r
= 2 × 1.414 × 125 = 353.5 pm
∴ Length of the side of the unit cell = 353.5 pm

ii) Volume of unit cell = a3 = (353.5 × 10-10 cm)3
= 442 × 10-25 cm3
Number of unit cell = [latex]\frac{1}{4.42 \times 10^{-25}}[/latex]
= 2.26 × 1022 unit cells.

Question 7.
How do you obtain the diffraction pattern for a crystalline substance ?
Answer:
Diffraction of electromagnetic radiation takes place when a beam of light is scattered by an object containing regularly spaced lines (or) points. This scattering phenomenon can happen only if the spacing between the lines (of) points is comparable to the wave length of the radiation.

From the following figure diffraction is due to interface between two waves passing through the same region of space at the same time.
If the waves are in phase, peak to peak and trough to trough, the interference is constructive and the combined wave is increased intensity.

  • If the waves are out of phase, the interference is destructive interference and the wave is cancelled.
  • Constructive interference gives rise to intense spots observed on Laue’s photographic plate, while destructive interference causes the surrounding high) areas.
    AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 13

Derivation of Bragg’s equation : When X-rays are incident on the crystal or plane, they are diffracted from the lattice points (lattice points may be atoms or ions or molecules). In the crystal the lattice points are arranged in regular pattern. When the waves are diffracted from these points, the waves may be constructive or destructive interference.
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 14
The 1st and 2nd waves reach the crystal surface. They undergo constructive interference. Then from the figure 1 and 2h1 rays are parallel waves. So, they travel the same distance till the wave front AD. The second ray travels more than the first by an extra distance (DB + BC) after crossing the grating for it to interfere with the first ray in a constructive manner. Then only they can be in the same phase with one another. If the two waves are to be in phase, the path difference between the two ways must be equal to the wavelength (λ) or integral multiple of it (nλ, where n = 1, 2, 3 )
(i.e.,) nλ = (DB + BC) [where n = order of diffraction]
DB = BC = d sin θ [θ = angle of incident beam,]
(DB + BC) = 2d sin θ [d = distance between the planes]
nλ = 2d sin θ
This relation is known as Bragg’s equation.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Textual Examples

Question 1.
A compound is formed by two elements X and Y. Atoms of the element Y (as anions) make ccp and those of the element X (as cations) occupy all the octahedral voids. What is the formula of the compound ?
Solution:
The ccp lattice is formed by the element Y. The number of octahedral voids generated would be equal to the number of atoms of Y present in it. Since all the octahedral voids are occupied by the atoms of X, their number would also be equal to that of the element Y. Thus, the atoms of elements X and Y are present in equal numbers or 1 : 1 ratio. Therefore, the formula of the compound is XY.

Question 2.
Atoms of element B form hep lattice and those of the element A occupy 2/3rd of tetrahedral voids. What is the formula of the compound formed by the elements A and B ?
Solution:
The number of tetrahedral voids formed is equal to twice the number of atoms of element B and only 2/3rd of these are occupied by the atoms of element A. Hence the ratio of the number of atoms of A and B is 2 × (2/3) : 1 or 4 : 3 and the formula of the compound is A4B3.

Question 3.
An element has a body-centred cubic (bcc) structure with a cell edge of 288 pm. The density of the element is 7.2 g/cm3. How many atoms are present in 208 g of the element ?
Solution:
Volume of the unit cell = (288 pm)3
= (288 × 10-12 m)3 = (288 × 10-10 cm)3 = 2.39 × 10-23 cm3.
Volume of 208 g of the element
= [latex]\frac{\text { mass }}{\text { density }}=\frac{208 \mathrm{~g}}{7.2 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~cm}^{-3}}[/latex] = 28.88 cm3
Number of unit cells in this volume
= [latex]\frac{28.88 \mathrm{~cm}^{3}}{2.39 \times 10^{-23} \mathrm{~cm}^{3} / \text { Unit cell }}[/latex] = 12.08 × 1023 unit cells
Since each bcc cubic unit cell contains 2 atoms, therefore, the total number of atoms in 208 g = 2 (atoms/unit cell) × 12.08 × 1023 unit cells
= 24.16 × 1023 atoms

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 4.
X-ray diffraction studies show that copper crystallises in ah fee unit cell with cell edge of 3.608 x 10-8 cm. In a separate experiment, copper is determined to have a density of 8.92 g/cm3, calculate the atomic mass of copper.
Solution:
In case of fee lattice, number of atoms per unit cell, z = 4 atoms.
Therefore, M = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{dN}_{\mathrm{A}} \mathbf{a}^{3}}{z}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{8.92 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~cm}^{-3} \times 6.022 \times 10^{23} \text { atoms mol}^{-1} \times\left(3.608 \times 10^{-8} \mathrm{~cm}\right)^{3}}{4 \text { atoms }}[/latex] = 63.1 g/mol
Atomic mass of copper = 63.1 u

Question 5.
Silver forms ccp lattice and X-ray studies of its ciystals show that the edge length of its unit cell is 408.6 pm. Calculate the density of silver (Atomic mass = 107.9 u).
Solution:
Since the lattice is ccp, the number of silver atoms per unit celll = z = 4
Molar mass of silver = 107.9 g mol-1 = 107.9 × 10-3 kg mol-1.
Edge length of unit cell = a = 408.6 pm = 408.6 × 10-12 m
Density, d = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{z} \cdot \mathrm{M}}{\mathrm{a}^{3} \cdot \mathrm{N}_{\mathrm{A}}}[/latex]
= [latex]\frac{4 \times\left(107.9 \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~kg} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}\right)}{\left(408.6 \times 10^{-12} \mathrm{~m}\right)^{3}\left(6.022 \times 10^{23} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}\right)}[/latex]
= 10.5 × 103 kg m-3
= 10.5 g cm3.

Intext Questions

Question 1.
Why are solids rigid ?
Answer:
In solid state the constituent particles are not free to move. They can only oscillate about their mean positions due to strong attraction forces between the particles. That is why solids have a closely packed arrangement and rigid structure.

Question 2.
Why do solids have a definite volume ?
Answer:
The constituents particles in solids are bound to th.eir mean positions by strong forces of attraction. The interparticle distances remain unchanged even at increased or reduced pressure. Therefore, solids have a definite volume.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 3.
Classify the following as amorphous or crystalline solids : polyurethane, naphthalene, benzoic acid, teflon, potassium nitrate, cellophane, polyvinyl chloride, fibre glass, copper.
Answer:
Amorphous solids
Polyurethane
Naphthalene
Teflon
Cellophane
Polyvinyl chloride
Fibre glass

Crystalline solids
Benzoic acid
Potassium nitrate
Copper

Question 4.
Why is glass considered a supercooled liquid ?
Answer:
Liquids have the characteristic property i.e., the tendency to flow. Glass also shows this property, though it flows very slowly. Glass panes fixed to windows or doors of old buildings are invariably found to be slightly thicker at the bottom than the top. This is because the glass flows down very slowly and makes the bottom portion slightly thicker. Therefore, glass is considered as a supercooled liquid.

Question 5.
Refractive index of a solid is observed to have the same value along all directions. Comment on the nature of this solid. Would it show cleavage property ?
Answer:
A solid has same value of refractive index along all directions is isotropic and hence amorphous in nature. It would not show a clean cleavage when cut with a knife. Instead, it would break into pieces With irregular surface.

Question 6.
Classify the following solids in diff rent categories based on the nature of intermolecular forces operating in them :
Potassium sulphate, tin, benzene, urea, ammonia, water, zinc sulphide, graphite, rubidium, argon, silicon carbide.
Answer:
Ionic solids : Potassium sulphate, zinc sulphide (as they have iohic bonds).
Covalent solids : Graphite, silicon carbide (as they are covalent giant molecules).
Molecular solids : Benzene, urea, ammonia, water, argon (as they have covalent bond).
Metallic solids : Rubidium, tin (as these are metals).

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 7.
Solid A’ is a very hard electrical insulator in solid as well as in molten state and melts at extremely high temperature. What type of solid is it ?
Answer:
Since, the solid ‘A’ is an insulator in solid as well as in molten state, it shows the absence of ions in it. Moreover it melts at extremly high temperature, so it is a giant molecule. These are the properties of covalent solids. So, it is a covalent solid.

Question 8.
Ionic solids conduct electricity in molten state but not in solid state. Explain.
Answer:
In ionic solids, electrical conductivity is due to the movement of ions. In solid state, ions cannot move and remain held together by strong electrostatic forces of attraction. Therefore, they behave as insulators.

Question 9.
What type of solids are electrical conductors, malleable and ductile ?
Answer:
Metallic solids.

Question 10.
Ire the significance of a ‘lattice point’.
Answer:
The lattice point denotes the position of a particular constituent (atom, ion or molecule) in a crystal lattice. The arrangement of the lattice points in space is responsible for the shape of a particular crystalline solid.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 11.
Name the parameters that characterise a unit cell.
Answer:
A unit cell is characterised by

  1. its dimensions along the three edges, a, b and c.
  2. angles between the edges, α (between b and c) β ( between a and c) and γ (between a and b).
    Thus, a unit cell is characterised by six parameters, a, b, c, α, β and γ.

Question 12.
Distinguish between
i) hexagonal and monoclinic unit cells.
ii) face-centered and end-centered unit cells.
Answer:
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 15
AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 16

Question 13.
Explain how much portion of an atom located at

  1. Corner ?
  2. body-centre of a cubic unit cell is part of its neighbouring unit cell ?

Answer:

  1. A point lying at the corner of a unit cell is shared equally by eight unit cells and therefore,
  2. A body centred point belongs entirely to one unit cell since, it is not shared by any other unit cell.

Question 14.
What is the two dimensional coordination number of a molecule in square close packed layer ?
Answer:
Four (4),.as each atom is surrounded by four other atoms.

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 15.
A compound forms hexagonal close-packed structure. What is the total number of voids in 0.5 mol of it ? How many of these are tetrahedral voids ?
Answer:
Total number of atoms (N) in a closed packed structure (0.5 mol)
= 0.5 × 6.022 × 1023 = 3.011 × 1023
Number of octahedral voids = N = 3.011 × 1023
Number of tetrahedral voids = 2N = 2 × 3.011 × 1023 = 6.022 × 1023
Total number of voids = 3.011 × 1023 + 6.022 × 1023
= 9.033 × 1023

Question 16.
A compound is formed by two elements M and N. The element N forms ccp and atoms of M occupy [latex]\frac{1}{3}[/latex] rd of tetrahedral voids. What is the formula of the compound ?
i) Find the number of tetrahedral voids as number of tetrahedral voids = 2 × number of atoms present in the lattice.
ii) Calculate the number of atoms (or ratio) of elements M and N as a chemical formula represents the number of atoms of different elements presents in a compound.
iii) Derive the’ formula.
Answer:
Suppose atoms of element N present in ccp = x
Then number of tetrahedral voids = 2x
Since, [latex]\frac{1}{3}[/latex] rd of the tetrahedral voids are occupied by atoms of elements M.
Therefore, number of atoms of element M = [latex]\frac{1}{3}[/latex] × 2x = [latex]\frac{2x}{3}[/latex]
Ratio of M : N = [latex]\frac{2x}{3}[/latex] : x = 2 : 3
Hence, formula of the compound = M2N3.

Question 17.
Which of the following lattices has the highest packing efficiency ?

  1. Simple cubic
  2. Body-centred cubic
  3. Hexagonal close-packed lattice

Packing efficiency in .

  1. Simple cubic lattice = 52.4%
  2. body-centred cubic lattice = 68%
  3. hexagonal close-packed lattice = 74%

Answer:
Hexagonal closed packed lattice has the highest packing efficiency (74%)

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 18.
An element with molar mass 2.7 × 10-2 kg mol-1 forms a cubic unit cell with edge length 405 pm. If its density is 2.7 × 103 kg m-3 what is the nature of the cubic unit cell ?
Answer:
Density (d) = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{Z} \times \mathrm{M}}{\mathrm{a}^{3} \times \mathrm{N}_{\mathrm{A}}}[/latex] so, Z = [latex]\frac{\mathrm{d} \times \mathrm{a}^{3} \times \mathrm{N}_{\mathrm{A}}}{\mathrm{M}}[/latex]
Given, M = 2.7 × 10-2 kg mol-1
a = 405 pm = 405 × 10-12 m = 4.05 × 10-10m
d = 2.7 × 103 kgm-3
NA = 6.022 × 1023 mol-1.
Hence.
Z = [latex]\frac{\left(2.7 \times 10^{3 .} \mathrm{kg} \mathrm{m}^{-3}\right)\left(4.05 \times 10^{-10} \mathrm{~m}\right)^{3} \times\left(6.022 \times 10^{23} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}\right)}{\left(2.7 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{~kg} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}\right)}[/latex]
= 3.99 = 4
Since, there are four atoms per unit cell, the cubic unit cell must be face – centred.

Question 19.
What type of defect can arise when a solid is heated ? physical property is affected by it and in what way ?
Answer:
When a solid is heated, a vacancy is created in the crystal. On heating, some of the lattice sites are vacant and the density of the solid decreases as the number of ions per unit volume decreases.

Question 20.
What type of stoichiometric defect is shown by

  1. ZnS
  2. AgBr

Answer:

  1. ZnS shows Frenkel defect because its ions have large difference in size.
  2. AgBr shows both Frenkel and Schottky defects.

Question 21.
Explain how vacancies are introduced in an ionic solid when a cation of higher valence is aded as an impurity in it ?
Answer:
When a cation of higher valence is added as an impurity to an ionic solid, some vacancies are created. This can be explained with the help of an example. When strontium, chloride (SrCl2) is added as an impurity to ionic solid sodium chloride (NaCl), two vacant sites are created by removal of one Na+ ion. One vacant site is replaced by Sr2+ ion but the other remains vacant. The reason is that the crystal as a whole is to remain electrically neutral. Note : [Cationic vacancies produced = No. of cations of higher valency × difference in ’ valencies of the original cation and cation of higher valency]

AP Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 22.
Ionic solids, which have anionic vacancies due to metal excess defect, develop colour. Explain with the help of a suitable example.
Answer:
We can explain the metal excess defect with the example of sodium chloride crystals. When NaCl crystals are heated in an atmosphere of sodium vapour, the Na atoms are deposited on the surface of the crystal. The Cl ions diffuse to the surface of the crystal and combine with Na atoms to give NaCZ. This happens by loss of electron by Na atoms to form Na+ ions. The released electrons occupy anionic sites by diffusing into the crystals. These electrons absorb energy from visible light and emit radiations corresponding to yellow colour. These electrons are called F-centres (from the German word Farbenzenter meaning colour centre).

Question 23.
A group 14 elements is to be converted into n-type semiconductor by doping it with a suitable impurity. To which group should this impurity belong ?
Answer:
n-type semiconductor means increase in conductivity due to presence of excess of electrons. Therefore, a 14 group element should be doped with a 15-group element Eg : arsenic or phosphorus.

Question 24.
What type of substances would make better permanent magnets, ferromagnetic or ferrimagnetic ? Justify your answer
Answer:
Ferromagnetic substances make better permanent magnets than ferrimagnetic substances. The metal ions of a ferromagenetic substance are grouped into small regions known as domains and these are randomly oriented. When a magnetic field is applied, all domains are oriented in the direction of the magnetic field. Now the ferromagnetic substance behaves as a magnet. When the applied magnetic field is removed, the magnetic character is retained. Thus, the ferromagnetic substance becomes a permanent magnet.
This property (of being permanently magnetised) is not found in ferrimagnetic substances. They lose their magnetic property on heating.

AP Inter 2nd Year Zoology Notes

Students can go through Telangana & Andhra Pradesh BIEAP TS AP Inter 2nd Year Zoology Notes Pdf Download in English Medium and Telugu Medium to understand and remember the concepts easily. Besides, with our AP Sr Inter 2nd Year Zoology Notes students can have a complete revision of the subject effectively while focusing on the important chapters and topics.

Students can also go through AP Inter 2nd Year Zoology Study Material and AP Inter 2nd Year Zoology Important Questions for exam preparation.

AP Intermediate 2nd Year Zoology Notes

TS AP Inter 2nd Year Zoology Weightage Blue Print

These TS AP Intermediate 2nd Year Zoology Notes provide an extra edge and help students to boost their self-confidence before appearing for their final examinations. These Inter 2nd Year Zoology Notes will enable students to study smartly and get a clear idea about each and every concept discussed in their syllabus.

AP Inter 2nd Year Zoology Important Questions Chapter Wise Pdf 2022-2023 | Sr Inter Zoology Important Questions

TS AP Intermediate 2nd Year Zoology Important Questions Chapter Wise 2022: Here we have created a list of Telangana & Andhra Pradesh BIEAP TS AP Intermediate Sr Inter 2nd Year Zoology Important Questions Chapter Wise with Answers 2022-2023 Pdf Download just for you. Those who are preparing for Inter exams should practice the Intermediate 2nd Year Zoology Important Questions Pdf and do so will clear their doubts instantly. These Senior Inter Zoology Important Questions with Answers enhance your conceptual knowledge and prepares you to solve different types of questions in the exam.

Students must practice these AP Inter 2nd Year Zoology Important Questions Pdf to boost their preparation for the exam paper. These AP Intermediate 2nd Year Zoology Important Questions with Answers are prepared as per the latest exam pattern. Each of these chapters contains a set of solved questions and additional questions for practice.

Students can also read AP Inter 2nd Year Zoology Study Material for exam preparation. Students can also go through AP Inter 2nd Year Zoology Notes to understand and remember the concepts easily.

AP Intermediate 2nd Year Zoology Important Questions with Answers Chapter Wise 2022

Intermediate 2nd Year Zoology Important Questions Chapter Wise 2022

  • Chapter 1 Human Anatomy and Physiology – I
    • Chapter 1(a) Digestion and Absorption Important Questions
    • Chapter 1(b) Breathing and Exchange of Gases Important Questions
  • Chapter 2 Human Anatomy and Physiology – II
    • Chapter 2(a) Body Fluids and Circulation Important Questions
    • Chapter 2(b) Excretory Products and their Elimination Important Questions
  • Chapter 3 Human Anatomy and Physiology – III
    • Chapter 3(a) Musculo-Skeletal System Important Questions
    • Chapter 3(b) Neural Control and Coordination Important Questions
  • Chapter 4 Human Anatomy and Physiology – IV
    • Chapter 4(a) Endocrine System and Chemical Coordination Important Questions
    • Chapter 4(b) Immune System Important Questions
  • Chapter 5 Human Reproduction
    • Chapter 5(a) Human Reproductive System Important Questions
    • Chapter 5(b) Reproductive Health Important Questions
  • Chapter 6 Genetics Important Questions
  • Chapter 7 Organic Evolution Important Questions
  • Chapter 8 Applied Biology Important Questions

TS AP Inter 2nd Year Zoology Weightage Blue Print

We are providing well-organized Zoology Important Questions Inter 2nd Year that will help students in their exam preparation. These Zoology Inter 2nd Year Important Questions are designed by subject experts. So Students should utilise the Intermediate 2nd Year Zoology Important Questions with Answers 2022 to pass their board exams with flying colours.

The questions given in the Inter Second Year Zoology Important Questions are designed and laid out chronologically and as per the syllabus. Students can expect that these TS AP Intermediate Inter 2nd Year Zoology Important Questions Chapter Wise Pdf 2022-2023 might be covered in the final exam paper.